The Arsenal Files 2

home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search

/ The Arsenal Files 2 / The Arsenal Files 2 (Arsenal Computer).ISO / os2 / redbooks.inf (.txt) < prev next >

Wrap

OS/2 Help File | 1994-08-01 | 417.4 KB | 14,106 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. About this file... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This file was generated from the source of the Bibliography of ITSO Technical Bulletins. Also included is the latest Redbook information. We will make every effort to keep it up to date. Jerry A. Stegenga II, ITSO Boca Raton Center ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Redbooks for last month (Summary) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. AB-APPLICATION BUSINESS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4222-00 IBM AS/400 APPN Problem Management 05/94 232 55.25 GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. AX-AIX SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. CH-COMMUNICATION HARDWARE SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4221-00 ADSM Advanced Implementation Experiences 05/94 140 53.50 GG24-3669-02 APPN Architecture and Product Implemenntations 05/94 300 35.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. CM-COMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4292-00 RODMTool/2: Advanced Use of NetView Graphic 05/94 246 35.00 GG24-4222-00 IBM AS/400 APPN Problem Management 05/94 232 55.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.5. CS-COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4292-00 RODMTool/2: Advanced Use of NetView Graphic 05/94 246 35.00 GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 05/94 238 75.00 Sucessful TaPC/2 Installation GG24-3669-02 APPN Architecture and Product Implemenntations 05/94 300 35.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6. DS-DATA SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4153-00 Distributed Relational Database DB2 Multisite 05/94 182 49.75 Update GG24-4109-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Image 05/94 160 40.00 Processing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7. LS-LARGE SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GX28-8002-04 Network Product Reference 05/94 48 21.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4281-00 RACF V2.1 Presentation Guide 05/94 270 35.00 GG24-4109-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Image 05/94 160 40.00 Processing GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 GG24-4095-00 OpenEdition MVS for MVS/ESA 5.1 Presentation 05/94 164 48.00 Guide GG24-3329-00 MVS/ESA JES3 Monitoring Facility 05/94 94 33.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8. OF-OFFICE SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 05/94 238 75.00 Sucessful TaPC/2 Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.9. OP-OPEN SYSTEMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 05/94 238 75.00 Sucessful TaPC/2 Installation GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 GG24-4095-00 OpenEdition MVS for MVS/ESA 5.1 Presentation 05/94 164 48.00 Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.10. PS-PERSONAL SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4346-00 OS/2 Power Techniques 05/941200 - GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 05/94 238 75.00 Sucessful TaPC/2 Installation GG24-4213-00 Introduction to OS/2 2.1 National Language 05/94 202 20.00 Support GG24-4212-00 OS/2 2.11, OS/2.1 for Windows, New OS/2 Device 05/94 440 24.95 Drivers, and Updates to OS/2 2.1 GG24-4201-00 OS/2 Configuration Techniques: "Cracking" the 05/94 328 24.95 Workplace Shell GG24-4109-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Image 05/94 160 40.00 Processing GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 GG24-3946-00 VisualAge: Concepts and Features 05/94 146 14.95 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.11. SD-SYSTEMS DESIGN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.12. SM-CENTRAL SITE SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4292-00 RODMTool/2: Advanced Use of NetView Graphic 05/94 246 35.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.13. ST-STORAGE SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4095-00 OpenEdition MVS for MVS/ESA 5.1 Presentation 05/94 164 48.00 Guide GG24-4221-00 ADSM Advanced Implementation Experiences 05/94 140 53.50 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.14. VM-VM SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.15. Note ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Titles without Date, Pages and Price are not orderable as of the date of the creation of this file. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Redbooks for last month (Abstracts) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. GG24-3329-00 MVS/ESA JES3 Monitoring Facility 94p 33.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the JES3 Monitoring Facility, JMF. It provides a description of the reports and provides background information on the JES3 functions that are monitored by JMF. This document was written for systems programmers and performance personnel working with MVS/ESA and JES3. Some knowledge of MVS/ESA JES3 is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. GG24-3442-02 IBM AS/400 TCP/IP Configuration and Operation 322p 79.75 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) for AS/400 Licensed Program. It is intended customers who need to configure and use the program product without having special AS/400 TCP/IP skill, and it provides additional considerations for those who want to get to know the program product in more detail. It covers the full range of the AS/400 TCP/IP protocol suite including TELNET, FTP, SMTP, LPR/LPD, Netstat, and the TCP/UDP API. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. GG24-3614-02 Managing Multiple AS/400s in a Peer Network 442p 68.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the tasks required to manage multiple AS/400 systems in a networked environment with an AS/400 acting as the management focal point. It provides descriptions and practical examples of the tasks required and the tools available in this area. This third edition adds information about Automation Center/400, Nobile Network Access, Managed System Services/400, LAN Resource Extension and Services/400, Backup Recovery and Media Services/400, DataHub Support for AS/400 and FASTService for the AS/400. The document is intended for AS/400 technical analysts who need to understand multiple systems management and to control APPN networks. Technical knowledge of managing a single AS/400 and basic AS/400 communications is assumed. This document is not a substitute for any AS/400 system manual. It does not repeat detailed information avaiable in the system manuals ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. GG24-3669-02 APPN Architecture and Product Implementations 300p 35.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking within the Systems Network Architecture. It provides a tutorial on the APPN architectural functions, the relationship between these functions, and a summary of implementations in various products. This revision includes information on high-performance routing (HPR); the extended border node & dependent LU requester/server functions are described in detail. This document intended for system engineers, system planners, system programmers, and network administrators who need to know the APPN functions, the APPN node types, & their interrelation. A basic knowledge of networking concepts and terminology is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. GG24-3946-00 VisualAge: Concepts and Features 146p 14.95 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes VisualAge, a high-productivity application development tool for workstation applications in a client/server environment, based on the new construction from parts technology. Applications are created by laying out reusable components on a design surface, and then developing functional relationships among parts by drawing lines between them. The user interface is constructed in a similar way. Connections are made between user interface parts and from user interface parts to nonvisual to non- visual parts to specify the behavior of the application when it runs. This document provides a description of the concepts and features of the product from a high-level overview to its more detailed aspects, with focus on its most innovative aspects: visual programming and construction from parts. This document was written for people involved with application development who need information about new tools and directions, and need to build high- function client/server applications. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. GG24-4027-01 AS/400 Client Series Products and Positioning 324p 80.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the AS/400 Client Series products as announced in May 1994. It replaces the document from May 1993. The document gives you a flavor of each of the Client Series products, highlighting the features that differentiate each one from the others, allowing you to draw some comparisons between the products with the intention of helping you decide which one(s) may be suitable for you. This document is intended for readers who are considering using the AS/400 in a client/server environment. A knowledge of Personal Computer software (OS/2 and Microsoft Windows) PC Support/400 and database access on the AS/400 is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. GG24-4090-01 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 308p 42.40 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Windows This document describes the application programming interfaces (APIs) provided by the Open Software Foundation (OSF) Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) services. It gives programming guidelines to programmers and application developers who need to develop distributed applications using DCE services. The DCE Remote Procedure Call (RPC) and DCE Threads APIs are discussed. The document is intended to assist IBM system engineers and customers in designing, writing, compiling, linking, and running distributed applications on the AIX, OS/2 and DOS/Windows operating systems. Working knowledge of DCE administration and C language programming on AIX, OS/2 and Windows is assumed. A companion diskette with sample programs is shipped with the book. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. GG24-4095-00 OpenEdition MVS for MVS/ESA 5.1 Presentation 164p 48.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Guide This document describes Open Edition MVS for MVS/ESA SP 5.1 which offers support for POSIX standards on MVS/ESA. It allows MVS/ESA applications to be designed and written in compliance with POSIX 1003.1, 1003.1a, 1003.2, 1003.2a subset, and 1003.4a subset draft 6. It also enables porting of applications from other conforming POSIX operating systems. This document is intended for system programmers, application programmers, & IBM Technical Professionals Professionals who need to know the capabilities of POSIX on MVS/ESA applications. It also discusses the MVS/ESA structure required to support such applications. Some knowledge of Open Edition MVS for MVS/ESA SP 5.1 is required along with a basic knowledge of MVS/ESA, DF/SMS MVS, TSO/E, and TCP/IP. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9. GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 100p 63.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the possibilities for printing and viewing in different IBM system environments and configurations. It is meant to help the reader to evaluate the differences in functions each environment and configuration can offer. The document belongs to the Library of Systems Solutions. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.10. GG24-4109-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Image 160p 40.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document is part of The Library for Systems Solutions, which is intended for technical professionals involved in defining solutions to data processing problems, in multiple configuration environments and multiple software platforms, including heterogeneous distributed environments. This particular document describes the highlights and features of the various IBM operational image systems. It includes all of the ImagePlus systems and provides a basis for product for differentiation. The LAN and WAN communications environment for each ImagePlus solution is described in the last chapter. Chapter 5 introduces the ImagePlus VisualInfo Solution which is the latest product addition to the ImagePlus family. It is based on a client/ server architecture and can run on OS/2 and host-based platforms. In summary, the information contained herein is designed to provide an introduction to operational image systems and to give an insight into the features and functions of the various IBM ImagePlus solutions. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.11. GG24-4149-00 Using Network Security Program on AIX, OS/2, 158p 53.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ and DOS Platforms This document describes Network Security Program (NetSP) which is a distributed authentication & key distribution program that can run on the AIX/6000, OS/2 and DOS operating system platforms over TCP/IP LU 6.2 and NetBIOS transfer protocols. NetSP authenticates the identity of two communicating principals in the network and provides each with the ability to verify the identity of the other, without passwords being sent in clear across the network. The communicating principals can be either people (users) or programs (application servers). Messages can be signed and verified, so that any illicit alteration to them will be detected. The product also supports single signon to multiple host applications, again without passwords being sent in clear across the network. This document was written for those who wish to install the product, or write programs which use its APIs. Included are examples of the results obtained when using the product, and sample applications which use the APIs provided. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.12. GG24-4153-00 Distributed Relational Database DB2 Multisite 182p 49.75 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Update The document explains the DB2 V3 multisite update capabilities based on the distributed unit of work (DUW) that is archtected by the Distributed Relational Database Architecture level 2 (DRDA2). The document provides application design guidance and program code examples for the development of applications that connect to multiple sites and update data at remote relational DBMSs within one distributed unit of work. System aspects such as thread management, problem determination and indoubt thread resolution, indoubt thread resolution, accounting, and recovery are also considered. The document is written for customers and technical professionals who will design, implement, and administer distributed database applications using the DB2 multisite update capabilities based on DRDA2 DUW. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.13. GG24-4176-00 Experiences using the 4690 Operating System 316p 96.50 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the 4690 Operating System Version 1. It provides help and guidance on installation configuration and use of the 4690 OS in a variety of store environments. Information is is also provided to help in migrating from the 4680 Operating System. This document was written for customers, business partners or IBM people involved in planning, installing and configuring stores with the 4690 OS. Some knowledge of a store environment is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14. GG24-4187-00 AS/400 V2R3: Software Life Cycle Management 262p 61.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ with Application Development Manager/400 and SystemView System Manager/400 This document describes the use of Application Development Manager/400 (ADM/400), Application Dictionary Services/400 (ADS/400) and SystemView System Manager/400 (SVSM/400) in managing, developing packaging, and installation of application software. It introduces these products at the appropriate stages of the software life cycle. The diskettes included in this publication contain the sample programs. In addition there is a section describing the use of ManagerWare/400 in managing personal computing application. This document is intended for customers, independent software vendors, and IBM representatives who need to know or advise others in managing AS/400 applications. A basic understanding of ADM/400, ADS/400, and SVSM/400 is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.15. GG24-4201-00 OS/2 Configuration Techniques: "Cracking" the 328p 24.95 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Workplace Shell This document describes interfaces to the Workplace Shell of OS/2 Version 2.1. It provides a discussion and examples of using the CONFIG.SYS, .RC files, .INI files and programs to install, customize and distribute the OS/2 Workplace Shell in a stand-alone and distributed environment. This document was written for IBM Technical Professionals. Some knowledge of OS/2 is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.16. GG24-4212-00 OS/2 2.11, OS/2.1 for Windows, New OS/2 Device 440p 24.95 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Drivers, and Updates to OS/2 2.1 This document describes OS/2 2.11 and the other updates to OS/2 2.1 between its release in May 1993 and the publication of this document in May 1994. It includes information on OS/2 2.1 for Windows, the ServicePaks, and the new device drivers. It also includes a general discussion of OS/2 storage and display device drivers. This document was written for customers, dealers, system engineers, consultants and others who need to know what is new in these updates to OS/2 2.1 and to understand the benefits. A knowledge of OS/2 2.1 is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.17. GG24-4213-00 Introduction to OS/2 2.1 National Language 202 20.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document provides an introduction to the National Language Support provided in OS/2 2.1, and to the various National Language Versions of OS/2 2.1. It includes an overview of the differences of these form the US English version of OS/2 2.1, and describes special considerations for installation, usage and programming. This document was written for IBM customers, dealers, system engineers, consultants, application developers and others who need to understand the National Language Support in OS/2 2.1. A knowledge of the US English version of OS/2 2.1 is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.18. GG24-4221-00 ADSM Advanced Implementation Experiences 140p 53.50 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document is designed to help ADSM administrators manage their backup and archive environment. In the document we describe the implementation of ADSM in a real working environment that uses MVS and OS/2 servers and discuss ADSM implementation issues. The document is written for ADSM administrators who want to go beyond the basic implementation stage of ADSM, and for users who want to establish backup and archive support in their organizations organizations. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.19. GG24-4222-00 IBM AS/400 APPN Problem Management 232p 55.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the concepts and functions of AS/400 Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) problem management. It describes AS/400 APPN architecture, provides network design guidelines to prevent the problems from occurring, and describes how to manage problems when they occur. This document is written for IBM product specialists, and network administrators who are involved in problem determination of AS/400 APPN networks. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.20. GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 238p 75.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Successful TaPC/2 Installation This redbook is intended to provide some practical technical information for customers & IBM systems engineers. It contains information about planning, installing, configuring & customizing Time and Place Connectivity/2 (TaPC/2) Version 1 Release 2. Time and Place Connectivity/2 makes it possible for LAN and host calendar users to interact with each others' calendars without changing calendar systems. Some knowledge of Time and Place (TaP/2), Communications Manager/2 (CM/2), OfficeVision/VM (OV/VM), OfficeVision/MVS (OV/MVS), Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC), Virtual Telecommunications Access Method (VTAM) & Remote Spooling Communication Subsystem (RSCS) is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.21. GG24-4260-00 VM/VSE Performance Hints and Tips 128p 49.50 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document discusses performance and tuning aspects for VSE/ESA 1.3 running under VM/ESA 2.1. It provides information and results results of a tuning and performance project, which ran at the ITSO Center Boeblingen. It describes test environments, the performance and measurement tools used and gives advice how to improve the total system throughput of a VM/VSE installation and/or how to tune single virtual machines running VSE/ESA 1.3. This document is intended for the system programmer and installation support people who need to know how to set up a VM/VSE environment to make best use of the available hardware including the micro code. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.22. GG24-4281-00 RACF V2.1 Presentation Guide 270p 35.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This presentation guide describes the updates to Resource Access Control Facility (RACF) provided in RACF Version 2 Release 1. RACF V2.1 contains two new major functions & some smaller new functions. The new major functions are: OpenEdition MVS Support, and RACF Sysplex Data Sharing. In addition to the major line items, there are several end-user and system management enhancements in RACF V2.1. This presentation guide is intended for IBM customers, systems engineers and other marketing personnel. It is divided into two sections: the first section contains half-size foils with text and the second section contains full-size foils with no text. It is intended for use as presentation material for IBM customers. A knowledge of MVS/ESA is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.23. GG24-4283-00 Setting Up and Printing in an OfficeVision/400 206p 26.75 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Environment This document describes the AS/400 printing process as well as the recommended printer configurations for printers attached to the AS/400. The intent of this document is to give you a better understanding of the AS/400 printing process. It also recommends printer configurations for the most popular printer used with OfficeVision/400. The information in this document is to be used by system operators by system administrators to help them resolve print related problems. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.24. GG24-4285-00 AS/400 Client Series Handbook 176p 29.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the AS/400 Client Series products. It is produced as a small sized guide to enable you to carry it around with you and have easy access to overview information about the Client Series products for the AS/400. This document was written for anyone interested in the AS/400 Client Series, regardless of technical experience, although some knowledge of the AS/400 environment and Client/Server is assumed. This document is designed to be used in conjunction with another ITSO publication, AS/400 Client Series Products and Positioning, GG24-4027-01, which goes goes into more detail about each product. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.25. GG24-4292-00 RODMTool/2: Advanced Use of NetView Graphic 246p 35.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes how to perform RODM operations such as adding views & linking objects from a NetView GMF (NGMF) workstation with RODMTool/2 (RT/2) code installed. RT/2 enables a user without expert skills in RODM data models and ASN.1 syntax to perform these functions. One of the scenarios described includes a user selecting three IP routers in an NGMF view and then clicking on the option - link as physical peers - from the NGMF Commands pull-down menu. Other topics related to NGMF are also provided, such as the use of command exits, changing background color from black to white adding background pictures, changing the default Display Label settings and instructions on how to set up NGMF client workstations. This document was written for people who work with RODM and/or NGMF. Some knowledge of NetView GMF and RODM is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.26. GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 390p 60.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes the features of AIX OSI Services/6000 Version 1 Release 1.0. It provides guidelines for the implementation of OSI/6000 in an OSI network environment, The functions of the OSI/6000 features, the installation of the features, the customization and operation of the features are discussed. This document is intended for persons who need to plan and implement the OSI/600 product. A basic knowledge of the AIX operating system and the OSI standards is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.27. GG24-4300-00 Backup Recovery and Media Services/400 198p 79.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Implementation Tips and Techniques The purpose of this document is to provide guidelines for the implementation of Backup Recovery and Media Services/400. It contains helpful planning and operational recommendations and should be used as a supplement to the Backup Recovery and Media Services/ 400 Guide SC41-0095. It includes information on setting up and implementing the 3494 Tape Library Dataserver in an AS/400 environment. This document is intended for customers, IBM system engineers and IBM business partners who are involved in the implementation of Backup recovery and Media Services/400. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.28. GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 218p 43.75 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ There are many different computing and networking technologies some available today, some just now emerging, some well-proven some quite experimental. Understanding the computing dilemma more completely involves recognizing technologies; especially since a single technology by itself seldom suffices, and instead, multiple technologies are usually necessary. This document describes a sampling of technologies of various types, by using a tutorial approach. It compares the technologies available in the three major technology areas: application support, transport networks, and subnetworking. In addition, the applicability of these technologies within a particular situation is illustrated using a set of typical customer situation's. This document can be used by consultants and system designers to better understand, from a business and technical perspective, the options available to solve customers' networking problems. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.29. GG24-4346-00 OS/2 Power Techniques 1000p 49.95 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This document describes OS/2 2.11. It provides a power users view of various techniques for getting the most out of OS/2. All of the previous Redbooks on OS/2 1.3, 2.0 and 2.1 are consolidated in this book and updated for OS/2 2.11. Sections on OS/2 optimization and problem determination were added. A usage knowledge of OS/2 2.1 is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.30. GG24-4402-00 IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver Model M10 124p 22.75 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Sysplex Support This document describes the IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver Model M10. It provides an overview of tape management and how the IBM 3495-M10 extends system-managed tape. This document is intended for IBM customer technical professional personnel. A knowledge of the IBM 3495 Automated Tape Library Dataserver and DFSMS/MVS system- managed tape support is assumed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.31. GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 702p 153.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ This book is the student guide for the Open Systems Fundamentals course, which provides a vendor-neutral overview of open systems. The course is designed for technical managers and professionals who require a concise explanation of the technical fundamentals of open systems. The course provides an introduction to the open systems organizations, a review of portability and interoperability standards,a review of open systems structures, and a discussion of profiles and benchmarking. This book, which contains an open systems glossary, may also be used as a reference guide. The course, as designed, could be taught to IBMers and customers as a four-day course. However, parts of the course can be taught separately to allow customization for a particular audience. GX28-8002-04 Network Product Reference 48p 21.00 This booklet contains matrices and listings that document the compatibility and function of various IBM communications related software and hardware products, such as VTAM, NCP, NetView, PS/2 software, 3745, 6611, modems, and protocol converters. It is intended to provide a concise reference for hardware and software planning. This document does not replace standard IBM publications, but should be used in conjunction with them. This is the fifth edition. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Redbooks for last 6 months (Summary) * ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. AB-APPLICATION BUSINESS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4222-00 IBM AS/400 APPN Problem Management 05/94 232 55.25 GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 GG24-4300-00 Backup Recovery and Media Services/400 04/94 198 79.25 Implementation Tips and Techniques GG24-4285-00 AS/400 Client Series Handbook 04/94 176 29.00 GG24-4283-00 Setting Up and Printing in an OfficeVision/400 04/94 206 26.75 Environment GG24-4187-00 AS/400 V2R3: Software Life Cycle Management with 04/94 262 61.00 Application Development Manager/400 and SystemView System Manager/400 GG24-4027-01 AS/400 Client Series Products and Positioning 04/94 324 80.00 GG24-3614-02 Managing Multiple AS/400s in a Peer Network 04/94 442 68.00 GG24-3442-02 IBM AS/400 TCP/IP Configuration and Operation 04/94 322 79.75 GG24-4182-00 CICS/400 Tasks and Examples 03/94 486 100.00 GG24-3985-00 Object-Oriented Applications Using Relational 03/94 320 41.00 Databases GG24-4071-00 Using Apple Macintosh with AS/400 02/94 222 60.00 GG24-4070-00 Using V2R3 DOS and OS/2 PC Support/400 under OS/2 02/94 392 75.00 2.1, Including Communications Manager/400, Communications Manager/2, and RUMBA/400 for OS/2 GG24-4167-00 Selected Examples of Distributed Application 01/94 272 60.00 Processing Using MQSeries MQM MVS/ESA GG24-4148-00 AS/400 Integrated Language Environment: A 01/94 144 75.00 Practical Approach GG24-4058-00 AS/400 SNA Primary LU Support Configuration Guide 01/94 230 30.00 GG24-3070-10 Bibliography of International Technical Support 01/94 338 5.70 Organization Technical Bulletins GG24-3964-00 Transforming Type 1 Outline Fonts 12/93 110 30.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. AD-APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4187-00 AS/400 V2R3: Software Life Cycle Management with 04/94 262 61.00 Application Development Manager/400 and SystemView System Manager/400 GG24-4290-00 Object Technology in Application Development 03/94 225 22.00 GG24-3985-00 Object-Oriented Applications Using Relational 03/94 320 41.00 Databases GG24-4128-00 Object-Oriented Databases ObjectStore 02/94 226 40.00 Introduction and Sample Application GG24-4135-00 MVS COBOL Cross-Development Using AIX CASE 12/93 166 40.00 GG24-4101-00 The Library for Systems Solutions: Application 12/93 158 30.00 Development Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. AX-AIX SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4090-01 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 04/94 308 42.40 Windows GG24-4182-00 CICS/400 Tasks and Examples 03/94 486 100.00 GG24-4128-00 Object-Oriented Databases ObjectStore 02/94 226 40.00 Introduction and Sample Application GG24-3685-00 HACMP/6000 Mode 3 Implementation 02/94 196 40.00 GG24-4189-00 A Guided Tour of SNA Server/6000 Version 2.1 01/94 232 50.00 GG24-4167-00 Selected Examples of Distributed Application 01/94 272 60.00 Processing Using MQSeries MQM MVS/ESA GG24-4075-00 Examples of Using AIX Systems Monitor/6000 01/94 158 30.00 GG24-3531-02 TCP/IP V2.0 for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 442 45.00 Interoperability for OS/2 and AIX GG24-4161-00 AIX Version 3.2 System Management Tips and 12/93 362 50.00 Techniques GG24-4160-00 Managing One or More AIX Systems - Overview 12/93 192 50.00 GG24-4146-00 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager Presentation 12/93 386 20.00 Guide GG24-4144-00 OSF DCE for AIX, OS/2 and DOS Windows Overview 12/93 430 49.25 GG24-4129-00 AIX SNA Services V1.2 Sample Connections 12/93 330 35.00 GG24-3695-01 The IBM Xstation Handbook 12/93 228 30.00 GG24-4090-00 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 11/93 276 35.00 Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. CH-COMMUNICATION HARDWARE SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4221-00 ADSM Advanced Implementation Experiences 05/94 140 53.50 GG24-3669-02 APPN Architecture and Product Implemenntations 05/94 300 35.00 GG24-4090-01 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 04/94 308 42.40 Windows GG24-3442-02 IBM AS/400 TCP/IP Configuration and Operation 04/94 322 79.75 GG24-4140-00 CallPath Call Center Planning and Installation 03/94 94 50.00 Guide GG24-4111-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Local Area 03/94 174 25.00 Network Reference GG24-3974-00 ACF/NCP V7R1 IP Router Planning and Installation 03/94 318 50.00 Guide GG24-4170-00 MPTN Architecture Tutorial and Product 02/94 156 35.00 Implementations GG24-4112-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Office 02/94 124 60.00 Reference GG24-4078-00 NetWare 4.0 from IBM: Directory Services Concepts 02/94 388 35.00 and Interoperability Considerations GG24-4071-00 Using Apple Macintosh with AS/400 02/94 222 60.00 GG24-4070-00 Using V2R3 DOS and OS/2 PC Support/400 under OS/2 02/94 392 75.00 2.1, Including Communications Manager/400, Communications Manager/2, and RUMBA/400 for OS/2 GG24-3178-03 Local Area Network Concepts and Products 02/94 600 35.00 GG24-4203-00 NetView V2R4 APPNTAM Feature Experiences 01/94 254 75.00 GG24-4189-00 A Guided Tour of SNA Server/6000 Version 2.1 01/94 232 50.00 GG24-4173-00 IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 01/94 594 35.00 Implementation Guide GG24-4157-00 Monitoring Performance In Router Networks 01/94 260 40.00 GG24-4075-00 Examples of Using AIX Systems Monitor/6000 01/94 158 30.00 GG24-3891-01 NetWare Client for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 186 25.00 Configuration GG24-3843-01 LAN/WAN eXchange (LWX) Planning and Installation 01/94 408 75.00 Guide GG24-3531-02 TCP/IP V2.0 for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 442 45.00 Interoperability GG24-4197-00 VSE/ESA and VM/ESA Client/Server computing 12/93 168 25.00 GG24-4195-00 TCP/IP Solutions for VSE/ESA 12/93 408 35.00 GG24-4193-00 DRDA Client/Server Application Scenarios for VM 12/93 304 30.00 and VSE GG24-4184-00 Enhanced Exploitation of RACF 1.9.2 Secured 12/93 130 40.00 Single signon Using NV/AS GG24-4158-00 IBM LAN Distance Configuration and Customization 12/93 300 40.00 GG24-4129-00 AIX SNA Services V1.2 Sample Connections 12/93 330 35.00 GG24-4091-00 AIX CICS/6000 Installation and Configuration: A 12/93 254 60.00 Guide to Implementation GG24-4077-00 IDNX Frame Relay Network Planning and 12/93 158 50.00 Implementation GG24-3890-01 NetWare from IBM: Network Protocols and Standards 12/93 148 25.00 GG24-4090-00 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 11/93 276 35.00 Windows GG24-3950-00 Client/Server Computing with VM/ESA as Part of 11/93 254 50.00 the Open Enterprise ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. CM-COMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4292-00 RODMTool/2: Advanced Use of NetView Graphic 05/94 246 35.00 GG24-4222-00 IBM AS/400 APPN Problem Management 05/94 232 55.25 GG24-4182-00 CICS/400 Tasks and Examples 03/94 486 100.00 GG24-4111-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Local Area 03/94 174 25.00 Network Reference GG24-3974-00 ACF/NCP V7R1 IP Router Planning and Installation 03/94 318 50.00 Guide GG24-4170-00 MPTN Architecture Tutorial and Product 02/94 156 35.00 Implementations GG24-3178-03 Local Area Network Concepts and Products 02/94 600 35.00 GG24-4225-00 NETDA/2 Design Tool Guide 01/94 146 35.00 GG24-4203-00 NetView V2R4 APPNTAM Feature Experiences 01/94 254 75.00 GG24-4189-00 A Guided Tour of SNA Server/6000 Version 2.1 01/94 232 50.00 GG24-4186-00 NetView Version 2 Release 4 New Functions 01/94 170 30.00 GG24-4157-00 Monitoring Performance In Router Networks 01/94 260 40.00 GG24-4156-00 NetView Performance Monitor Version 2.1 01/94 192 40.00 Experiences Using The New GUI and VTAM Statistics GG24-4075-00 Examples of Using AIX Systems Monitor/6000 01/94 158 30.00 GG24-4058-00 AS/400 SNA Primary LU Support Configuration Guide 01/94 230 30.00 GG24-3531-02 TCP/IP V2.0 for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 442 45.00 Interoperability GG24-4184-00 Enhanced Exploitation of RACF 1.9.2 Secured 12/93 130 40.00 Single signon Using NV/AS GG24-4163-00 Managing DEC from NetView Using Six2View 12/93 220 45.00 GG24-4129-00 AIX SNA Services V1.2 Sample Connections 12/93 330 35.00 GG24-4223-00 Introduction to Performance in Router Networks 11/93 84 25.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. CS-COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4292-00 RODMTool/2: Advanced Use of NetView Graphic 05/94 246 35.00 GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 05/94 238 75.00 Sucessful TaPC/2 Installation GG24-3669-02 APPN Architecture and Product Implemenntations 05/94 300 35.00 GG24-4090-01 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 04/94 308 42.40 Windows GG24-3442-02 IBM AS/400 TCP/IP Configuration and Operation 04/94 322 79.75 GG24-4182-00 CICS/400 Tasks and Examples 03/94 486 100.00 GG24-4140-00 CallPath Call Center Planning and Installation 03/94 94 50.00 Guide GG24-4111-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Local Area 03/94 174 25.00 Network Reference GG24-3974-00 ACF/NCP V7R1 IP Router Planning and Installation 03/94 318 50.00 Guide GG24-4170-00 MPTN Architecture Tutorial and Product 02/94 156 35.00 Implementations GG24-4112-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Office 02/94 124 60.00 Reference GG24-4078-00 NetWare 4.0 from IBM: Directory Services Concepts 02/94 388 35.00 and Interoperability Considerations GG24-4071-00 Using Apple Macintosh with AS/400 02/94 222 60.00 GG24-4070-00 Using V2R3 DOS and OS/2 PC Support/400 under OS/2 02/94 392 75.00 2.1, Including Communications Manager/400, Communications Manager/2, and RUMBA/400 for OS/2 GG24-3178-03 Local Area Network Concepts and Products 02/94 600 35.00 GG24-4225-00 NETDA/2 Design Tool Guide 01/94 146 35.00 GG24-4203-00 NetView V2R4 APPNTAM Feature Experiences 01/94 254 75.00 GG24-4189-00 A Guided Tour of SNA Server/6000 Version 2.1 01/94 232 50.00 GG24-4186-00 NetView Version 2 Release 4 New Functions 01/94 170 30.00 GG24-4173-00 IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 01/94 594 35.00 Implementation Guide GG24-4157-00 Monitoring Performance In Router Networks 01/94 260 40.00 GG24-4156-00 NetView Performance Monitor Version 2.1 01/94 192 40.00 Experiences Using The New GUI and VTAM Statistics GG24-4075-00 Examples of Using AIX Systems Monitor/6000 01/94 158 30.00 GG24-4058-00 AS/400 SNA Primary LU Support Configuration Guide 01/94 230 30.00 GG24-3891-01 NetWare Client for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 186 25.00 Configuration GG24-3843-01 LAN/WAN eXchange (LWX) Planning and Installation 01/94 408 75.00 Guide GG24-3531-02 TCP/IP V2.0 for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 442 45.00 Interoperability GG24-4197-00 VSE/ESA and VM/ESA Client/Server computing 12/93 168 25.00 GG24-4195-00 TCP/IP Solutions for VSE/ESA 12/93 408 35.00 GG24-4193-00 DRDA Client/Server Application Scenarios for VM 12/93 304 30.00 and VSE GG24-4184-00 Enhanced Exploitation of RACF 1.9.2 Secured 12/93 130 40.00 Single signon Using NV/AS GG24-4158-00 IBM LAN Distance Configuration and Customization 12/93 300 40.00 GG24-4129-00 AIX SNA Services V1.2 Sample Connections 12/93 330 35.00 GG24-4091-00 AIX CICS/6000 Installation and Configuration: A 12/93 254 60.00 Guide to Implementation GG24-4077-00 IDNX Frame Relay Network Planning and 12/93 158 50.00 Implementation GG24-3890-01 NetWare from IBM: Network Protocols and Standards 12/93 148 25.00 GG24-4090-00 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 11/93 276 35.00 Windows GG24-3950-00 Client/Server Computing with VM/ESA as Part of 11/93 254 50.00 the Open Enterprise ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. DS-DATA SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Fundamentals GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4153-00 Distributed Relational Database DB2 Multisite 05/94 182 49.75 Update GG24-4109-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Image 05/94 160 40.00 Processing GG24-4182-00 CICS/400 Tasks and Examples 03/94 486 100.00 GG24-4150-00 IMS/ESA 4.1 Migration Guide 03/94 250 80.00 GG24-4103-00 The Library for Systems Solutions: Data Reference 03/94 152 35.00 GG24-3985-00 Object-Oriented Applications Using Relational 03/94 320 41.00 Databases GG24-4128-00 Object-Oriented Databases ObjectStore 02/94 226 40.00 Introduction and Sample Application GG24-4198-00 SQL/DS Version 3 Release 4 VMDSS Exploitation 01/94 234 50.00 GG24-4196-00 QMF/VSE Version 3.1.1 Setup and Usage Guide 01/94 314 70.00 GG24-4190-00 CICS OS/2 V2.0 Sizing and Performance 01/94 148 50.00 GG24-4083-00 Automated Operations Control/MVS Release 2 01/94 146 100.00 Installation, Use, and Migration GG24-3993-00 Disaster Recovery Library Database Recovery 01/94 152 100.00 GG24-3957-00 SystemView Automated Operations Expert/MVS 01/94 194 100.00 Installation and Implementation of an IMS Aoutage Avoidance Application GG24-4102-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Workload 12/93 174 35.00 Management Reference GG24-4091-00 AIX CICS/6000 Installation and Configuration: A 12/93 254 60.00 Guide to Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. IM-IMAGEPLUS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4138-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus Workstation Program/2 Version 02/94 236 45.00 1.2.1 Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.9. LS-LARGE SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GX28-8002-04 Network Product Reference 05/94 48 21.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4281-00 RACF V2.1 Presentation Guide 05/94 270 35.00 GG24-4109-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Image 05/94 160 40.00 Processing GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 GG24-4095-00 OpenEdition MVS for MVS/ESA 5.1 Presentation 05/94 164 48.00 Guide GG24-3329-00 MVS/ESA JES3 Monitoring Facility 05/94 94 33.00 Management GG24-4130-00 A Technical Guide to ESA/390 Compression 03/94 138 57.75 GG24-4112-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Office 02/94 124 60.00 Reference GG24-4218-00 OfficeVision/VM 1.2.0 Host Services 01/94 252 60.00 GG24-4203-00 NetView V2R4 APPNTAM Feature Experiences 01/94 254 75.00 GG24-4190-00 CICS OS/2 V2.0 Sizing and Performance 01/94 148 50.00 GG24-4186-00 NetView Version 2 Release 4 New Functions 01/94 170 30.00 GG24-4167-00 Selected Examples of Distributed Application 01/94 272 60.00 Processing Using MQSeries MQM MVS/ESA GG24-4083-00 Automated Operations Control/MVS Release 2 01/94 146 100.00 Installation, Use, and Migration GG24-4075-00 Examples of Using AIX Systems Monitor/6000 01/94 158 30.00 GG24-4045-00 Introduction to Storage Performance Tools and 01/94 162 75.00 Techniques for MVS/ESA GG24-3993-00 Disaster Recovery Library Database Recovery 01/94 152 100.00 GG24-3984-00 RACF Macros and Exit Coding 01/94 190 25.00 GG24-3957-00 SystemView Automated Operations Expert/MVS 01/94 194 100.00 Installation and Implementation of an IMS Aoutage Avoidance Application GG24-3938-00 Print and View Data Streams 01/94 276 38.75 GG24-4240-00 MVS/ESA OpenEditon DCE Presentation Guide Volume 12/93 334 59.95 I GG24-4184-00 Enhanced Exploitation of RACF 1.9.2 Secured 12/93 130 40.00 Single signon Using NV/AS GG24-4175-00 Environmental Record Editing and Printing Program 12/93 124 35.00 (EREP) EREP Self Help Manual Release 3.5.0 GG24-4146-00 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager Presentation 12/93 386 20.00 Guide GG24-4127-00 MVS/ESA JES2 Exit Coding 12/93 140 25.00 GG24-4102-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Workload 12/93 174 35.00 Management Reference GG24-4101-00 The Library for Systems Solutions: Application 12/93 158 30.00 Development Reference GG24-3964-00 Transforming Type 1 Outline Fonts 12/93 110 30.00 GG24-3921-01 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing from a VM/ESA 12/93 378 35.00 Perspective Volume 2: Foil Masters GG24-3920-01 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing from a VM/ESA 12/93 252 35.00 Perspective Volume 1: Presentation and Solutions Guidelines GG24-4076-00 APPC/MVS Server Facilities, Usage Guide. 11/93 228 50.00 GG24-4037-00 HCD and Dynamic I/O Reconfiguration Primer 11/93 370 45.00 GG24-3950-00 Client/Server Computing with VM/ESA as Part of 11/93 254 50.00 the Open Enterprise ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.10. MR-MID RANGE ESA SYSTEMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4260-00 VM/VSE Performance Hints and Tips 04/94 128 49.50 GG24-4258-00 Results of a VSE/ESA 1.3 Tuning Residency 03/94 102 35.00 GG24-4198-00 SQL/DS Version 3 Release 4 VMDSS Exploitation 01/94 234 50.00 GG24-4196-00 QMF/VSE Version 3.1.1 Setup and Usage Guide 01/94 314 70.00 GG24-4167-00 Selected Examples of Distributed Application 01/94 272 60.00 Processing Using MQSeries MQM MVS/ESA GG24-4075-00 Examples of Using AIX Systems Monitor/6000 01/94 158 30.00 GG24-3938-00 Print and View Data Streams 01/94 276 38.75 GG24-4197-00 VSE/ESA and VM/ESA Client/Server computing 12/93 168 25.00 GG24-4195-00 TCP/IP Solutions for VSE/ESA 12/93 408 35.00 GG24-4194-00 CICS/VSE Version 2 Release 2 Application 12/93 182 30.00 Portability GG24-4193-00 DRDA Client/Server Application Scenarios for VM 12/93 304 30.00 and VSE GG24-4192-00 REXX/VSE Version 1 Release 1 Getting Started 12/93 194 30.00 GG24-4191-00 VSE/ESA Version 1 Release 3 Using the 31-bit 12/93 152 40.00 Addressing Facility GG24-4175-00 Environmental Record Editing and Printing Program 12/93 124 35.00 (EREP) EREP Self Help Manual Release 3.5.0 GG24-3964-00 Transforming Type 1 Outline Fonts 12/93 110 30.00 GG24-3921-01 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing from a VM/ESA 12/93 378 35.00 Perspective Volume 2: Foil Masters GG24-3920-01 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing from a VM/ESA 12/93 252 35.00 Perspective Volume 1: Presentation and Solutions Guidelines GG24-3950-00 Client/Server Computing with VM/ESA as Part of 11/93 254 50.00 the Open Enterprise ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.11. OF-OFFICE SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 05/94 238 75.00 Sucessful TaPC/2 Installation GG24-4112-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Office 02/94 124 60.00 Reference GG24-4218-00 OfficeVision/VM 1.2.0 Host Services 01/94 252 60.00 GG24-3897-01 IBM Current-OV/VM Workgroup 5621-416 12/93 232 25.00 Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.12. OP-OPEN SYSTEMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4294-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to AIX OSI Services/6000 05/94 390 60.00 GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 05/94 238 75.00 Sucessful TaPC/2 Installation GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 GG24-4095-00 OpenEdition MVS for MVS/ESA 5.1 Presentation 05/94 164 48.00 Guide GG24-4090-01 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 04/94 308 42.40 Windows GG24-4180-00 Local-Area Network Backup and Recovery Using 03/94 128 80.00 SaveUtility/2 and Legato NetWorker GG24-4103-00 The Library for Systems Solutions: Data Reference 03/94 152 35.00 GG24-3685-00 HACMP/6000 Mode 3 Implementation 02/94 196 40.00 GG24-4190-00 CICS OS/2 V2.0 Sizing and Performance 01/94 148 50.00 GG24-3938-00 Print and View Data Streams 01/94 276 38.75 GG24-3531-02 TCP/IP V2.0 for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 442 45.00 Interoperability GG24-4197-00 VSE/ESA and VM/ESA Client/Server computing 12/93 168 25.00 GG24-4195-00 TCP/IP Solutions for VSE/ESA 12/93 408 35.00 GG24-4193-00 DRDA Client/Server Application Scenarios for VM 12/93 304 30.00 and VSE GG24-4102-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Workload 12/93 174 35.00 Management Reference GG24-3964-00 Transforming Type 1 Outline Fonts 12/93 110 30.00 GG24-3695-01 The IBM Xstation Handbook 12/93 228 30.00 GG24-4090-00 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 11/93 276 35.00 Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.13. PS-PERSONAL SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4346-00 OS/2 Power Techniques 05/941000 - GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-4229-00 Calendar Connectivity Cookbook Recipes for a 05/94 238 75.00 Sucessful TaPC/2 Installation GG24-4213-00 Introduction to OS/2 2.1 National Language 05/94 202 20.00 Support GG24-4212-00 OS/2 2.11, OS/2.1 for Windows, New OS/2 Device 05/94 440 24.95 Drivers, and Updates to OS/2 2.1 GG24-4201-00 OS/2 Configuration Techniques: "Cracking" the 05/94 328 24.95 Workplace Shell GG24-4109-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Image 05/94 160 40.00 Processing GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 GG24-3946-00 VisualAge: Concepts and Features 05/94 146 14.95 GG24-4090-01 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 04/94 308 42.40 Windows GG24-4224-00 Understanding IBM OS/2 LAN Server Ultimedia 03/94 122 27.00 Version 1.0 GG24-4182-00 CICS/400 Tasks and Examples 03/94 486 100.00 GG24-4111-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Local Area 03/94 174 25.00 Network Reference GG24-3985-00 Object-Oriented Applications Using Relational 03/94 320 41.00 Databases GG24-4204-00 OS/2 2.1 Ultimedia Tools 02/94 256 59.00 GG24-4128-00 Object-Oriented Databases ObjectStore 02/94 226 40.00 Introduction and Sample Application GG24-4112-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Office 02/94 124 60.00 Reference GG24-4078-00 NetWare 4.0 from IBM: Directory Services Concepts 02/94 388 35.00 and Interoperability Considerations GG24-4070-00 Using V2R3 DOS and OS/2 PC Support/400 under OS/2 02/94 392 75.00 2.1, Including Communications Manager/400, Communications Manager/2, and RUMBA/400 for OS/2 GG24-3178-03 Local Area Network Concepts and Products 02/94 600 35.00 GG24-4199-00 OS/2 REXX: From Bark to Byte 01/94 358 19.95 GG24-4190-00 CICS OS/2 V2.0 Sizing and Performance 01/94 148 50.00 GG24-4173-00 IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 01/94 594 35.00 Implementation Guide GG24-4166-00 IBM LAN NetView Applications: A Practical 01/94 258 40.00 Introduction to Monitor, Fix, Tie and Scan GG24-3938-00 Print and View Data Streams 01/94 276 38.75 GG24-3891-01 NetWare Client for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 186 25.00 Configuration GG24-3531-02 TCP/IP V2.0 for OS/2 Installation and 01/94 442 45.00 Interoperability for OS/2 and AIX GG24-4158-00 IBM LAN Distance Configuration and Customization 12/93 300 40.00 GG24-4146-00 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager Presentation 12/93 386 20.00 Guide GG24-4133-00 Upgrading to PC DOS 6.1 12/93 308 19.95 GG24-4102-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Workload 12/93 174 35.00 Management Reference GG24-3897-01 IBM Current-OV/VM Workgroup 5621-416 12/93 232 25.00 Implementation Guide GG24-3890-01 NetWare from IBM: Network Protocols and Standards 12/93 148 25.00 GG24-4207-00 A Collection of IBM LAN NetView White Papers 11/93 312 25.00 GG24-4090-00 Developing DCE Applications for AIX, OS/2 and 11/93 276 35.00 Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.14. RE-RETAIL CONSUMER SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4176-00 Experinces using the 4690 Operating System 04/94 316 96.50 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.15. SD-SYSTEMS DESIGN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Fundamentals GG24-4470-00 Open Systems Fundamentals Student Guide 05/94 702 153.00 GG24-4338-00 Introduction to Networking Technologies 05/94 218 43.75 GG24-3985-00 Object-Oriented Applications Using Relational 03/94 320 41.00 Databases GG24-4225-00 NETDA/2 Design Tool Guide 01/94 146 35.00 GG24-4190-00 CICS OS/2 V2.0 Sizing and Performance 01/94 148 50.00 GG24-4102-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Workload 12/93 174 35.00 Management Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.16. SM-CENTRAL SITE SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4292-00 RODMTool/2: Advanced Use of NetView Graphic 05/94 246 35.00 GG24-4149-00 Using Network Security Program on AIX, OS/2, and 04/94 158 53.25 DOS Platforms GG24-4116-00 The Library for Systems Solutions System 02/94 326 80.00 Management Reference for Managed Personal Systems GG24-4115-00 The Library for Systems Solutions System 02/94 192 80.00 Management Reference for Managed RISC/6000 Systems GG24-3685-00 HACMP/6000 Mode 3 Implementation 02/94 196 40.00 GG24-4225-00 NETDA/2 Design Tool Guide 01/94 146 35.00 GG24-4203-00 NetView V2R4 APPNTAM Feature Experiences 01/94 254 75.00 GG24-4186-00 NetView Version 2 Release 4 New Functions 01/94 170 30.00 GG24-4157-00 Monitoring Performance In Router Networks 01/94 260 40.00 GG24-4156-00 NetView Performance Monitor Version 2.1 01/94 192 40.00 Experiences Using The New GUI and VTAM Statistics GG24-4083-00 Automated Operations Control/MVS Release 2 01/94 146 100.00 Installation, Use, and Migration GG24-4045-00 Introduction to Storage Performance Tools and 01/94 162 75.00 Techniques for MVS/ESA GG24-3993-00 Disaster Recovery Library Database Recovery 01/94 152 100.00 GG24-3957-00 SystemView Automated Operations Expert/MVS 01/94 194 100.00 Installation and Implementation of an IMS Aoutage Avoidance Application GG24-4161-00 AIX Version 3.2 System Management Tips and 12/93 362 50.00 Techniques GG24-4160-00 Managing One or More AIX Systems - Overview 12/93 192 50.00 GG24-4146-00 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager Presentation 12/93 386 20.00 Guide GG24-4117-00 The Library for Systems Solutions Systems 12/93 156 80.00 Management Reference for Managed AS/400 Systems GG24-4114-00 The library for System Solutions System 12/93 156 80.00 Management Reference for Managed System/390 GG24-4113-00 The library for Systems Solutions System 12/93 140 80.00 Management Reference Introduction to Managing Open Systems GG24-4063-00 Management of Multiprotocol Environments using 12/93 198 35.00 NetView GG24-3695-01 The IBM Xstation Handbook 12/93 228 30.00 GG24-4207-00 A Collection of IBM LAN NetView White Papers 11/93 312 25.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.17. ST-STORAGE SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4095-00 OpenEdition MVS for MVS/ESA 5.1 Presentation 05/94 164 48.00 Guide GG24-4221-00 ADSM Advanced Implementation Experiences 05/94 140 53.50 GG24-4402-00 IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver Model M10 04/94 124 22.75 GG24-4400-00 DFSMS/MVS Version 1 Release 2.0 S/390 Parallel 04/94 94 22.25 Sysplex Support GG24-4404-00 DFSMS/MVS Version 1 Release 2.0 Storage 03/94 124 20.00 Management Enhancements GG24-4403-00 DFSMS/MVS Version 1 Release 2.0 Distributed 03/94 172 20.00 FileManager/MVS GG24-4401-00 DFSMS/MVS Version 1 Release 2.0 Support for 03/94 152 20.00 OpenEdition MVS GG24-4130-00 A Technical Guide to ESA/390 Compression 03/94 138 57.75 GG24-4056-00 DFSMS/MVS Version 1 Release 2.0 Compression 03/94 160 20.00 GG24-3685-00 HACMP/6000 Mode 3 Implementation 02/94 196 40.00 GG24-4083-00 Automated Operations Control/MVS Release 2 01/94 146 100.00 Installation, Use, and Migration GG24-4045-00 Introduction to Storage Performance Tools and 01/94 162 75.00 Techniques for MVS/ESA GG24-3993-00 Disaster Recovery Library Database Recovery 01/94 152 100.00 GG24-3990-00 Implementing Concurrent Copy 01/94 168 50.00 GG24-3957-00 SystemView Automated Operations Expert/MVS 01/94 194 100.00 Installation and Implementation of an IMS Aoutage Avoidance Application GG24-4160-00 Managing One or More AIX Systems - Overview 12/93 192 50.00 GG24-4146-00 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager Presentation 12/93 386 20.00 Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.18. VM-VM SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4105-00 Printing and Viewing Reference 05/94 100 63.25 GG24-4260-00 VM/VSE Performance Hints and Tips 04/94 128 49.50 GG24-4198-00 SQL/DS Version 3 Release 4 VMDSS Exploitation 01/94 234 50.00 GG24-4152-00 VM/ESA Performance Tools 01/94 306 50.00 GG24-3938-00 Print and View Data Streams 01/94 276 38.75 GG24-4175-00 Environmental Record Editing and Printing Program 12/93 124 35.00 (EREP) EREP Self Help Manual Release 3.5.0 GG24-4032-00 VM/ESA Release 2.1 Usage and Experience 12/93 106 50.00 GG24-3964-00 Transforming Type 1 Outline Fonts 12/93 110 30.00 GG24-3934-00 VM/ESA Storage Management with Tuning Guidelines 12/93 272 60.00 GG24-3921-01 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing from a VM/ESA 12/93 378 35.00 Perspective Volume 2: Foil Masters GG24-3920-01 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing from a VM/ESA 12/93 252 35.00 Perspective Volume 1: Presentation and Solutions Guidelines GG24-3709-01 CMS Shared File System Primer 12/93 174 20.00 GG24-3950-00 Client/Server Computing with VM/ESA as Part of 11/93 254 50.00 the Open Enterprise ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. CD-ROMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. AB-APPLICATION BUSINESS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ The following redbooks are available on CDROM, orderable either as Part Number SK2T-8053 (US$300) or as AS/400 SW feature FC 8053 (US$495) which includes updates with the same Software Version. Order Number Title ------------------------------------------------------------------------ GG24-3249-01 System/36 to AS/400 System Migration GG24-3250-01 System/36 to AS/400 Application Migration GG24-3251-00 IBM S/38 Application Migration to AS/400 GG24-3253-00 IBM AS/400 Communication Migration GG24-3255-01 AS/400 PCS Under DOS* GG24-3268-00 AS/400 Office in a DIA/SNADS Network GG24-3304-01 Converting System/36 Environment Applications to Native AS/400 GG24-3305-00 IBM AS/400 Communications Problem Determination GG24-3321-03 SQL/400: A Guide for Implementation OS/400 V2R2 GG24-3336-00 AS/400 - S/370* Connectivity GG24-3420-00 AS/400, S/38* and PS/2* as T2.1 Nodes in a Subarea Network GG24-3438-00 Writing SAA Applications for AS/400 GG24-3441-00 AS/400 Application Recovery GG24-3442-01 IBM AS/400 TCP/IP Configuration and Operation GG24-3447-00 IBM AS/400 in Large Networks: A Case Study GG24-3479-00 AS/400 Object Dist. Facility & SNA RSCS PROFS* GG24-3496-00 AS/400 - OS/2 Ethernet Connectivity GG24-3501-00 AS/400 Security and Auditing Considerations Release 2 GG24-3517-00 IBM AS/400 ISDN Connectivity GG24-3579-00 OV/400 & AS/400 Query Applications in a Multilingual Environment GG24-3614-01 Managing Multiple AS/400s in a Peer Network GG24-3625-00 OfficeVision/400 in a DIA/SNADS Network GG24-3632-00 AD/Cycle* Implementation for AS/400 GG24-3636-00 PCS/400 Implementation and Performance GG24-3637-00 PC Support/400 Coexistence with NetWare & Windows GG24-3639-00 AS/400 Audit and Security Enhancements in OS/400 Release 3 GG24-3680-00 Wrkfldr Applic Facility/400 5363 Optical Subsys Conf, Instl, Rec GG24-3697-00 OfficeVision/400 Printing GG24-3704-00 IBM AS/400 Printing II GG24-3708-00 OV/400 V2R1 Implementation GG24-3710-00 OV/400 API's V2R1 GG24-3717-00 AS/400 APPN* with PS/2 APPN, 3174 APPN, 5394 & SUB GG24-3722-00 AS/400 CPI Communications Selected Topics GG24-3723-01 AS/400 Performance Management Version 2 Release 2 GG24-3743-00 Multimedia Exmpls W the AS/400 Using Audio Visual Connection AVC GG24-3758-00 Getting Started with AS/400 OSI GG24-3763-00 AS/400 Communications Definitions Examples Volume 2 GG24-3790-00 WAF/400 Installation Considerations for NLV GG24-3793-00 Artif Intell & the AS/400: Neural Networks & Knowledge Based Sys GG24-3797-00 Facsimile Support/400 Implementation GG24-3806-00 Application Development on the AS/400 GG24-3807-00 NLS Enabling GG24-3808-00 PC Support/400 Asynchronous and SDLC Configuration Examples GG24-3828-00 5494 & OS/2 ES: Connecting Remote User Grps to AS/400s Extend Svc GG24-3841-00 AS/400 Automation Using NetView* and the SNA MS Transport GG24-3856-00 Using DOS PC Support/400 in OS/2 Version 2 Virtual DOS Machines GG24-3866-00 WAF/400 Administration & User's Guide GG24-3868-00 OV/400 Application Enabler GG24-3877-00 Coop Processing & Graphical User Interfaces in an AS/400 Environm GG24-3885-00 OfficeVision/400 Application Programming Interfaces V2R2 GG24-3896-00 OV/400 Integration with Callpath/400 & Facsimile Support/400 GG24-3908-00 AS/400 Performance Capacity Planning V2R2 GG24-3912-00 AS/400 System Availability and Recovery for V2R2 GG24-3918-00 AS/400 Network Routing Facility GG24-3919-00 AS/400 SNA Pass-Through Communications Definitions and Examples GG24-3928-00 AD/Cycle CODE/400, App Dev Mgr/400 & App Dictionary Services/400 GG24-3937-00 OfficeVision/400 Version 2 Technical Tips and Techniques GG24-4006-00 Mainframe CICS* to CICS/400* V2R2 Migration Cookbook GG24-4013-00 Using DOS PC Sppt/400 W Novell NetWare 3.11 & NetWare for SAA 1.3 GG24-4020-00 Ultimedia* Video Delivery System/400 GG24-4027-00 AS/400 Client Series* Products and Positioning GG24-4028-00 IBM AS/400 Printing III GG24-4030-00 Performance Benchmarking for the AS/400 GG24-4039-00 AS/400 and RISC System/6000* Connectivity GG24-4050-00 Current-OV/400* Workgroup Program GG24-4092-00 The IBM AS/400 as a TCP/IP Network File Server GG24-4094-00 ENVY/400 Hints & Tips-An Online Guide to ENVY/400 Terms & Fnctns GG24-4126-00 Introduction to ENVY**/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. CH-CM-CS-COMMUNICATIONS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ The following redbooks are available on CDROM: PN SK2T-6022 U.S.- Price $495 Order Number Title ------------------------------------------------------------------------ GG24-1562-05 IBM 3745 X10/X1A Communication Controller Guide GG24-3061-04 3174 Establishment Controller Implementation Guide GG24-3178-00* LAN Concepts and Products GG24-3291-02 Install Guidelines for IBM Token-Ring Network Products GG24-3376-03 TCP/IP Tutorial and Technical Overview GG24-3520-01 APPC and CPI-C Product Implementations GG24-3531-02* TCP/IP V2.0 for OS/2 Install & Interoperability GG24-3569-01 VTAM V3R4 and V3R4.1 Planning Guide GG24-3572-01 X.25 NPSI V3 Installation Gde & Definitions Examples GG24-3586-00 Managing LU 6.2 Modes using NetView MS Transport GG24-3624-02 TCP/IP V2R2 F R VM Installation & Interoperability GG24-3645-00 OSI Products Install Guidelines for OS/2 GG24-3649-01 IBM Network Products Implementation Guide GG24-3664-01 OSI/Communications Subsystem Prog Guidelines (MVS) GG24-3669-01 APPN Architecture & Product Implementation Tutorial GG24-3687-01 TCP/IP V2R2 for MVS Install & Interoperability GG24-3690-00 Distributing OS/2 V1.3 - NetView DM/2 & NS/2 - with NetView DMR3 GG24-3701-00 Examples of using the NetView XITCI & XITCO Exits GG24-3717-00 AS/400 APPN with PS/2 APPN, 3174 APPN, 5394 & Subarea GG24-3754-00 LAN Network Mgr V1.0, IBM 8230 & LMU/2 GG24-3763-00 AS/400 Communications Definitions Examples: Volume 2 GG24-3782-00 Automated Installation of CID Enabled Products Using NetView DM/ GG24-3785-00 NCP V6 Planning & Implementation Guide GG24-3804-00 Overview and Examples of using AIX NetView/6000 GG24-3815-00 Security Overview of Open Systems Networking GG24-3816-01 Introduction to High Speed Networking Technology GG24-3817-00 X25Net R1 Installation GG24-3834-00 IBM 9715 ADNX/60 Reference & Install Guide GG24-3840-00 TCP/IP & National Language Support GG24-3841-00 AS/400 Automation using NetView & SNA MS Transport GG24-3843-01* LAN/WAN Exchange (LWX) Planning & Install Guide GG24-3845-00 OSI Products Install Guidelines for MVS & VM GG24-3846-00 ONDS X.400 R1 & X.400 DISOSS Connect R2 Inst. & Customization GG24-3852-00 TCP/IP for MVS, VM, OS/2 & DOS Troubleshooting Guide GG24-3865-00 FDDI Concepts and Products GG24-3870-00 IBM 6611 Network Processor GG24-3871-00 Automated Config Mgmt - Info/System-NetView Bridge Adapter GG24-3881-00 VTAM V3R4.1 for MVS/ESA Implementation Guide GG24-3905-00 Enhancing NetView Operator Productivity with CM Mouse GG24-3911-00 TCP/IP for MVS, VM, OS/2 & DOS X Window System Guide GG24-3918-00 AS/400 Network Routing Facility GG24-3919-00 AS/400 SNA Pass-through Communications Definitions/Examples GG24-3924-00* LANDP/DOS and LANDP/2 Concepts and Guidelines GG24-3929-00 Install & Plan Guide for Programmable Network Access 1.2 GG24-3941-00 VTAM V4R1 for MVS/ESA Planning Guide GG24-3942-00 LAN Network Manager V1.1, LAN Network Manager Entry V1.0 GG24-3949-00* PC/3270 V3.0 Implementation Guide GG24-3956-00 Overview of IBM NetView RODM and Data Models GG24-3958-00 Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 New Features GG24-3989-00 NPM R5.1 and R6 New Functions GG24-3999-00* Systems and Network Mgmt in Distributed Environments GG24-4003-00 NetView V2R3 Experiences using NGMF & Auto Enhancements GG24-4005-00 Integration of Common OS/2 Communications Products GG24-4011-00 VTAM 4.1 for MVS/ESA Implementation Guide GG24-4012-00 ACF/NCP V6R2 Planning & Implementation Guide GG24-4014-00 Network Problem Mgmt Examples - AIX Trouble Ticket/6000 GG24-4018-00 Applied Use of IBM NetView RODM and Automation GG24-4033-00 IBM 8250 Intelligent Hub & Hub Management Program/6000 GG24-4036-00 OSI Multivendor Interoperability Guide GG24-4058-00* AS/400 SNA Primary LU Support Config. Guide GG24-4059-00 Examples of using AIX NetView/6000 APIs GG24-4062-00 Introduction to using MQI Via MQ/ESA GG24-4063-00* Mgmt of Multiprotocol Environ. Using NetView GG24-4064-00 6611 Network Processor as an IP Router GG24-4066-00 VTAM V3R4.2 for MVS/ESA GG24-4067-00 Managing non-SNA Resources using NetView GMFHS GG24-4075-00* Examples of using AIX Systems Monitor/6000 GG24-4077-00* IDNX Frame Relay Network Planning and Implementation GG24-4087-00 Using NFS in a Multivendor Environment GG24-4088-00 Automated Configuration Management using NetView GG24-4129-00* AIX SNA Services V1R2 Sample Connections GG24-4142-00 Communications Manager/2 V1.1 Enhancements GG24-4145-00 Experiences using NetView Pipelines GG24-4156-00* NPM V2.1 Experiences Using new GUI & VTAM Statistics GG24-4157-00* Monitoring Performance in Router Networks GG24-4163-00* Managing DEC from NetView using Six2View GG24-4167-00* Distributed Appl Processing using MQSeries MQM MVS/ESA GG24-4169-00 IBM Connectivity Guide GG24-4170-00* Multiprotocol Network Tutorial GG24-4173-00* Personal Communications/3270 V3.1 Implementation Guide GG24-4186-00* NetView V2R4 New Functions GG24-4189-00* Guided Tour of SNA Server/6000 V2.1 GG24-4203-00* NetView V2R4 APPNTAM Feature Experiences GG24-4223-00* Intro to Performance in Router Networks GG24-4225-00* NETDA/2 Design Tool Guide Note: * means book available on second edition of CDROM, March 31, 1994 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. AD-DS-LS-MR-SM-ST-SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ The following redbooks are available on CDROM: PN SK2T-2177 U.S.- Price $250 Order Number Title -------------------------------------------------------------------- GG24-1591-00 Planning for Continuous Availability in a CICS and MVS/XA Env. GG24-1725-02 DFHSM Primer GG24-3070-10 Bibliography of ITSO Technical Bulletins GG24-3120-01 RACF Starter System GG24-3201-01 System-Managed Storage Technical Overview Presentation Guide GG24-3855-00 Client-Server with CICS and GUI GG24-3857-00 CICS/VSE Performance GG24-3860-00 VM/ESA R2 Overview GG24-3861-00 DFSMShsm Enhancements GG24-3863-00 APPC/MVS Server Facilities GG24-3867-00 MVS/ESA POSIX Guide GG24-3869-00 IW Implementation GG24-3872-00 CODE/370 and LE/370 GG24-3874-00 RMF V4 and ESA Functions GG24-3879-00 MVS Security Tips GG24-3882-00 AIX/ESA GG24-3883-00 CICS/VSE 2.1 MRO Function Shipping GG24-3886-00 IBM Storage Subsystem Enhancements GG24-3895-00 APPC Programming and Definitions GG24-3897-01 IBM Current-OV/VM Workgroup GG24-3898-00 RMF 430 Overview GG24-3899-00 Client/Server computing GG24-3900-00 Professional Documentation Manager GG24-3901-00 TIRS - AD/Cycle Integration GG24-3906-00 IBM 3495 GG24-3909-00 IBM Storage Products Announcement GG24-3910-00 High Level Assembler Presentation Guide GG24-3913-00 DFDSM GG24-3914-00 DFSMSrmm GG24-3920-01 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing GG24-3921-01 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing GG24-3923-00 AD/Cycle Integration: SCLM and CSP/370AD GG24-3925-00 Sysplex Migration Guide GG24-3926-00 DDCS/2 and DB2 Performance GG24-3931-00 MVS/ESA Client/Server GG24-3932-00 VM/ESA Rel 2 Usage GG24-3933-00 VMSES/E Release 2 GG24-3934-00 VM/ESA Storage Management GG24-3935-00 9221 Cookbook GG24-3936-00 Concurrent Copy Overview GG24-3224-00 CICS MRO Tuning and Performance Guide GG24-3403-01 Writing ACS Routines GG24-3481-02 MVS Software Management Cookbook GG24-3525-00 Enterprisewide DFSMS GG24-3529-00 Printing PostScript Language GG24-3530-00 Document Transforms Cookbook GG24-3538-01 SCLM and WSP/2 Usage Guide GG24-3571-00 ECKD and Nonsynchronous DASD I/O GG24-3582-00 CICS OS/2 Application Design GG24-3585-01 MVS/ESA and RACF 1.9 GG24-3594-01 MVS/ESA SP V4 GG24-3597-00 PDSE Usage Guide GG24-3628-03 MVS/ESA Implementation Guide GG24-3644-00 CSP/AD PWS Feature GG24-3663-01 9221 SE Guide GG24-3679-00 TSCF Controlling VM Guests GG24-3694-00 WDSF/VM GG24-3698-00 Performance Studies GG24-3706-00 Monitoring Query Usage GG24-3709-01 CMS SFS Primer GG24-3712-00 Single-Logon Project GG24-3715-00 Distributed Relational Database Remote Unit of Work Impl. GG24-3716-00 Distributed Relational Database Remote Unit of Work Impl. GG24-3720-00 ESCM Operations Presentation GG24-3721-00 ESCON Error Recovery GG24-3727-00 Client/Server DB GG24-3728-00 CLIENT/SERVER GUIDELINES GG24-3733-01 SQL/DS DRDA Setup GG24-3739-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 220 Guide GG24-3744-00 VM/ESA 1.1 Usage Experiences GG24-3750-00 AIX Additional Authorization GG24-3751-00 POWER Networking Guide GG24-3755-00 Distr. Relational Database Plang. and Design Guide for DB2 Users GG24-3757-00 AD/Cycle: Cross System Product Set GG24-3760-00 AD/Cycle Client Server Computing GG24-3764-00 IBM 3995 and OAM GG24-3767-00 Distributed Functions GG24-3768-00 SAA Cooperative Processing GG24-3769-00 Data Integrity GG24-3770-00 VM/ESA 1.1 Migration GG24-3771-00 OS/2 DRDA Clients and DB2 GG24-3776-00 TIRS/MVS Subsystem Install GG24-3779-00 EDA/SQL in an IW GG24-3791-00 Migration to VS COBOL II GG24-3792-00 Guidance for VM/VSE ESA Environments GG24-3796-00 Information/Management Version 5 Installation and Performance GG24-3802-00 ICSF/MVS R1 and ICRF GG24-3803-00 IBM 3990 ESCON Features Presentation Guide GG24-3805-00 CICS Pseudo-Conversational GG24-3809-00 OV/MVS Cross Platform Services GG24-3810-00 GDS EAB Overview and Comparison GG24-3818-00 APPC Programming in MVS/ESA and OS/2 GG24-3819-00 APPC Application Examples in MVS/ESA and OS/2 GG24-3823-00 DB2 V2.3 Nondistributed Performance GG24-3825-00 TIRS-IMS Applications GG24-3827-00 Test Tools GG24-3829-00 High Availability and Automation using OPC/ESA GG24-3830-00 Printing in a VM Office Environment: End User's Guide GG24-3833-00 SCLM New Function Guide GG24-3847-00 Controlling Multiple VSE GG24-3848-00 APPC/MVS 4.3 and RACF 1.9.2 GG24-3849-00 AIX/ESA Overview GG24-3851-01 VMSES/E Primer GG24-3853-00 AIX/ESA GG24-3854-00 Sysplex Automation and Consoles GG24-3939-00 CICS and LU6.2 Security GG24-3940-00 PROFS to OV/MVS Migration GG24-3943-00 Performance Data: CSP/370AD, CSP/370RS, CSP/2AD, and CSP/2R GG24-3950-00 VM Client/Server GG24-3952-00 DataHub Presentation Guide GG24-3954-00 Tape Implementation Strategies GG24-3960-00 APPC Security GG24-3962-00 QMF V3R1M1 RUW Implementation and Use GG24-3965-00 DFSMS/VM and ISMF: A Primer GG24-3966-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 220 Installation and Implementation GG24-3969-00 CICS/VSE XRF with a Database GG24-3970-00 RACF Overview GG24-3971-00 RACF Installation GG24-3972-00 RACF Advanced Topics GG24-3973-00 PSF/2 V1.10 DPF Implementation and Migration Guide GG24-3979-00 COBOL Code Reengineering GG24-3980-00 IMS/ESA Version 4 ETO Installation GG24-3981-00 IMS/ESA and APPC GG24-3983-00 TSCF GG24-3986-00 Data Propagator Receiver GG24-3987-00 3495 Primer GG24-3988-00 Planning Guide for Conversion to DFSMSrmm GG24-3990-00 Implementing Concurrent Copy GG24-3997-00 Network Configuration Application/MVS GG24-4001-00 DB2 Packages GG24-4004-00 CICS/VSE XRF under VSE/ESA Version 1 GG24-4009-01 Automating IBM 3990 DASD Recovery GG24-4010-00 IMS/ESA Performance and Tuning Guide GG24-4017-00 Client/Server and CICS OS/2 V2.0 GG24-4019-00 Information Warehouse Catalog Overview GG24-4021-00 Library Migration GG24-4024-00 VM/ESA 2.1 Overview GG24-4025-00 VSE/ESA 1.3 Migration Guide GG24-4026-00 CICS/ESA and TCP/IP for MVS GG24-4029-00 AFP Resources GG24-4031-00 DataHub Implementation and Connectivity GG24-4032-00 Rel. 2.1 Usage GG24-4034-00 ADSM Implementation Examples GG24-4037-00 HCD and Dynamic I/O Reconfiguration Primer GG24-4038-00 Micro Focus COBOL for CICS, IMS, DB2 and TSO Applications GG24-4040-00 NIC in AIX/ESA GG24-4044-00 Tape Mount Management Cookbook GG24-4045-00 Storage Performance Management Tools GG24-4046-00 VSE/ESA 1.3 under VM/ESA R2 GG24-4047-00 SQL/DS V3 R4 Performance Guide GG24-4053-00 PM Office/2 End User Education Guide GG24-4054-00 PM Office/2 End User Education Guide GG24-4061-00 Current-OV/MVS GG24-4069-00 The Host as a Data Server using LANRES GG24-4076-00 APPC/MVS SF GG24-4085-00 SDSF Conversion GG24-4089-00 BTLS for 3495 GG24-4096-00 Sample DPPX to VSE Migration GG24-4097-00 HMF/VM with Multiple VSE Systems GG24-4098-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 221 Installation GG24-4134-00 Workstation Platform GG24-4146-00 ADSM Presentation Guide GG24-4174-00 Cross Domain Communications GG24-4175-00 EREP GG24-4185-00 CICS/VSE V2R2 Data in Memory GG24-4218-00 OV/VM 1.2.0 Host Services Note: There are additional useful publications on this CD-ROM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. How to Subscribe/Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ To order any IBM Publication please call yor IBM Representative. IBM PUBLICATION DIRECT ORDER SERVICE ------------------------------------ - If you are a registered customer of DIAL IBM you may use PUBSYSTEM, of IBM LINK you may use PUBORDER. - If you are a resident of one of the following countries you may order by fax or phone: Belgium Phone: 32-2-225-3738 Fax: 32-2-225-3478 Denmark Phone: 45934545 x.3576 Czech Republic Phone: 42-2-67106250 Fax: 42-2-67106402 Address: IBM Ceska Republika (IBM CSR) spol. s r.o. attn.: Vojtech Ralek Murmanska 4/1475 105 00 Praha 10 Ecuador Phone: 593-2-565100 Fax: 593-2-565145 Address: IBM DEL ECUADOR Av. Almagro 2054 y Whimper Quito Germany Serving: Registered IBM customers Phone: 0130-7031 Fax: 0711-785-5116 Israel Phone: 03-6978901 Fax: 03-6959985 Mexico Phone: (905) 627-1163 Netherlands Serving: Registered IBM customers Phone: 31-205133920 Fax: 31-205133296 Panama Phone: (507) 639977 x.405 Fax: (507) 693604 South Africa Phone: 027-011-224-3242 Fax: 027-011-224-3188 United Kingdom Phone: 0256-478166 Fax: 0256-843173 Address: IBM Publications Unit 14 Kingsland Industrial Estate Bilton Road Basingstoke Hampshire RG24 0LJ U.S.A. Phone: 1-800-879-2755 Fax: 1-800-284-4721 Address: IBM Corporation P.O.Box 9046 Boulder CO 80301-9191 Payment: Primarily via monthly invoice from IBM. In certain countries also direct charge via a major credit card. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. SUBSCRIPTION INFORMATION: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ If you are a professional, responsible for one or some of the categories listed below, you may also subscribe by providing IBM with the subscription categories you are interested in. You will receive new ITSO Redbooks automatically as they become available and will be billed accordingly. SLSS Redbook Subscription Categories ------------------------------------ GBOF-6339 AIX Application Development and Database GBOF-6337 AIX Communications GBOF-6342 AIX Distributed Computing Environment GBOF-6349 AIX/ESA GBOF-6338 AIX Operating System/Systems Management & High Avail. GBOF-5216 AIX Computer Graphics Series and User Interface GBOF-6321 Application Development Platform GBOF-6323 Application Development Design and Modeling GBOF-6322 Application Development Maintenance and Test GBOF-6324 Application Generators GBOF-6360 Architecture GBOF-6326 Artificial Intelligence and Knowledge Based System GBOF-5225 AS/400 Communications and Systems Management GBOF-5224 AS/400 Office and Advanced Technology GBOF-5223 AS/400 PC Support GBOF-5222 AS/400 Systems, Application Development and Performance GBOF-6351 Automated Operations GBOF-6352 Banking - ATM GBOF-6354 Banking - Consumer Transact GBOF-6353 Banking - LAN DP GG24-3070 Bibliographies (SLSS by Form Number Only) GBOF-6328 CICS GBOF-5207 Communication Controller Products GBOF-5208 Connectivity GBOF-6331 Data Delivery and Information Warehouse GBOF-6330 DB2 GBOF-6333 Distributed Applications GBOF-6332 Distributed Data Base GBOF-2200 Engineering and Scientific GBOF-5210 Enterprise Networking GBOF-6325 High Level Languages GBOF-5204 Host Systems Management GBOF-2195 IBM OS/2 Ext Ed Cookbooks GBOF-2224 IBM OS/2 V2.0 Remote Installation Maintenance GBOF-2254 IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 / 2.1 Technical Compendium GBOF-6362 IDNX GBOF-6318 ImagePlus/MVS GBOF-6319 ImagePlus/400 GBOF-6320 ImagePlus/2 GBOF-6329 IMS GBOF-5200 Large Systems Hardware GBOF-6367 Local Area Networks GBOF-0429 Miscellaneous/Cross Category GBOF-6334 MVS/ESA Open and Client/Server GBOF-5201 MVS/ESA Systems Products GBOF-6364 NCP GBOF-6341 NetWare for AIX GBOF-6336 NetWare for OS/2 GBOF-6356 Network Distribution GBOF-5209 Network Management GBOF-6355 Network Performance GBOF-6358 Network Security GBOF-6327 Object Oriented Technology GBOF-6359 Open Networking GBOF-6346 Office Systems - AIX Systems GBOF-6348 Office Systems - Client/Server Systems GBOF-6347 Office Systems - Cross Systems GBOF-6343 Office Systems - LAN GBOF-6345 Office Systems - MVS Systems GBOF-6344 Office Systems - VM Systems GBOF-6366 OSI GBOF-6370 OS/2 Communications GBOF-6335 OS/2 LAN and Distributed Systems GBOF-6303 OS/2 V2.X GBOF-6304 Personal Systems - Configuration, Installation, Distrib. GBOF-6300 Personal Systems Hardware GBOF-5212 Personal Systems - Multimedia GBOF-6302 Personal Systems Software & Application Devel. GBOF-5202 Printing GBOF-5214 Retail GBOF-6340 RISC/6000 Hardware GBOF-6306 Storage Hardware - Magnetic DASD GBOF-6308 Storage Hardware - Optical DASD GBOF-6307 Storage Hardware - Tape GBOF-6309 Storage Software - DFSMS/MVS GBOF-6310 Storage Software - DFSMS/VM GBOF-6311 Storage Software - Distributed Storage Management GBOF-6371 System/Network Design GBOF-6357 Systems Application GBOF-6372 Systems Solution Library GBOF-6373 System Management Reference Library GBOF-6368 TCP/IP GBOF-2201 VM Systems GBOF-6374 VM/ESA Library GBOF-6313 VM/VSE GBOF-6317 VM/VSE - CSP GBOF-6314 VM/VSE - SQL GBOF-5211 Voice Enablers GBOF-6312 VSE GBOF-6363 VTAM GBOF-6369 X.25 GBOF-6365 3174 GBOF-6361 9221 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. GBOF-2200: Engineering and Scientific ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. GG24-3559-00 OS/2 EE 1.2 Cookbook Database Mgr-User Profile Mgmt DAC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3559-00 IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 Cookbook: Database Manager - User Profile Management (Data Access Control) This document covers the IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 Database Manager User Profile Management (UPM) facilities. It also covers Database security, authorization and maintenance. It is intended for IBM marketing representatives and system engineers who are responsible for proposing, designing, implementing or maintaining IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 based applications, and for system developers and users of these systems. (122 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2. GG24-3611-01 IBM RISC System/6000 NIC Tuning Guide for FORTRAN & C ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3611-01 IBM RISC System/6000 NIC Tuning Guide for FORTRAN and C This document is intended for developers of numerically intensive code for the RISC System/6000. It provides a detailed description of several tuning techniques that can be used to obtain peak floating-point performance. Some of the techniques involve undocumented and unsupported compiler options. (78 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.3. GG24-3676-00 Mainframe and Workstation NIC Software Compatibility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3676-00 Mainframe and Workstation NIC Software Compatibility This bulletin documents experiences gained in migrating Numerically Intensive Computing (NIC) applications between the IBM ES/9000 and the IBM RISC System/6000 platforms. The software products covered include FORTRAN compilers, pre-processors, ESSL, and OSL. This edition applies to the IBM ES/9000 and the IBM RISC System/6000. (114 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.4. GG24-3711-00 Predicting Execution Time on the IBM RISC System/6000 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3711-00 Predicting Execution Time on the IBM RISC System/6000 This report gives basic data from which one can predict the execution time of a sequence of instructions on the RISC System/6000 family of computers. It gives the processor time for each non-privileged instruction, and discusses many of the delays that occur between instructions due to data dependencies and branching. The emphasis is on timing short loops that are either fixed- or floating-point bound. (50 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. GBOF-2201: VM Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. GG24-3384-00 VM/XA SNA PSI Guide Methods and Components ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3384-00 VM/XA SNA PSI Guide Methods and Components This document is intended for Systems Programmers and others involved in problem determination activities. It provides information on identifying a VM/X SNA system problem; gathering information that describes the problem; and reporting the situation to IBM in a complete, organized, and useful form. It is assumed that the reader has experience in installing and using VM/XA SP systems. (250 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. GG24-3385-00 VM/XA SNA PSI Guide - Use of Tools ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3385-00 VM/XA SNA PSI Guide - Use of Tools This document is intended for Systems Programmers and others involved in problem determination activities and complements the information in "VM/XA SNA PSI Guide - Methods and Components" (GG24-3384). It contains discussions of the tools that can be used to perform Problem Source Identification (PSI) in a VM/XA SNA environment. It is assumed that the reader has experience in installing and using VM/XA SP systems. (146 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3. GG24-3425-00 VM/XA SP Performance Tools and Tuning Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3425-00 VM/XA SP Performance Tools and Tuning Guidelines This publication is intended for Systems Programmers and others involved in performance and tuning activities of VM/XA SP systems. It contains discussions of the tools used for performance measurements and tuning processes. It provides no programming interfaces for customers. (186 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4. GG24-3430-00 VM-AS/400 Connectivity and Functional Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3430-00 VM-AS/400 Connectivity and Functional Use This document discusses the different products and connectivity possibilities that IBM Provides to allow a VM system to be connected to an AS/400 system. It is intended to help VM specialists understand the capabilities of the various products in terms of functionality and connectivity. (192 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.5. GG24-3473-00 VM-OS/2 Connectivity and Functional Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3473-00 VM-OS/2 Connectivity and Functional Use This document discusses the different products and possibilities that IBM provides to allow a VM system to be connected to a Personal System/2 or personal computer running an OS/2 System. This book is intended to help VM specialists understand the capabilities of the various products in terms of functionality and connectivity. (368 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6. GG24-3542-00 VMPPF Usage and Experience Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3542-00 VMPPF Usage and Experience Guide This document is intended primarily for IBM Systems Engineers and customer personnel responsible for performance modeling and capacity planning of VM systems. Readers would include VM and large system product specialists, systems programmers, systems analysts and system planners. This document provides the reader with information about important aspects of using the VM Performance Planning Facility (VMPPF) for performance activities and capacity planning. In addition, performance modeling scenarios are described. (144 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.7. GG24-3610-00 VM/ESA and Related Products: Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3610-00 VM/ESA and Related Products: Overview This document is intended for systems analysts, system planners, systems programmers and others involved in the planning phases of VM/ESA. It contains descriptions of the new and enhanced capabilities of VM/ESA. Release 1.0 and VM/ESA. Release 1.1. The reader is assumed to have experience with the prior versions of VM systems. This edition applies to VM/ESA. Release 1.0 and Release 1.1, Program Number 5684-112. (278 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.8. GG24-3694-00 Workstation DSF/VM V1 DOS & OS/2 Clients Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3694-00 Workstation Data Save Facility/VM Version 1 DOS and OS/2 Clients Implementation Experiences This document is intended to provide guidelines for the installation, implementation, and the practical use, of the Workstation Data Save Facility/VM Version 1 program product (5684-122). (168 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.9. GG24-3709-00 CMS Shared File System Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3709-00 CMS Shared File System Primer This guide provides a basic knowledge of the CMS Share System (SFS). Its main purpose is to teach new CMS SFS uses how to work with and exploit the Shared File System within VM/ESA. Although most of the topics covered are independent of the VM/ESA release, this book has been written based on VM/ESA Release 1.0. Appendix A, New Features in VM/ESA Release 1.1 on page 125 contains a brief description of the new features available. Some topics can also be found in many other IBM manuals. The intent is to have these topics accumulated in one single document. This document is intended primarily for IBM Systems Engineers and customer personnel responsible for planning and using the facility. (164 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.10. GG24-3744-00 VM/ESA Release 1.1 Overview and Usage Experiences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3744-00 VM/ESA Release 1.1 Overview and Usage Experiences This document describes the new features of VM/ESA Release 1.1. It also contains installation and usage experience to assist the customers in installing, implementing, and exploiting VM/ESA Release 1.1. This document is intended primarily for IBM Systems Engineers and customer personnel responsible for planning, installing and using VM/ESA Release 1.1. Readers include VM and large system product specialists, system programmers, system analysts and system planners. It assumes that the reader is currently running any of the previous VM offerings and is familiar with its functions. (210 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.11. GG24-3770-00 VM/ESA 1.1 Migration Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3770-00 VM/ESA 1.1 Migration Management This document describes VM/ESA Release 1.1. It provides information relating to migration to VM/ESA 1.1 from other VM platforms. (82 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.12. GG24-3851-01 MSES/E Primer: Concepts and Experiences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3851-01 MSES/E Primer: Concepts and Experiences This document provides an overview of the concepts, functions, and capabilities of VMSES/E (Virtual Machine Serviceability Enhancements Staged/Enhanced), a component of VM/ESA (Virtual Machine/Enterprise Systems Architecture), and the installation and service tool for the system and related program products. Usage experiences are included. This document is intended for customer and IBM technical personnel involved in planning for, installing, and servicing a VM/ESA Release 2.1 system. Knowledge of VM/ESA concepts, in particular of the CMS commands and file system, is assumed. The information is based on an early version of VM/ESA Release 2.1 and may not reflect the release as delivered. (264 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.13. GG24-3860-00 VM/ESA Release 2 Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3860-00 VM/ESA Release 2 Overview This document contains presentation material (foils and presenter text) describing the main features available in VM/ESA Release 2. The first part is a guide with mini-sized foils and presenter text; the second part consists of full-sized foils that can be used in the actual presentation. (196 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.14. GG24-3920-00 ES/9000 Multi-Image Process V1 Presentation & Solutions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3920-00 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing Volume 1: Presentation and Solutions Guidelines This is Volume 1 of a 2-volume set, and describes the three Multi-Image environments available on IBM ES/9000 processors. It includes a presentation comparing the capabilities and functions of hardware-based solutions to VM/ESA-based solutions. Also included are general guidelines and comparison tables. This document is intended for IBM and Customer Technical Personnel who must design and implement Multi-Image Processing environments based on ES/9000 Processors. General knowledge of data processing, ESA/390 architecture, and VM/ESA is assumed. Volume 2, ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing, Volume 2: Foil Masters, GG24-3921 contains the presentation foil masters. (240 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.15. GG24-3921-00 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing Volume 2: Foil Masters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3921-00 ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing Volume 2: Foil Masters This is Volume 2 of a 2-volume set, and contains the foil masters for a presentation comparing the capabilities and functions of ES/9000-based solutions to VM/ESA-based Multi-Image Processing solutions. This document is intended for IBM and Customer Technical Personnel who must design and implement Multi-Image Processing environments based on ES/9000 Processors. General knowledge of data processing, ESA/390 architecture, and VM/ESA is assumed. Volume 1, ES/9000 Multi-Image Processing Volume:1 Presentation and Solutions Guidelines, GG24-3920 contains the speaker's text and solution developing aids. (374 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.16. GG24-3932-00 VM/ESA Release 2 Usage and Experience ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3932-00 VM/ESA Release 2 Usage and Experience This document describes new features and support in VM/ESA* Release 2. It also describes installation and usage experiences. This document is intended to help customers install, use, and exploit VM/ESA* Release 2. (214 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.17. GG24-3933-00 VMSES/E Release 2 Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3933-00 VMSES/E Release 2 Overview This document contains a presentation describing the new functions introduced by VMSES/E Release 2, a component of VM/ESA Release 2. This document is intended for customer and IBM personnel involved in planning for, installing, and servicing a VM/ESA Release 2 system. Knowledge of VM/ESA Release 1.1 concepts, in particular of VMSES/E is assumed. (232 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.18. GG24-3934-00 VM/ESA Storage Management with Tuning Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3934-00 VM/ESA Storage Management with Tuning Guidelines This document describes the VM/ESA storage hierarchy (central storage, expanded storage, and auxiliary storage), how VM/ESA manages these resources, and how the user can control and influence the VM/ESA resource management. Several tuning guidelines and rules-of-thumb (ROT) are included in each chapter. This document also includes an introduction to queueing theory as a foundation for a better understanding of system performance. This document is intended for technical professionals in general, particularly for system programmers and system administrators. A good knowledge of VM/ESA and a general knowledge of system performance are assumed. (272 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.19. GG24-4024-00 VM/ESA Release 2.1 Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4024-00 VM/ESA Release 2.1 Overview This document contains presentation material (foils and presenter text) describing the main features available in VM/ESA Release 2.1. The first part is a guide with mini-sized foils and presenter text; the second part consists of full-sized foils that can be used in the actual presentation. (242 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.20. GG24-4032-00 VM/ESA Release 2.1 Usage and Experience ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New This document describes the new features and support in VM/ESA Release 2.1. It also describes installation and usage experiences. This document is intended to help customers install, use, and exploit VM/ESA Release 2.1. (106 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. GBOF-2224: IBM OS/2 V2.0 Remote Installation Maintenance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. GG24-3780-02 OS/2 V2.0 and V2.1 Remote Installation and Maintenance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3780-02 OS/2 V2.0 and V2.1 Remote Installation and Maintenance This document describes the attended installation and maintenance for OS/2 V2.x using redirected input/output on LAN-based client/server systems and response file or dialog techniques. It provides explanations, guidelines and practical hints on how to get access to redirected drives and how to install the OS/2 V2.x using the dialog or response file interface. This document is intended for workstation specialists and system technical personnel responsible for mass-distribution of OS/2 V2.x knowledge of LAN redirection principles and Operating System/2 is assumed. (202 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. GG24-3781-01 Automated Install CID for EES, LAN Server, V3.0 & NTS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3781-01 Automated Installation for CID Enabled Extended Services, LAN Server V3.0 and Network Transport Services/2 This document describes the Configuration, Installation and Distribution (CID) implementation of the Extended Services for OS/2, IBM LAN Server V3.0, Network Transport Services/2 and the LAN NetView Start products. The CID facilities and tools discussed will enable the installation of complex OS/2-based systems in a LAN environment. This document will also include information to guide application developers who wish to enable their products to be installed via the CID techniques. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers and customer technical support personnel responsible for the installation of OS/2 environments on a large number of workstations. An in-depth knowledge of the capabilities and functions of OS/2 V2.0, Extended Services and LAN Server is assumed. (332 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. GG24-3783-01 Automated Installation for CID Enabled OS/2 V2.x ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3783-01 Automated Installation for CID Enabled OS/2 V2.x This document describes the lightly attended installation and maintenance of OS/2 V2.x using Network Transport Services/2's CID utilities. The method utilize the architected distribution specified by CID (Configuration Installation Distribution) strategy. This strategy consists of three elements: LAN redirection, response files and the architected CID return codes. The book provides explanations, guidelines and scenarios with practical hints on how to use the LAN Configuration Installation and Distribution Utility and response file techniques. This document is intended for workstation specialists and system technical personnel responsible for mass-distribution of OS/2 V2.x. A knowledge of LAN redirection principles and Operating System/2 is assumed. (258 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.4. GG24-3977-00 CID for LAN Server, V3.0 RIPL, TCP/IP & Netware 3.11 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3977-00 Automated Installation for CID Enabled Products in LAN Server V3.0 RIPL, TCP/IP, and Novell Netware 3.11 Environments This document shows how OS/2 V2.x., Extended Services 1.0, LAN Server V3.0 and Network Transport Services /2 can be delivered electronically on LAN-based client/server systems using response file, redirected I/O and lightly attended installation techniques. It contains installation scenarios using LAN Server 3.0 RIPL, TCP/IP and Novell NetWare servers to establish a connection to the client. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers and customer's technical personnel responsible for the installation of OS/2 environments on a larger number of workstations. A knowledge of OS/2 V2.x., Extended Services 1.0, LAN Server V3.0 and Network Transport Services /2 the specific client/server connection and the methodology of CID is assumed. (210 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.5. GG24-4073-00 CID WLFS-LANRES-AS/400 PC Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4073-00 Workstation LAN File Services/VM LAN Resource Extension and Services/VM AS/400 PC Support in CID Environment This document describes the installation and usage of Workstation LAN File Services, LAN Resource Extension and Services for VM, and the PC Support/ 400 for AS/400 processor in order to make the host DASD storage space available for the LAN connected workstation using services of the IBM LAN Server 3.0 and Novell NetWare server 3.11. This document also describes the preparation of the CID code server used for the automated installation of CID enabled products using NTS/2's CID utilities. The method utilizes the architected distribution specified by CID (Configuration Installation Distribution) strategy. This strategy consists of three elements: LAN redirection, response files and the architected return codes. This document is intended for workstation specialists and system technical personnel responsible for mass distribution of OS/2 V2.x. A knowledge of LANs, OS/2 V2.x and VM host operating system is assumed. (170 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. GBOF-2254: IBM OS/2 V2.0 Technical Compendium ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. GG24-3730-00 OS/2 Version 2.0 Volume 1: Control Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3730-00 OS/2 Version 2.0 Volume 1: Control Program This document is intended to provide readers with an understanding of the functions provided by the Control Program component in OS/2 V2.0 and its implementation. The document should enable readers to make an evaluation of the OS/2 V2.0 product and its components. The document contains information on the implementation of operating system functions such as task management, memory management, and the 32-bit application programming interfaces provided by OS/2 V2.0. Information is also provided on hardware support and interrupt management, application debugging aids within the operating system, and the support for multiple bootable fixed disk partitions. The document also discusses pre-installation planning considerations, and the migration of existing applications from 16-bit versions of OS/2 to to OS/2 V2.0 It is intended for IBM systems engineers, IBM authorized dealers, IBM customers, and others who require a knowledge of the operating system features, functions, and implementation in OS/2 Version 2.0. This document assumes that the reader is generally familiar with the function provided in previous releases of OS/2. (202 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. GG24-3731-00 OS/2 Version 2.0 Volume 2: DOS and Windows Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3731-00 OS/2 Version 2.0 Volume 2: DOS and Windows Environment This document provides an understanding of the architecture and function of the Multiple Virtual DOS Machines (MVDM) component of OS/2 V2.0, which allows concurrent execution of multiple DOS applications, each in its own VDM. Further, this document describes the support for Windows applications under OS/2 V2.0. This document contains information on the MVDM architecture and components, including the use of device drivers by DOS applications, and support for expanded and extended memory. Support for Windows applications on the OS/2 V2.0 platform is another important topic examined in this document. The document includes a discussion of Windows device drivers, inter-process communication between Windows, DOS, and OS/2 applications (including DDE and clipboard capabilities), and compatibility issues as they relate to Windows applications in the OS/2 V2.0 environment. (326 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3. GG24-3732-00 OS/2 V2 V3: Presentation Manager & Workplace Shell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3732-00 OS/2 Version 2.0 Volume 3: Presentation Manager and Workplace Shell This document gives a description of the functions and facilities provided by the Presentation Manager and Workplace Shell in OS/2 V2.0 and their implementation. The document discusses the migration of PM applications from previous versions of OS/2 and the considerations for deciding whether to implement new applications as PM or as Workplace Shell applications. This document is intended for planners and technical support personnel who require an understanding of the function provided by PM and the Workplace Shell in OS/2 V2.0, and the implementation of that function. (172 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4. GG24-3774-01 OS/2 Version 2.0 Volume 4: Writing Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3774-01 OS/2 Version 2.0 Volume 4: Writing Programs This document is intended as a general introduction to the concepts involved in the design and implementation of applications which will execute in the OS/2 Presentation Manager and Workplace Shell environment under OS/2 Version 2. It is not intended to be an exhaustive reference on the subject of Presentation Manager programming, and should be used in conjunction with the official IBM product documentation, and other reference books and documents. It must be stressed that this document is not intended to teach the reader how to program in the C language or how to use the PM programming interface, nor is it intended to teach the theory of object-oriented programming. Rather, it serves as a guide to the integration of various object-oriented software engineering techniques with the PM application model, in order to produce well-structured, easily-maintainable applications which conform to CUA guidelines. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers, IBM authorized dealers, IBM customers, and others who require a knowledge of application development under OS/2 Version 2.0. (442 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.5. GG24-3775-00 OS/2 Version 2.0: Volume 5: Print Subsystem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3775-00 OS/2 Version 2.0: Volume 5: Print Subsystem This document describes the Print Subsystem component of OS/2 Version 2.0. It forms Volume 5 of a five-volume set. The other volumes are: o GG24-3730 o GG24-3731 o GG24-3732 o GG24-3774 The entire set may be ordered as OS/2 Version 2.0 Technical Compendium, GBOF-2254. This document is intended for IBM system engineers, IBM authorized dealers, IBM customers, and others who require a knowledge of Presentation Manager features, functions and implementation under OS/2 Version 2.0. This document assumes that the reader is generally familiar with the function provided in previous releases of OS/2. (252 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.6. GG24-1683-02 IBM 4381 Dual Processors Installation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1683-02 IBM 4381 Dual Processors Installation Guide This guide describes several scenarios for installing 4381 Dual Processors. It is useful in the planning and implementation phase for system programmers or others involved in the installation project. (138 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. GBOF-5200: Large Systems Hardware ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.1. GG24-3343-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Systems Recovery & Availability Vol 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3343-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Systems Recovery and Availability, Volume I This document provides workshop material for IBM ES/3090 Complex Systems Recovery and Availability. This material includes a comprehensive presentation of recovery techniques in an installation running under control of MVS/SP V3.1. This volume should be used for self-study education. (298 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2. GG24-3344-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Sys Recovery & Availability Vol II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3344-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Systems Recovery and Availability, Volume II This document provides training material for IBM ES/3090 Complex Systems Recovery and Availability. Intended to provide a comprehensive presentation of the recovery techniques applicable to an installation operating a configuration under control of MVS/SP V3.1.0e. Emphasis is on MVS/ESA and its I/O recovery facilities. (108 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3. GG24-3345-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Sys Recovery & Availability Vol III ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3345-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Systems Recovery and Availability, Volume III This document provides workshop material for IBM ES/3090 Complex Systems Recovery and Availability. The material includes the presentation foil masters. It is intended to provide a comprehensive presentation of the recovery techniques applicable to an installation operating a configuration under control of MVS/SP V3.1.0e. Emphasis is on MVS/ESA, and its I/O recovery facilities. This presentation contains material suitable for technical support and operation personnel. (398 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.4. GG24-3346-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Sys Recovery & Avail & Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3346-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Systems Recovery & Availability System Recovery Procedures This document contains guidelines and procedures for recovery of an ES/3090 processor complex running MVS/ESA. This document is intended for systems programmers and operating staff and can be tailored for customer needs. (144 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.5. GG24-3347-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Sys Recovery & Avail Reconfig Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3347-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Systems Recovery and Availability Reconfiguration and Recovery Procedures This document describes hardware recovery mechanisms and is a guide to recovery procedures and the reconfiguration process for multiprocessor models. This document is intended for systems programmers and operating staff and should be tailored for customer needs. (264 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.6. GG24-3350-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Sys Rec/Avail Exercise Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3350-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Complex Systems Recovery and Availability Exercise Installation and Run Time Procedures This document contains instructions on installing and running the practical exercises in conjunction with the "IBM ES/3090 Complex Systems Recovery and Availability" presentation. The document is intended as a guide for the installer and as a guideline for those who actually run the exercise code. (72 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.7. GG24-3416-00 ES/3090(TM) Model S Processor Complex PR/SM Feature Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3416-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Model S Processor Complex PR/SM Feature Presentation Guide This guide provides a comprehensive introduction to the PR/SM feature with emphasis on LPAR mode. (278 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.8. GG24-3417-00 ES/3090(TM) Model S Processor LPAR Mode Op Training Vol I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3417-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Model S Processor Complex PR/SM Feature Operator Training Package for LPAR Mode, Volume I This document provides operator training material for IBM ES/3090 Processor Complex S Models running in LPAR mode. The material includes a presentation script and is intended for the presenter or for individual self-study. Volume II (GG24-3418) contains student materials. Volume III (GG24-3419) contains the foil masters. (76 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.9. GG24-3418-00 ES/3090(TM) Model S Processor LPAR Mode Op Training Vol II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3418-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Model S Processor Complex PR/SM Feature Operator Training Package for LPAR Mode, Volume II This document provides operator training material for IBM ES/3090 Processor Complex S Models running in LPAR model. The material includes operator class handouts. (30 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.10. GG24-3419-00 ES/3090(TM) Model S Processor LPAR Mode Op Training Vol III ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3419-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Model S Processor Complex PR/SM Feature Operator Training Package for LPAR Mode, Volume III This document provides operator training material for IBM ES/3090 Processor S Models running in LPAR mode. The material includes the presentation foil masters. (72 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.11. GG24-3537-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Models J & JH PR/SM Feature Presentation Gde ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3537-00 IBM ES/3090(TM) Models J and JH PR/SM Feature Presentation Guide This document provides a presentation script and presentation foil masters on IBM ES/3090 Processor Complex J and JH Models running in LPAR mode. It is intended for the presenter or for individual self-study. (294 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.12. GG24-3578-00 S/370 I/O Interface Review Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3578-00 S/370 I/O Interface Review Presentation Guide This document provides a refresher on the S/370 I/O interface, also called the OEM, OEMI, parallel interface, or bus and tag interface. Presentation foils and explanatory text are included. (202 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.13. GG24-3648-00 Console Intro for ES/9000 Models 190,210,260,320,440,480 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3648-00 Console Introduction for ES/9000 Models 190, 210, 260, 320, 440 and 480 This document is intended for system operators, system programmers, IBM Systems Engineers and others involved in basic operations of an ES/9000 air cooled processor. It contains information on basic concepts, terminology and commonly used functions of the ES/9000 console. The reader is assumed to have a basic understanding of the IBM System/390 architecture. (68 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.14. GG24-3720-01 Enterprise Systems Connection Manager Operations Presentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3720-01 Enterprise Systems Connection Manager Operations Presentation This document is intended for IBM systems engineers and customers to assist them in learning how to use the Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON*) Manager Release 1.1, Program Number 5688-008. After reading this guide and applying the suggested techniques, the reader should have an overall view of many aspects to be considered in creating a set of operational procedures for managing an Enterprise Systems Connection Environment. The presentation assumes that the audience has basic skills in operating an MVS system. The document contains presentation foils, explanatory text and a description of the ESCON Manager Simulation package. (270 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.15. GG24-3721-00 ESCON Error Recovery Concepts & Procedures in an MVS Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3721-00 ESCON Error Recovery Concepts and Procedures in an MVS Environment This document describes error recovery procedures and the theoretical foundation for these procedures related to the ESCON I/O interface. The document provides background information and guidance on planning error recovery procedures in an ESCON environment. Practical examples of the recovery actions taken in specific cases is provided, as well as erroneous configurations and documentation of system responses to faults. (174 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.16. GG24-3983-00 TSCF Release 1 Stand-alone Functions for the PS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3983-00 Target System Control Facility Release 1 Stand-alone Functions for the PS/2 This document describes a function of Target System Control Facility Release 1 that is available after installing PTF UY90968. The new functions enhance the useability of TSCF and should be used to review new and existing configurations. The text of this bulletin is in part also printed in the documentation accompanying the PTF. This document is intended for System Engineers and customers who are involved in designing solutions for remote operations. A knowledge of TSCF Release 1 is assumed. (62 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. GBOF-5201: MVS/ESA Systems Products ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.1. GG24-3120-01 RACF Starter System for MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3120-01 RACF Starter System for MVS This document describes the process of installing and customizing a RACF Version 1 Release 9 starter system on MVS. It is intended to supplement the documentation supplied in the CBIPO package. This document is intended for systems engineers, system programmers, security administrators and auditors who have to plan, install, implement, and audit RACF. It contains recommendations and examples on how to use and implement the functions as well as a short description of how they work. A basic knowledge of RACF and MVS is assumed. (206 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2. GG24-3303-00 IBM ES Architecture/370 Evolution, Facilities & Exploitation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3303-00 IBM Enterprise Systems Architecture/370 Evolution, Facilities and Exploitation This document provides a presentation about the new and improved functions of the Enterprise Systems Architecture/370 (ESA/370). It describes the evolution of IBM large systems architecture and the requirements that have led to ESA/370. The new facilities and their exploitation are presented from a conceptional point of view. The level of information is suitable for management, systems programmers, and senior application developers. (318 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3. GG24-3404-00 MVS/ESA Data in Memory Concepts and Facilities ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3404-00 MVS/ESA Data in Memory Concepts and Facilities This document provides an overview of the MVS/ESA features that support data in memory. Hints and tips for incorporating MVS/ESA facilities into existing and planned software are included. (40 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4. GG24-3470-00 MVS/ESA Security Enhancements Presentation Foils ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3470-00 MVS/ESA Security Enhancements Presentation Foils This document provides technical information on the enhancements included in the MVS/SP Release 3.1.3 and RACF Release 1.9 announcements. The material consists of presentation foil masters, suitable for making overhead transparencies. (356 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.5. GG24-3471-00 Introduction to MVS/ESA Security with RACF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3471-00 Introduction to MVS/ESA Security with RACF This document describes security on IBM's large systems using the Resource Access Control Facility (RACF). This book is intended for managers, customers and technical personnel. (164 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6. GG24-3481-02 MVS Software Management Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3481-02 MVS Software Management Cookbook This document is primarily intended for system programmers, their management and IBM technical personnel. This manual, previously issued as Software Management in an MVS/ESA Environment Cookbook describes the tasks necessary to maintain an MVS/ESA environment, using SMP/E and IBM custom built offerings. Topics include maintenance philosophy; system design for maintenance; and software installation, testing, and implementation. The entire document may be read to gain an overall understanding of large systems maintenance. Alternatively, specific sections may be read as the need arises during a system update. (188 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7. GG24-3488-00 Hiperbatch/DLF Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3488-00 Hiperbatch/DLF Presentation Guide This manual is a description of the Hiperbatch Facility of MVS/SP 3.1.3. The intended audience is IBM SE's and customer personnel. (126 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8. GG24-3585-01 MVS/ESA & RACF V1 R9 Security Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3585-01 MVS/ESA and RACF Version 1 Release 9 Security Implementation Guide This document provides installation information on enhancements included in the MVS/SP Version 3 Release 1.3 and RACF Version 1 Release 9 products, with specific attention to implementing the security enhancements. It contains recommendations and examples on how to use and implement the functions as well as a short description of how they work. It presents a commercial view of the new security and audit functions for organizations not implementing full B1 security. (472 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.9. GG24-3594-01 MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Technical Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3594-01 MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Technical Presentation Guide This document consists of the text needed for a presentation describing the announcements made in September 1990, that relate to MVS/ESA SP Version 4 and the enhancements announced in June 1991 for MVS/SP Version 4 Release 2.2. (492 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.10. GG24-3595-00 MVS/ESA SP V4 Sysplex Technical Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3595-00 MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Sysplex Technical Presentation Guide This document describes the functions provided by the implementation of the Cross-System Coupling Facility (XCF), a new component of MVS/ESA SP Version 4. Intended for systems engineers and technically oriented customer personnel. (142 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.11. GG24-3613-00 IBM S/390 Security Announcement Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3613-00 IBM S/390 Security Announcement Presentation Guide This document contains a complete presentation intended to introduce management, customers and technical personnel to the new security products and the security enhancements to existing products that are announced in September 1990. (166 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.12. GG24-3628-03 MVS/ESA Version 4 Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3628-03 MVS/ESA Version 4 Implementation Guide This document is intended to help IBM Systems Engineers and customers install and use MVS/ESA SP Version 4. Readers would include IBM MVS and large system product specialists, systems programmers, systems analysts, and system planners. This document provides the reader with information about the important aspects of using the new features of MVS/ESA SP Version 4. The book contains descriptions and examples of MVS/ESA Version 4 features and applies to: MVS/ESA SP 4.1 MVS/ESA SP 4.2 MVS/ESA SP 4.2.2 MVS/ESA SP 4.3.0 (410 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.13. GG24-3698-00 MVS/ESA and Data in Memory Performance Studies ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3698-00 MVS/ESA and Data in Memory Performance Studies This manual contains the result of a number of independent performances studies conducted by various laboratories within IBM. All the studies bring into play the Data In Memory MVS functions for different components. These studies are intended to assist in understanding the performance characteristics of different MVS system environments and functions. (368 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.14. GG24-3802-00 ICRF and ICSF/MVS Release 1 Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3802-00 ICRF and ICSF/MVS Release 1 Implementation Guide This document describes the installation, initialization, and implementation of the Integrated Cryptographic Facility and the Integrated Cryptographic Service Facility/MVS. This document is intended for System Programmers, Security Administrators, and those who need to plan for and install these products. It contains recommendations and examples of how to use and implement the functions as well as a short description of how they work. Sample programs are provided to illustrate the use of the crypto callable services. (314 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.15. GG24-3848-00 MVS/ESA SP V4 R3 & RACF V1 R9.2 APPC/MVS Tech Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3848-00 MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Release 3 and RACF Version 1 Release 9.2 APPC/MVS Technical Presentation Guide This document describes the functions provided by the Advanced Program to Program Communication (APPC) protocols in the new APPC/MVS component of MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Release 2, as enhanced by MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Release 2.2 and MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Release 3. It also describes the functions of RACF Version 1 Release 9.2, many of which provide support for APPC/MVS. However, APPC/MVS Server Facilities enhancements in MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Release 3 are described in GG24-3863. (444 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.16. GG24-3874-00 RMF Version 4 Support for MVS/ESA Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3874-00 Resource Measurement Facility (RMF) Version 4 Support for MVS/ESA Functions This document describes how and where the MVS/ESA functions are reported by RMF. It points out the capabilities introduced in RMF from Version 4 Release 1.0 to Version 4 Release 3.0 (174 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.17. GG24-3879-00 Elements of Security: MVS/RACF Tips ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3879-00 Elements of Security: MVS/RACF Tips This document discusses a number of topics relevant to MVS system security. Some of the topics are conceptual in nature, and others are very specific to several MVS details. This document is intended to provide background material for anyone responsible for MVS user administration or basic system security. (82 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.18. GG24-3898-00 RMF Version 4 Release 3 Technical Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3898-00 Resource Measurement Facility (RMF) Version 4 Release 3.0 Technical Overview This document describes the new functions provided by the program product Resource Measurement Facilities (RMF) Version 4 Release 3.0 (program number 5685-029). It describes the new functions in detail and provides some foils for presentation. (104 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.19. GG24-3925-00 MVS/ESA Sysplex Migration Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3925-00 MVS/ESA Sysplex Migration Guide Sysplex is a new concept introduced with MVS/ESA Version 4. It allows an installation to operate several MVS systems as a single system and to create applications which can run simultaneously on more than one system at the same time while appearing as a single application to the observer. This document describes sysplex and how to install it. It also provides advice on migrating a multi-MVS installation to sysplex. The document is intended for IBM Systems Engineers and customer system programmers who are installing sysplex. A knowledge of MVS/ESA Version 4 functions is assumed. (284 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.20. GG24-3931-00 MVS/ESA Client/Server Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3931-00 MVS/ESA Client/Server Presentation Guide This document is a high-level overview presentation of MVS/ESA's place in the client/server world. Open systems and cooperative processing are also covered as related topics. The document gives an overall picture of how MVS/ESA* contributes to a customer distributed processing strategy. Current features of MVS/ESA and associated products are discussed in a general way. It is assumed that the audience for the presentation has an MVS/ESA background. Many new features are being added to MVS/ESA to support client/server computing. Some of these new features are from the UNIX** world and time is spent clarifying them. Future directions of IBM in the distributed processing area are discussed with an emphasis on how MVS/ESA participates. (348 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.21. GG24-3970-00 Elements of Security: RACF Overview - Student Notes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3970-00 Elements of Security: RACF Overview - Student Notes This document is intended to provide additional information for students attending a RACF presentation or workshop. This document consists of the "foils" (overhead projections) typically used when an IBM systems engineer presents an informal RACF class. The material contained in these foils would normally be presented during a two or three-day lecture period. Readers are assumed to understand common MVS terms and acronyms. (These are not the foils used for formal IBM RACF education courses.) (102 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.22. GG24-3971-00 Elements of Security: RACF Installation - Student Notes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3971-00 Elements of Security: RACF Installation - Student Notes This document is intended to provide additional information for students attending a RACF presentation or workshop. This document consists of the "foils" (overhead projections) typically used when an IBM systems engineer presents an informal RACF class. The material contained in these foils would normally be presented during a two or three-day lecture period. Readers are assumed to understand common MVS terms and acronyms. (These are not the foils used for formal IBM RACF education courses.) (58 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.23. GG24-3972-00 Elements of Security: RACF Advanced Topics - Student Notes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3972-00 Elements of Security: RACF Advanced Topics - Student Notes This document is intended to provide additional information for students attending a RACF presentation or workshop. This document consists of the "foils" (overhead projections) typically used when an IBM systems engineer presents an informal RACF class. The material contained in these foils would normally be presented during a two or three-day lecture period. Readers are assumed to understand common MVS terms and acronyms. (These are not the foils used for formal IBM RACF education courses.) (72 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.24. GG24-4037-00 MVS/ESA HCD and Dynamic I/O Reconfiguration Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4037-00 MVS/ESA HCD and Dynamic I/O Reconfiguration Primer This document describes the Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD) component of MVS/ESA System Product Version 4 and the Dynamic I/O Reconfiguration function as it relates to HCD. This document is intended for system programmers and administrators responsible for defining and activating hardware changes to their S/390 or ES/9000 systems and for the IBM representatives who need this information. Knowledge of MVS in general and of MVSCP and IOCP is assumed. (370 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.25. GG24-4062-00: Introduction to Using the MQI via Message Queue Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4062-00: Introduction to Using the Message Queuing Interface via Message Queue Manager/ESA This document provides a view of messaging and queuing with the Message Queuing Interface (MQI), primarily as seen from the point of view of an MVS-based system. Although it is recognized that many MVS systems involve CICS, IMS and TSO/batch subsystems, the activities involved in this project only had access to a CICS and TSO/batch interface to the MQI. This document is intended for personnel who need information related to the marketing and acceptance of messaging concepts for communications with MVS-based subsystems. A general knowledge of overall IBM and customer computing systems is assumed. (150 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.26. GG24-4076-00 APPC/MVS Server Fac App Design Guide A Prototyping Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4076-00 APPC/MVS Server Facilities Applications Design Guide A Prototyping Example This document describes the usage of APPC/MVS server facilities. It provides design guidelines for planning server applications and it describes two sample servers. One single-tasking server, suitable for learning APPC/MVS server facilities conversations, and one multi-tasking server, suitable for prototyping server applications are provided with the book. The multi-tasking server is particularly well suited for coding prototypes to aid in the final design of an application. As an illustration of the prototyping capability of the multi-tasking server a file transfer application coded using the REXX programming language is included with the book. This server prototype utilizes multi-tasking, load balancing and each server task will be able to run under the clients RACF-id. This document is intended as well for designers as for programmers of APPC/MVS applications. A knowledge of MVS/ESA, TSO/E and REXX is assumed. (228 pages with one 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.27. GG24-4085-00 Enhanced Exploitation of RACF 1.9.2 SDSF Conversion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4085-00 Enhanced Exploitation of RACF 1.9.2 SDSF Conversion This document describes how to convert existing internal System Display and Search Facility (SDSF) security to new SDSF external security using the SAF interface. The primary audience, therefore, is RACF Security Administrators, RACF System Programmers, and RACF Security Auditors. The information in this manual is compiled from RACF and SDSF manuals as well as code developed to perform the conversion, and should enable customers to convert to the new SDSF security. The SDSF external security was introduced with SDSF Release 3. The appropriated RACF classes are available in RACF Version 1 Release 9. A basic knowledge of RACF, TSO, ISPF/PDF, and MVS is assumed. Some knowledge of SDSF is needed to arrange the security for this product. REXX skills are needed if the programs have to be changed to meet customer requirements. (206 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.28. GX28-8001-02 ESA/390 MVS/ESA Quick Reference Summary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GX28-8001-02 ESA/390 MVS/ESA Quick Reference Summary Quick reference summary of ESA/390 functions and facilities. Applies to MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Releases 2 and 3. For Marketing Reps, Systems Engineers and customers. (22 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. GBOF-5202: Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.1. GG24-3474-00 PSF/VM Release 3.0 Installation and Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3474-00 Advanced Function Printing - PSF/VM Release 3.0 Installation and Usage Guide This manual contains information related to the installation of Print Services Facility/Virtual Machine Version 1 Release 3, Program Product 5664-198 in a VM/SP Release 6 environment. It documents the system- related activities and the PSF installation management file parameters used to drive channel attached IBM 3825 and IBM 3820 Page Printers, and IBM 3812 Page Printers locally attached to a non-SNA controller as well as remotely attached to an SNA controller. The IBM 3812 Page Printer installation is documented in both the RSCS and the new Group 4 feature environments. (96 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.2. GG24-3529-00 ITSC Printing Library Printing PostScript Language ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3529-00 ITSC Printing Library Printing PostScript Language This document describes the Adobe PostScript Language and its implementation within various IBM products and environments. It contains a brief overview of the PostScript Language and provides understanding and usage guidance for some of the IBM products implementing this language. (180 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.3. GG24-3530-00 ITSC Printing Library Document Transforms Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3530-00 ITSC Printing Library Document Transforms Cookbook This manual provides a Cookbook approach to the transformation or conversion of different filetypes found in the various IBM document processing environments. This document does not replace the existing documentation for individual products or transform tools; nor does it replace knowledge and experience with the particular filetypes and tools. It will, however, provide an easy method of determining where to look and what tool may be used to make the appropriate transformation. (440 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.4. GG24-3620-00 RPM Version 3 Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3620-00 RPM Version 3 Implementation Guide This document is intended for systems engineers involved in planning the installation of Remote PrintManager Version 3. It contains a general description of the installation and operation and notes taken from practical experience in the specific environment of a systems laboratory. The installation involved an ES/9000 Model 320 running MVS under PR/SM. The software included PSF/MVS 1.3.0, JES2 3.1.3, ACF/VTAM 3.2, ACF/NCP 4.3, and ACF/SSP 3.5. This edition applies to Remote PrintManager Version 3, Program Number 49F4812. (158 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.5. GG24-3638-00 PSF/VSE Version 2.1 Installation and Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3638-00 PSF/VSE Version 2.1 Installation and Use This document applies to VSE/ESA V1.1 and PSF/VE V2.1 and the printers that it supports. The information comes from experiences installing and using VSE/ESA V1.1 with PSF/VSE V2.1 during a residency conducted at the International Technical Support Organization in Poughkeepsie, New York and from information collected during the PSF/VSE V2.1 Early Install Program run by the Mid-Range Support Center in Roanoke, Texas. It also includes examples for printing on remote systems and using in-line resources. (50 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.6. GG24-3973-00 PSF/2 V1.10 DPF Implementation and Migration Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3973-00 PSF/2 V1.10 DPF Implementation and Migration Guide This document is intended for IBM customer systems programmers and IBM systems engineers involved in migrating from Remote PrintManager Version 3 (RPM V3), part number 49F4812 to Print Services Facility/2, part number 20G0732. It contains contains a general description of the installation and operation, and notes taken from practical experience in the specific environment of a systems laboratory. This information can be used as a supplement to the official publications for people in charge of installing the product for the first time. (260 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.7. GG24-4029-00 AFP Resources in a Multi-System Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4029-00 AFP Resources in a Multi-System Environment This document is intended for customer system programmers and IBM Systems Engineers involved in managing AFP resources in a multi-platform environment. It describes implementation and operation of the AFP environment in the specific environment of a systems laboratory. The information can be used as a supplement to the official publications for people in charge of installing the AFP products for the first time. (256 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. GBOF-5204: Host Systems Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1. GG24-1663-00 OPC/A User Education Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1663-00 Operations Planning and Control/Advanced (OPC/A) User Education Presentation Guide This document contains foil masters plus practical exercises for the OPC/A user Education. (488 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.2. GG24-1726-00 Systems Management Data and Process Model A New Approach ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1726-00 Systems Management Data and Process Model: A New Approach The Systems Management Data and Process Model defines and describes the types of all data and the processes necessary to manage problems and changes in the Information Systems (I/S) business. This bulletin is intended for personnel who implement the Systems Management disciplines, as well as the systems and tools supporting these disciplines in an Information Systems shop. This document should be used as a base for organizing the Systems Management functions and selecting and implementing required tools based on the scope of the data types and the data dependencies presented. (84 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.3. GG24-1733-00 Systems Management Process Model for Managing Problems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1733-00 Systems Management Process Model for Managing Problems and Changes This bulletin is intended for personnel concerned with the implementation of the Systems Management disciplines and the systems and tools supporting these disciplines in an Information Systems shop. The document should be used as a base for organizing Systems Management functions and selecting and implementing tools based on the scope of the data types and the data dependencies presented. This publication is based on IBM's published Information Systems Management (ISM) architecture, and is developed using the Systems Development Method for data and process modelling. (100 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.4. GG24-3142-01 Automated Console Operations for MVS/XA Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3142-01 Automated Console Operations for MVS/XA Systems Use of NetView R2 and ISCF for automation of console operations in an MVS/XA system. Audience is technical personnel. (292 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.5. GG24-3258-00 Generating Generic Alerts Using the NetView GENALERT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3258-00 Generating Generic Alerts Using the NetView GENALERT Command Operation, design and use of the GENALERT command in an automated operations environment. Intended for systems programmers and operations personnel. (52 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.6. GG24-3356-00 3090 ACA for ISCF Prog Offering Program Desc & Operation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3356-00 3090 Automated Console Application for ISCF Program Offering Program Description and Operation This document is intended for those individuals who plan for, install, maintain, and operate the Automated Console Application for ISCF, which is a program offering. It primarily contains information about installation, maintenance, and operation of this program offering. The Automated Console Application for ISCF provides no programming interfaces for customers. (190 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.7. GG24-3410-00 MVS Performance Monitoring with RMF III and NetView Auto ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3410-00 MVS Performance Monitoring with RMF III and NetView Automation This document is intended for system programmers and operations personnel responsible for MVS performance monitoring and for implementing automated console operations for MVS/XA and MVS/ESA. (154 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.8. GG24-3411-00 NetView Release 3 for MVS/XA and MVS/ESA Console Auto ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3411-00 NetView Release 3 for MVS/XA and MVS/ESA Console Automation This document is intended for system programmers and operations personnel responsible for implementing automated console operations for MVS/XA and MVS/ESA systems. It covers the operation and use of the new facilities offered by NetView Release 3 for automated console operations. The first part of the document describes the new facilities provided by NetView Release 3. Examples illustrate the operation and use of these facilities. A section describing various applications, using these new facilities, is included to assist the reader in understanding their use. A chapter is also included on 3090 Automated Console Application for ISCF (3090/ACA/ISCF). (204 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.9. GG24-3450-00 Expert Sys Prototype for ACO Netview R3 KnowledgeTool V2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3450-00 Expert System Prototype for Automated Console Operations Using NetView R3 and KnowledgeTool V2 This document provides system programmers and operations personnel with information on implementing automation procedures for knowledge- intensive operations at the MVS site. The document focuses on the design and implementation of NetView Release 3 command processors written in OS PL/1 Version 2 using the NetView High Level Language Interface HLL and KnowledgeTool Version 2 Release 1. The reader is assumed to be familiar with automation techniques of NetView, the programming language OS PL/1, and have read an introduction to KnowledgeTool Version 2 Release 1. (176 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.10. GG24-3454-00 Second Data Centers and Disaster Recovery Planning ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3454-00 Second Data Centers and Disaster Recovery Planning and Design Considerations This document gives an overview and provides planning information on the design of second data centers for disaster backup. The information in this publication reflects the present functions and capabilities of IBM products. However, future trends and directions were taken into account. This bulletin is for use by management and planning people in the I/S organization. It addresses the recovery problems after a disaster at a prime production data center and provides assistance in tailoring solutions for specific customer environments. (144 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.11. GG24-3475-00 Using Information/Family V4.2 & Integration Facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3475-00 Using Information/Family Version 4.2 and the Integration Facility This document provides guidance in the use of the new functions in Information/Management Version 4 Release 1 and 2, and the Information/ Integration Facility I/IF. The document outlines each of the new functions provided and suggests how best to use them. This document is intended for experienced Information/Management users who may be considering installing Version 4.2 or the I/IF system and intend making use of the new functions and facilities. (124 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.12. GG24-3476-00 Using Information/Family V4.2 Program Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3476-00 Using Information/Family Version 4.2 Application Program Interface This reference manual provides those who write application programs to access Information/Management data base functions with descriptions and examples of programs that use the services of the Information/ Family Application Program Interface. This document can be used as a reference while writing your own applications using the Information/ Family Application Program Interface. The reader should be familiar with the basics and the data model used in problem management, change management and configuration management. (160 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.13. GG24-3478-00 MVS NetView/Access Services: Security and RACF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3478-00 MVS NetView/Access Services: Security and RACF This document briefly introduces NetView Access Services and examines one instance of installation and use. Security auditing considerations are reviewed. A Working example of secondary authentication implementation is presented. RACF is used as the security base in all cases. It end with some hints and tips developed while installing and using NV/AS Release 1.2. Readers should obtain "NetView Access Services: Technical Overview and Installation Planning" (GG66-0292). It provides a substantial overview of all aspects of NV/AS Release 1.0. GG24-3478 relates only to certain aspects of Release 1.2. The reader is assumed to be familiar with basic VTAM, MVS, and RACF terminology. Intended audience: all MVS SE's and customers. (56 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.14. GG24-3480-00 Software Management in an MVS/ESA Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3480-00 Software Management in an MVS/ESA Environment This document is intended to describe the software management tools to MVS/ESA technical personnel such as systems programmers. This document contains: o presentation script suitable for either presenter's use or self-study o presentation foil masters suitable for making overhead transparencies. The accompanying manual, "Software Management in an MVS/ESA Environment Cookbook, GG24-3481" contains script and programming examples, and is intended for self-study. (280 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.15. GG24-3533-00 IMS Automation Using ACO SolutionPac and NetView R3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3533-00 IMS Automation Using ACO SolutionPac and NetView Release 3 This document describes IMS automation extensions that were developed to provide automation to assist with IMS day-to-day operation. These extensions are over and above the automation provided by the IMS Option of ACO SolutionPac. The automation described in this technical bulletin was the basis for the recently announced enhancements to the IMS Option of the ACO SolutionPac. This document is intended for systems designers, system programmers, operations personnel and others involved in planning and implementing automation in an IMS environment. A knowledge of IMS, NetView, REXX and ACO SolutionPac is assumed. (208 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.16. GG24-3588-00 graPHIGS Programming Interface V2 Programming Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3588-00 graPHIGS Programming Interface Version 2 Programming Examples This document is a collection of C and FORTRAN programming examples illustrating many of the extended graphics functions available in the graPHIGS. Programming Interface Version 2.0. Source code is provided in the form of program listings and in "dosread" format on a 3.5 inch high density PS/2 diskette, which allows loading and compilation of the programs on the three supported system platforms.: o IBM 6090 Graphics System o PS/2 (Model 70 and 80) o RISC System/6000 (all POWERstations and POWERservers) This document is intended for experienced graphics programmers who are familiar with the fundamentals of the graPHIGS. Programming Interface Version. (186 pages with diskette) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.17. GG24-3607-00 Automated Operations Control/MVS Announcement Presentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3607-00 Automated Operations Control/MVS Announcement Presentation This publication is intended for people involved in Data Center management and specifically for people dealing with Automated Operations. This document deals with AOC/MVS, a program product which provides automation applications designed to manage MVS/ESA and MVS/XA operating systems. The intention of this document is to provide an overview of the automation facilities and functions included in the AOC/MVS program product. (206 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.18. GG24-3608-00 Target System Control Facility Announcement Presentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3608-00 Target System Control Facility Announcement Presentation This publication is intended for people involved in operations management and specifically for people dealing with distributed or unattended operations. The functions covered in this guide deal primarily with the monitoring, control and automation of system consoles, which are situated either locally or remotely. The publication deals with Target System Control Facility (TSCF), a program product, which replaces three program offerings (ISCF, ISCF/PC, and the 3090/ACA/ISCF, and discusses migration scenarios. This edition applies to the initial release of TSCF. (210 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.19. GG24-3643-00 Target System Control Facility R1 Installation and Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3643-00 Target System Control Facility Release 1 Installation and Use This document provides information on implementing the Target System Control Facility (TSCF) Release 1 on a focal point system and on a PS/2. It helps the reader to install the product in the environment of NetView, ISPF, LU 6.2 and the Communications Manager in OS/2 EE. The document contains sections on configurations, alternate focal-point systems, backup PS/2s and migration from ISCF, ISCF/PC and ISCF/3090/ACA. A planning section helps the user to prepare for a smooth installation. This document is intended for operations management personnel and systems programmers responsible for planning and installing the product. (190 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.20. GG24-3679-00 Remote Operation of VM/ESA & MVS/ESA Guests using TSCF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3679-00 Remote Operation of VM/ESA and MVS/ESA Guests using Target System Control Facility This document provides information on how to use Target System Control Facility, (TSCF), to control a remote system with VM/ESA installed. A configuration where VM/ESA has multiple MVS/ESA V4R2 guest systems is described. The document shows sections on how to define the above configuration to TSCF and how to complete the remote operations software with AOC/MVS and NetView. An overview of the latest developments in MVS consoles and how this impacts remote operations and automation is provided. Examples are included to help users who want to implement such a configuration. This document is intended for operations management personnel and systems programmers responsible for remote operations. (98 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.21. GG24-3712-00 Single-Logon & Secondary Authentication with NV/AS1.3 & RACF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3712-00 Single-Logon and Secondary Authentication with NV/AS 1.3 and RACF This document is the result of a project in the International Technical Support Organization in Poughkeepsie. The project designed and wrote two programs ("exit routines") to implement secondary authentication and single-logon functions. The secondary authentication function is based on NetView Access Services and the single-logon function is based on RACF. (100 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.22. GG24-3796-00 Info/Mgmt V5 Install/Perf Characteristics for MVS/ESA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3796-00 Information/Management Version 5 Installation and Performance Characteristics for MVS/ESA This document describes how to install and use Information/Management Version 5. It is intended for systems engineers and customers who need to know how to install and implement the new functions of this product. The performance characteristics of Version 5 are compared to Version 4 using an IBM internal tool called INFO/PET. (176 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.23. GG24-3829-00 High Availability and Automation Using OPC/ESA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3829-00 High Availability and Automation Using OPC/ESA This publication is intended for system programmers and operational personnel responsible for implementing or maintaining workload automation in XCF-Monoplex or XCF-MultiSystem MVS environments. This volume analyzes several aspects of an OPC/ESA environment, but focuses on the high availability functions provided by the OPC/ESA Hot Standby, the use of XCF, and the integration possibilities with the NetView Automation Platform. The reader is assumed to be familiar with OPC/A operations, AOC/MVS, and the mechanisms used by NetView for automation. (204 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.24. GG24-3854-00 Automation and Console Functions in a Sysplex Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3854-00 Automation and Console Functions in a Sysplex Environment This document describes operations in a sysplex environment. It gives an explanation of the message and command flow in this environment, including extended consoles. It also focuses on the new automation options offered by sysplex and how NetView can be used with these functions, in particular NetView Version 2 Release 3 for MVS/ESA in an MVS/ESA SP Version 4 Release 2.2 environment. Sysplex XCF macros are used to create multi-system awareness for NetView, while the used programs are listed in appendixes. Centralized automation in a sysplex is explored, using NetView Version 2 Release 3. This document is intended for both MVS and automation specialists who are planning for automation in a sysplex environment or are planning to enhance their operations by introducing sysplex. A knowledge of the NetView automation platform and MVS/ESA is assumed. (174 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.25. GG24-3997-00 Network Configuration Application/MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3997-00 Network Configuration Application/MVS This document describes how to install and use Network Configuration Application/MVS (NCA/MVS) with Information/Management Version 5. It is intended for systems engineers and customers who need to know how to install and implement the functions of this product. The procedure for mapping Information/Management Version 5 configuration data into Network Configuration Application/MVS and the process of loading data from NCA/MVS through the load file generator into the Resource Object Data Manager (RODM) is discussed. (268 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. GBOF-5207: Communication Controller Products ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.1. GG24-4012-00 NCP V6R2 Planning and Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4012-00 NCP V6R2 Planning and Implementation Guide This document gives a basic description of the new functions in ACF/NCP Version 6 Release 2, 5688-231. It is intended as a guide for IBM systems engineers and customer personnel planning to utilize these new functions. (326 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. GBOF-5208: Connectivity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1. GG24-1562-05 3745 Communication Controller Guide for x10 & x1A Models ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1562-05 IBM 3745 Communication Controller Guide for x10 and x1A Models This document is an installation guide for use by IBM systems engineers and customer personnel who are installing and IBM 3745 Communication Controller Model 3745-x10 or 3745-x1A for the first time as well as those migrating from an existing 3745 or 372x. It is intended to be a technical reference on installation, customization and testing of an IBM 3745 and related software products. It does not replace standard IBM publications, but should be used in conjunction with them. This edition applies to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller with microcode at Engineering Change Level (#A98113). (436 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2. GG24-1747-01 IBM 3708 Installation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1747-01 IBM 3708 Installation Guide This document is an Installation Guide for the IBM 3708 Network Conversion Unit. This second edition includes the changes up to the current EC level of the 3708. (154 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3. GG24-3353-00 Enhanced MPT & SW Subarea Config & Install Consideration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3353-00 Enhanced Multipoint and Switched Subarea Configuration and Installation Considerations This document describes the switched subarea and enhanced multipoint support, available in VTAM V3 R1.1, VTAM V3 R2, VTAM V3 R1.2 and NCP V4 Subset feature, NCP V4 R2 feature, NCP V4 R3, NCP V4 R3.1, NCP V5 R2 and NCP V5 R2.1. This document is intended for SNA Communication Network Systems Programmers. (112 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4. GG24-3379-01 3745 Communication Controller Gde for Models 130,150,170 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3379-01 IBM 3745 Communication Controller Guide for Models 130, 150, and 170 This document is an installation guide for use by IBM system engineers and customer personnel who are installing and IBM 3745 Communication Controller Model 130, 150 or 170. It is intended to be a technical reference on installation, customization and testing of an IBM 3745 Model 130, 150 or 170 and related software. It does not replace standard IBM publications, but should be used in conjunction with them. (210 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5. GG24-3437-00 System/88 Installation Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3437-00 System/88 Installation Primer This document describes the installation of a System/88 with basic asynchronous (ASYNC) and System Network Architecture (SNA) communications. It is intended to be used by customers and systems engineers as an aid to their System/88 installations and hence is not to be regarded as a document that will address all possible issues. (96 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6. GG24-3495-00 System/88 and Cooperative Processing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3495-00 System/88 and Cooperative Processing This document describes a method of developing applications according to the principle of cooperative processing between System/88 and another system offering APPC communication. It addresses customers and systems engineers responsible for application design. (160 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.7. GG24-3649-01 IBM Network Products Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3649-01 IBM Network Products Implementation Guide The purpose of this guide is to provide information that will help system programmers in the installation and implementation of IBM network products. The publication covers the SNA, OSI, TCP/IP, and LAN environments as well as including examples of some of the techniques they can use for wide area communication, namely IDNX, frame relay, ISDN, and X.25. This document consists mostly of examples taken from a working telecommunications network and should be considered a supplement to existing documentation. (694 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.8. GG24-3703-00 IBM Personal Communications/3270 V2 Implementation Gde ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3703-00 IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 2.0 Implementation Guide This document briefly describes Personal Communications/3270 Version 2.0 in DOS and Windows environments. It provides guidance on customizing it as a network station and as a gateway for a variety of host connection scenarios involving DFT, local area networks (token-ring and Ethernet), 3174 Peer Communication, SDLC, X.25 and asynchronous communication. Definitions for related products, such as IBM ACF/NCP, ACF/VTAM, 3174, LAN Support Program, OS/2 EE V1.3 and PC 3270 EP V3.0, are also provided. Other topics include host-directed printing, file transfer, expanded memory and high memory area considerations. A sample trace interpretation is included to assist users with problem determination. This document is intended for IBM and customer personnel required to install and configure Personal Communications/3270 Version 2.0. It should be used as supplementary material to the product documentation. A working knowledge of DOS is assumed. (380 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9. GG24-3782-00 CID Enabled Products Using NetView DM/2 V2.0 & DM R4 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3782-00 Automated Installation of CID Enabled Products Using NetView DM/2 V2.0 and NetView DM R4 This document describes remote, unattended installation of products that are CID (Configuration/Installation/Distribution) enabled on workstations in a stand-alone LAN or host-connected LAN environment using NetView Distribution Manager/2 Version 2, NetView Distribution Manager Release 4 and Software Profile Management Facility. It attempts to cover the the planning and the steps required for the total CID process from a CID and LAN administrator's point of view. The book presents practical scenarios for CID enabled and also for non-CID enabled products mainly dealing with automated installation, maintenance and upgrade of remote OS/2 systems from a centrally located preparation site. These scenarios are presented in a cookbook fashion to guide the reader through the various concepts and steps. This document is written for technical support personnel of software installation on workstations in a LAN. Knowledge of CID enabled products and a basic understanding of NetView DM/2 and NetView DM will be useful to the reader. (554 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.10. GG24-3929-00 Install & Plan Guide for Programmable Network Access 1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3929-00 Installation and Planning Guide for Programmable Network Access 1.2 This document is intended as a step by step installation guide for use by IBM System Representatives and IBM customers. A knowledge of IBM Systems Network Architecture, telecommunications networking, IBM Personal System/2 and Operating System/2 is assumed. (178 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11. GG24-4033-00 8250 Intelligent Hub & IBM Hub Management Program/6000 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4033-00 IBM 8250 Intelligent Hub and IBM Hub Management Program/6000 This document provides detailed information about the Installation and configuration of the IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub and all all its modules. It also provides detailed information about how to manage networks based on the IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub, using in-band and out-of-band management functions provided by the IBM 8250 management modules and the the IBM AIX NetView Hub Management Program/6000. To provide the users with the necessary background information, introductions to Ethernet, FDDI, LAN Bridging standards, and TCP/IP have also been included in this document. This document was written for network managers, network architects and system engineers who need to implement token-ring, Ethernet and/or FDDI networks which incorporate the IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub and the AIX Netview Hub Management Program/6000. Some knowledge of networking architectures and protocols is assumed. (404 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.12. GG24-4064-00 The IBM 6611 Network Processor as an IP Router ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4064-00 The IBM 6611 Network Processor as an IP Router This document describes the operation of the IBM 6611 Network Processor as an IP router. It provides a full description of the IP routing protocols supported by the IBM 6611 Network Processor, and explains the design considerations for their use. Example configurations are provided to show operation of the 6611 Network Processor with the RIP, OSPF, EGP and BGP routing protocols. (228 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.13. GG24-4066-00 VTAM V3R4.2 AnyNet/MVS Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4066-00 VTAM V3R4.2 AnyNet/MVS Implementation This document describes the first implementation of the Multiprotocol Transport Networking (MPTN) Architecture. It includes APPC over TCP/IP (MVS/ESA and OS/2) and Sockets over SNA (MVS/ESA and OS/2). They are shipped in the AnyNet/MVS feature of VTAM Version 3 Release 4.2 for MVS/ESA. This feature was announced as the MPTF feature and later renamed as AnyNet/MVS. This document provides working configurations, definitions and test results. It guides the readers in the planning, methodology, installation and implementation of their first MPTN network. It is intended for systems engineers, network managers, application designers and technical support personnel who are interested in the implementations of the IBM MPTN architecture. A basic working knowledge of SNA, TCP/IP and MPTN is assumed. However, this document also provides a brief introduction to both TCP/IP and MPTN. (252 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.14. GG24-4090-00 Developing DCE Application for AIX and OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4090-00 Developing DCE Application for AIX and OS/2 This document describes the application programming interfaces (APIs) provided by the Open Software Foundation (OSF) Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) services. It gives programming guidelines to programmers and application developers who need to develop distributed applications using DCE services. The DCE Remote Procedure Call (RPC) and DCE Threads APIs are discussed. The document is intended to assist IBM system engineers and customers in designing, writing, compiling, linking and running distributed applications on AIX and OS/2 operating systems. Working knowledge of DCE administration and C C language programming on AIX and OS/2 is assumed. A companion diskette is shipped with this document and includes the source code and makefiles for all the examples shown in this document. (276 pages with one 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.15. GG24-4169-00 IBM Connectivity Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4169-00 IBM Connectivity Guide This document was written for customers, IBM field system engineers, and IBM sales representatives working on projects involving connectivity either between IBM systems or IBM systems and systems manufactured by other equipment manufacturers (OEMs). It contains matrices and listings that document the compatibility and functions of various IBM communication-related software and hardware products. This document has not been subjected to any formal review. The compatibilities of the combinations are stated to the best of our knowledge. It is the responsibility of IBM system engineers and marketing representatives to thoroughly investigate the compatibility of IBM products using announcement letters, the sales manual, HONE tools and other sources for each specific situation. This document is not intended to replace standard IBM publications, but should be used in conjunction with them. (128 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.16. GX28-8002-03 Network Products Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GX28-8002-03 Network Products Reference This booklet contains matrices and listings that document the compatibility and function of various IBM communications related software and hardware products, such as VTAM, NCP, NetView, PS/2 software, 3745, 6611, modems, and protocol converters. It is intended to provide a concise reference for hardware and software planning. This document does not replace standard IBM publications, but should be used in conjunction with them. This is the fourth edition. (44 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. GBOF-5209: Network Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.1. GG24-3260-00 Central Control and Monitoring of 9370 Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3260-00 Central Control and Monitoring of 9370 Systems This publication describes how NetView Release 2 running on a network of automated VM/SP systems can be used as a vehicle for the centralized accumulation and presentation of network status. It also describes how the instances of NetView within the network can themselves be monitored. (188 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.2. GG24-3387-00 X.25 NPSI Network Management Using Netview Release 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3387-00 X.25 NPSI Network Management Using Netview Release 3 This document is intended for network management personnel of installations where X.25 NPSI is installed. It will also be valuable for NetView specialists who wish to evaluate and see an example of how NetView functions can be utilized to meet specific needs. (232 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3. GG24-3414-00 Change Mgmt & Data Dist Using Netview Dm & FBSS/RCMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3414-00 Change Management and Data Distribution Using Netview DM and FBSS/RCMS This document describes the purpose and benefits of the Remote Change Management Services (RCMS) component of the IBM Financial Branch System Services (DBSS) Version 2.1.1, and the IBM NetView Distribution Manager (DM) Program. It is intended to assist in planning, installation and use of these products in a banking environment. (118 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.4. GG24-3431-00 Network Availability Monitoring Usinf NetView R3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3431-00 Applied Automation: Network Availability Monitoring Using NetView R3 This document describes how to build a communication mechanism among multiple NetView domains exchanging status information of the critical resources. It is intended for system programmers and operations personnel responsible for implementing automated operations for MVS/XA. (144 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.5. GG24-3545-00 973X (IDNX) Events in a NetView Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3545-00 973X (IDNX) Events in a NetView Environment This document provides examples of host NetView user coding techniques and host reporting techniques. It is intended for personnel having a need for information related to the marketing and acceptance of 973X (IDNX) in a communications environment. (254 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.6. GG24-3586-00 Managing LU 6.2 Nodes Using NetView MS Transport ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3586-00 Managing LU 6.2 Nodes Using NetView MS Transport The purpose of this document is to provide guidelines and examples of how to use the NetView management services (MS) transport API to manage remote NetView and non-NetView systems. In this book, a non-NetView system refers to any IBM or non-IBM computer that supports the LU 6.2 protocol. An approach to implement a basic MS transport on a non-NetView system is described. Some examples and considerations about how to exploit the MS support provided by Networking Services/2 are also included. The reader is assumed to have some APPC knowledge, as well as, to be familiar with writing HLL command processors under NetView. (268 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.7. GG24-3606-00 Exper RISC System/6000 AIX Using NetView, HCF & NV DM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3606-00 Experiences Managing RISC System/6000 AIX Using NetView, HCF and NetView DM This purpose of this document is to provide material for IBM systems engineers, IBM marketing representatives, and IBM customers to evaluate techniques for involving RISC System/6000 in network management-oriented activities. (124 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.8. GG24-3635-00 NetView V2R1 Graphic Monitor Facility Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3635-00 NetView V2R1 Graphic Monitor Facility Implementation This document describes the NetView Graphic Monitor Facility of NetView Version 2 Release 1. It is intended for technical managers who need an overview of GMF, and for system programmers and network operators who are going to install and use it. (186 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.9. GG24-3657-00 TNM Alerts in a NetView Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3657-00 Transmission Network Manager (TNM) Alerts in a NetView Environment This document gives examples of how events occurring in a network of IBM 973Xs (also called IDNX or Integrated Digital Network Exchanges) can be collected by the IBM Transmission Network Manager (TNM) and forwarded to a NetView host for processing. This document is intended for systems engineers and systems programmers who need to implement NetView-based 973X network management applications. (174 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.10. GG24-3700-00 Experiences in Using AIX NetView Service Point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3700-00 Experiences in Using AIX NetView Service Point This document describes uses of the AIX NetView Service Point, Version 1. It provides basic examples of implementing the AIX NetView Service Point on a RISC System/6000. This document is intended for personnel who need information related to the marketing and acceptance of the IBM RISC System/6000 AIX systems in a communications environment. A general knowledge of overall IBM and customer computing systems is assumed. This edition applies to Version 1.0 of the AIX NetView Service Point licensed program (Program Number 5621-107), which runs under Version 3.1 of the AIX operating system and NetView, Program Number 5665-362 for use with the MVS/ESA Operating System. (234 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.11. GG24-3701-00 Examples of Using the NetView XITCI and XITCO Exits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3701-00 Examples of Using the NetView XITCI and XITCO Exits This document describes uses of the NetView XITCI and XITCO exits and, also provides examples of using the XITCI and XITCO exits on an MVS/XA or MVS/ESA operating system. This document is intended for personnel who have a need for information related to the installation and use of the NetView XITCI and XITCO exits. A general knowledge of overall IBM and customer computing systems is assumed. (132 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.12. GG24-3734-00 Using the Information/System-NetView Bridge Adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3734-00 Using the Information/System-NetView Bridge Adapter This document describes how to install and use the Information/System- NetView Bridge Adapter. It is intended for system programmers and application programmers who need to know how to make the Information/System-NetView Bridge Adapter operational. Knowledge about Information/System, NetView customization, and NetView CLISTs is required. (252 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.13. GG24-3737-00 NetView V2R2 Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3737-00 NetView V2R2 Primer This document contains planning information and implementation hints for NetView Version 2 Release 2. The main subjects covered are: o installation and customization o LU 6.2 communication services o system and network automation enhancements o extended scope of network operations. The document is intended primarily for system analysts who are planning, implementing and maintaining automated system and network operations both in a single system environment and a distributed systems environment. Knowledge of the concepts and components of previous NetView releases is assumed. (280 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.14. GG24-3804-00 Overview and Examples of Using AIX NetView/6000 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3804-00 Overview and Examples of Using AIX NetView/6000 This document describes uses of AIX NetView/6000, Version 1. It provides basic examples of implementing AIX NetView/6000 on a RISC System/6000. This document is intended for persons requiring information regarding processing network management information in TCP/IP and SNA environments involving RISC System/6000 and sending/receiving information from IBM's NetView. A general knowledge of overall IBM and customer computing systems is assumed. Although some installation experiences are provided via this document, the primary purpose of this document is not installation-oriented. Installations implementing AIX NetView/6000 should rely upon the document AIX NetView/6000 Administration Reference (SC31-6196) for installation information. (274 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.15. GG24-3956-00 Overview of IBM NetView RODM and Data Models ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3956-00 Overview of IBM NetView Resource Object Data Manager (RODM) and Data Models This document provides an overview of IBM NetView Resource Object Data Manager (RODM) and how to implement a data model for RODM's use. It will describe RODM data model and functions, how to implement a data model, and overview of the GMF Host Subsystem data model. This document focuses on the data models. It does not include writing methods and applications which would be necessary for your process to utilize the data model. This document is intended for system engineers and customers who need a general understanding of IBM NetView Resource Object Data Manager (RODM) and the use of data models. Basic knowledge of object-oriented technology and previous NetView releases components is assumed. (94 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.16. GG24-3999-00 System and Network Management in Distributed Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3999-00 System and Network Management in Distributed Environments This document provides information on the following topics: o In the name of rightsizing, can I move my systems and network management functions out of the "glasshouse"? o Topics discussed include management protocols, functions required, capacity issues, and Reliability/Availability/Serviceability characteristics. o "In my distributed environment, which management functions should I be looking for -- and which IBM products can provide these functions? " Distribution of software and data management (backup, etc.) are discussed in other IBM publications and are not included in this document. (184 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.17. GG24-4067-00 Managing Non-SNA Resources Using NetView GMFHS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4067-00 Managing Non-SNA Resources Using NetView GMFHS This document describes the new component of NetView V2R3 called Graphic Monitor Facility Host Subsystem (GMFHS). Included is a description of how to implement management of non-SNA resources from a central site NetView, using LAN Network Manager V1.1, and AIX SystemView NetView/6000 as service point applications. The experiences documented in this publication is intended for network planners and system programmers who will be responsible for similar projects or will be evaluating the value of and the efforts required to manage non-SNA resources from a single point of control. Some knowledge of Resource Object Data Manager (RODM), OS/2, and NetView customization will be helpful, but is not required. (254 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.18. GG24-4145-00 Experiences Using NetView Pipelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4145-00 Experiences Using NetView Pipelines This document describes NetView Pipelines. It starts with a short introduction, showing the functions of and the message flow through the NetView pipelines. It also describes the advantages of using NetView Pipelines. It contains a chapter of step-by-step instructions for the first-time user. Also included is a section on theory where important considerations for effective use of NetView Pipelines are described in detail. We describe how the correlation problem with &WAIT or TRAP can be solved and finally describe how to write pseudo stages. Furthermore, the document contains several very usable command lists. Examples of how to use them as well as their output are also included. This document is intended for experienced operators, systems programmers and people involved in automation projects using NetView. A knowledge of NetView and REXX is assumed. (158 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. GBOF-5210: Enterprise Networking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1. GG24-4223-00 Introduction to Performance in Router Networks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4223-00 Introduction to Performance in Router Networks This document discusses the performance characteristics of routers in general. It addresses the problems of understanding router performance and positioning of routers in both SNA and non-SNA networks by defining the terminology and evaluating the real network performance characteristics of internetworks. This document was written by a team of computer scientists and engineers within the IBM Network Routing Systems Performance department. Each chapter was written by an expert in the field. This document is intended for planners, marketers, support personnel and other interested individuals with a need to know about the performance of routers. (84 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. GBOF-5211: Voice Enablers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.1. GG24-3844-00 IBM 1Q/92 CallPath Product Announcements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3844-00 IBM 1Q/92 CallPath Product Announcements This document mainly describes the new CallPath Products. Also, it will focus on the positioning of these new CallPath products versus the old CallPath products. The new CallPath products include CallPath CallCoordinator CICS/MVS, CallPath CallCoordinator/2 and CallPath SwitchServer/2. This document is intended for account systems engineers, voice specialist systems engineers and sales representatives who need to know about the new IBM Voice Offerings in the IBM CallPath family and the positioning of each of these products. A knowledge of basic CallPath product features is assumed. (118 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. GBOF-5212: Personal Systems - Multimedia ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.1. GG24-3653-01 IBM Personal System/2 Multimedia Fundamentals ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3653-01 IBM Personal System/2 Multimedia Fundamentals This document describes multimedia concepts. It provides an overview of IBM's multimedia offerings in software, as well as the hardware to successfully install, author and run multimedia products. It also describes some interesting facilities and solutions in the multimedia arena that are available on the OEM market. This document is intended for IBM customers and system engineers who need to know more about integrating video images and audio in a computing environment. A knowledge of basic computer concepts is assumed. (264 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.2. GG24-3672-00 IBM PS/2 Programming Multimedia under Windows 3.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3672-00 IBM Personal System/2 Programming Multimedia under Windows 3.0: An Object-Oriented Approach This document describes programming samples for the Multimedia Development Kit under Windows 3.0. It provides samples using C++/Views in an object-oriented approach. (70 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.3. GG24-3749-00 Multimedia Appl Enablers & the PS/2 Ultimedia Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3749-00 Multimedia Application Enablers and the IBM PS/2 Ultimedia Systems The objective of this document is to describe the hardware and software components that make up a typical multimedia computer system. It provides information on the IBM PS/2 Ultimedia Model M57 SLC, additional adapters that can be installed on the system, and the application enabling software included as demos on the CD-ROM. The document also provides an overview of some of the standards developed for multimedia audio, video, and graphic objects. This document is intended for IBM customers and system engineers who need to know the 57SLC and its associated software products. A basic understanding of OS/2, DOS, and Windows operating systems as well as multimedia fundamentals is assumed. (250 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.4. GG24-3795-00 Digital Audio Fundamentals, Adapter, and Device Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3795-00 Digital Audio Fundamentals, the M-Audio Adapter, and the Audio Device Driver This document describes digital audio fundamentals and their application to computing systems. It provides a review of the mathematical and technical basics required when working with audio signals and the digitizing process. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers, dealers, and customers who need to know the concepts behind and terminology used in the digital audio industry. A knowledge of basic computer concepts is assumed. The hardcopy version of this document includes presentation foils to be used as educational material. (472 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.5. GG24-3947-00 Multimedia in a Network Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3947-00 Multimedia in a Network Environment The objective of this document is to describe the multimedia capabilities of a networked environment. It provides information on the current network environments, and discusses what the requirements will be for networks of the future, to run multimedia applications. It also provides an overview of some multimedia standards as they relate to the network environment. This document is intended for IBM customers and system engineers who need to plan multimedia networks. Considerations for future growth are provided. A knowledge of multimedia and networking fundamentals is assumed. (357 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.6. GG24-3963-00 MMPM/2 Programming Using Digital Audio Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3963-00 Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 Programming Using Digital Audio Examples This document describes how to use C programs with calls to MMPM/2 to program applications that access digital audio (.wav) and MIDI (.mid) files, and that use the multimedia CUA extensions provided by MMPM/2. It provides the reader with working programs to get them started programming using the MMPM/2 media control interface, secondary windows, graphical push buttons, and circular sliders. This document is intended for application developers who need to know how to use the Application Programming Interface (API) supported by the MMPM Toolkit/2. A knowledge of digital audio fundamentals and basic C programming is assumed. (176 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.7. GG24-3975-00 Multimedia Presentation Techniques and Technology ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3975-00 Multimedia Presentation Techniques and Technology This document describes the various methods and materials of multimedia, the multimedia hardware used on computer systems, and the processes to implement multimedia. This document is intended for people new to multimedia looking for an introduction to the technology required to enable "media" on computers as well as the techniques used to create multimedia applications and presentations. A knowledge of basic computer concepts is assumed. (64 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. GBOF-5214: Retail ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1. GG24-3498-01 IBM 4680 Operating System Remote Operator Feature R2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3498-01 IBM 4680 Operating System Remote Operator Feature Release 2 This document serves as an aid for systems engineers starting with the IBM 4680 Remote Operator Feature as well as an introduction to the product for sales activities. It document contains three parts: o Installation and User's Guide o Installation and Operating Considerations o Interface to Host VTAM Application (232 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.2. GG24-3567-00 IBM Store System Networks: Products and Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3567-00 IBM Store System Networks: Products and Functions This document describes the communication products that are available within the Store Systems product line and how communications are used in a network environment. It is intended for SEs familiar with retail requirements and procedures. (348 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.3. GG24-3623-00 IBM 4680 SNA LU 6.2 Communications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3623-00 IBM 4680 SNA LU 6.2 Communications This document describes implementation and/or the migration to LU 6.2 communications function contained in the IBM 4680 Operating System Version 3 Release 1 product. It provides configuration and application program interface descriptions, samples and technical hints for the installation of LU 6.2 in the following environments: o IBM 4680 connected to another IBM 4680 o IBM 4680 connected to an IBM PS/2 using OS/2 o IBM 4680 connected to an IBM 370 System o IBM 4680 connected to an IBM AS/400 o IBM 4680 connected to an IBM 6150 RT o IBM 4680 connected to an IBM RS6000 (354 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.4. GG24-3748-00 IBM 4680/OS on the IBM 4684 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3748-00 IBM 4680/OS on the IBM 4684 The 4680 Operating System Version 4 on the 4684 Store Controller provides new functions and allows for the installation of the IBM 4680 Applications. This document describes the installation of the 4680 Operating System Version 4 on the 4684. It provides guidelines on how to perform this installation, based on our experiences. This document is intended for SEs, IBM Partners and customer personnel who are to perform 4680 Store System installations. A knowledge of the IBM 4680 Store System product line is assumed. (284 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.5. GG24-3759-00 4684, RIPSS V4.0 and RIPSS/2 V1.0 Tech Guide & Sample Progam ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3759-00 IBM 4684, RIPSS V4.0 and RIPSS/2 V1.0 Technical Guide and Sample Programs This document describes the IBM Retail Industry Programming Support Services (RIPSS) family of products and describes possible ways to use the &R. application programming interface for application development. It provides some hints and examples to get started, gives guidelines for easier use of the various function calls, as well as some useful utilities for program development. The information in this document is intended for IBM system engineers, customers, and third-party software houses who are responsible for proposing, designing, programming, or implementing retail applications for the IBM 4684 with RIPSS V4.0 and back office applications with RIPSS/2 V1.0. Some knowledge of the 4684 Point of Sale Terminal, PC DOS, RIPSS V4.0, OS/2, and RIPSS/2 V1.0 functions is a prerequisite and assumed. (330 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.6. GG24-3953-00 4680 X.25 Appl Programming Interface PRPQ 5799-PWN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3953-00 IBM 4680 X.25 Application Programming Interface PRPQ 5799-PWN The IBM 4680 Operating System Version 4 supports communications on X.25 networks. However, in the past, communications programs using the X.25 network have had to use SNA Communications Services; they have not been able to use the X.25 protocol. Users wishing to use an X.25 network with the X.25 protocol can now do so by installing the IBM 4680 X.25 Application Programming Interface PRPQ (5799-PWN) on the IBM 4680 Operating System. This document describes the facilities provided by the IBM 4680 X.25 API PRPQ feature and is intended to help SEs, programmers, business partners and customers install, configure and use the feature. Knowledge of the IBM 4680 Store System is assumed. (252 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.7. GG24-3961-00 IBM 4680 Dependent SNA via Token-Ring PRPQ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3961-00 IBM 4680 Dependent SNA via Token-Ring PRPQ This document describes the IBM 4680 Dependent SNA via Token-Ring PRPQ, Program Number 5799-PWK, of the IBM 4680 Operating System. This PRPQ provides support of LU0, LU1, LU2 and LU3 over a token-ring network for 4680 controllers using the IBM 4680 OS Version 4. This document is intended for programmers and IBM SEs who need to know how to install and use the Dependent SNA via Token-Ring PRPQ and what parameters to select when doing the communications definitions of the controller configuration. A knowledge of the configuration process for the IBM 4680 OS and of tasks related to this process is assumed. Therefore, the main subject of this document is the discussion of the configuration parameters for token-ring communications as they are relevant for the PRPQ. (50 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.8. GG24-4060-00 Electronic Marketing in the 4680 Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4060-00 Electronic Marketing in the 4680 Environment This document describes the IBM 4680 Supermarket Electronic Marketing PRPQ, a base refresh, Program Number 5799-PNH. This PRPQ provides the automatic promotional coupons; new reports beyond the original release; and the issuing redeeming, and tracking of customer points (just to name a few of the functions). This document is intended for IBM system engineers, Partners' system engineers as well as customers who will implement this application, and explains the hardware and software requirements to perform the installation. The installation and configuration of this PRPQ are also discussed and followed by the implementation of some functions. The setup of electronic coupons and operation are also included in this document. Knowledge of IBM Store Systems product and IBM Supermarket Application are assumed. (70 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.9. GG24-4093-00 POS Drivers under OS/2 Technical Guide & Sample Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4093-00 Point of Sale Drivers under OS/2 Technical Guide and Sample Programs This document describes the Point of Sale Subsystem/2 (POSS/2), and describes possible ways to use the POSS/2 application programming interface for application development. It provides some hints and examples to get started, gives guidelines for easier use of the various function calls for program development. The information in this document is intended for IBM system engineers, customers and third-party software houses who are responsible for proposing, designing, programming or implementing retail applications for the IBM 4684 or 4694 under OS/2. Some knowledge of the 4684 or 4694 Point of Sale Terminals and OS/2 is a prerequisite and assumed. (194 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. GBOF-5216: AIX Computer Graphics Series and User Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.1. GG24-3382-02 IBM AIXWindows Programming Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3382-02 IBM AIXWindows Programming Guide This publication is a beginner's guide to X Window System programming in X Windows X11.4. The programming interfaces to X Windows, as available in IBM AIXwindows Environment, enable a programmer to develop applications with advanced user interface tools based on windows to display information and retrieve user input on bitmapped displays, with network transparency. These applications will run without changes on the IBM RISC System/6000 under the IBM AIX Operating System Version 3.2. There are several X toolkits available. The one we consider here is the X Toolkit, also referred to as the Xt toolkit, which can be used with various widget sets. The first edition of this publication considered the Athena widget set, which is still provided as an example (in source code form) with IBM AIXwindows Environment. The second edition covered the primary widget set provided with IBM AIXwindows Environment, OSF/Motif. This edition has been updated to cover X Window System X11.4 with OSF/Motif on AIX Version 3.2. The original samples from the second edition of this document have been ported to X Window System X11.4 for illustration purposes. It is not this book's intent to give an overview of differences in X Window System X11.3 and X Window System X11.4. It will however point out differences as they affect the sample programs used in the publication. The publication will help you create a comfortable working environment to practice programming with X Windows, at both the Xlib and the X Toolkit levels. It is not intended as a complete reference but as a way of getting started from the most basic concepts to an intermediate degree of expertise, in a world that offers you powerful tools for the presentation side of your applications. (366 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.2. GG24-3813-00 AIXwindows Environment/6000 Version 1.2 2D Base Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3813-00 AIXwindows Environment/6000 Version 1.2 2D Base Features This document describes the changes from AIXwindows Environment/6000 Version 1.1 to AIXwindows Environment/6000 Version 1.2 for the 2D Base components. It provides helpful information on how to migrate to AIXwindows Version 1.2, but does not cover AIXwindows 3D Feature components such as GL, graPHIGS, or PEX. There are hints and tips for customization of AIXwindows, installing samples and configuring xdm (X Display Manager). (158 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.3. GG24-3836-00 3D Computer Graphics Concepts - An Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3836-00 3D Computer Graphics Concepts - An Overview This publication will introduce the reader to computer graphics terminology and general concepts. It will cover all important aspects of computer graphics, so that the reader when having read this book has a basic understanding of the most common terms and concepts of computer graphics. This also enables the reader to study more complex books of computer graphics in case more detailed information is required. Since Computer Graphics depends very much on visual explanations this book contains many pictures that help clarify complex concepts and algorithms. (104 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. GBOF-5222: AS/400 Systems, Application Development and Performance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.1. GG24-3249-01 System/36 to AS/400 System Migration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3249-01 System/36 to AS/400 System Migration This document is intended to give the reader an understanding of the migration, from System/36 to the AS/400 system, of those items required for the operation of the system and the running of application programs. It does not discuss migration of application programs themselves. Application and office migration are covered in other publications. A working knowledge of System/36 and a basic knowledge of System/38 or the AS/400 system are assumed. (124 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.2. GG24-3250-01 System/36 to AS/400 Application Migration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3250-01 System/36 to AS/400 Application Migration This document describes the migration of application programs from System/36 to the System/36 environment on the AS/400 system. System-related migration and office migration are covered in other publications. This document is intended for systems engineers, business partners and programmers involved in System/36 application migration. A thorough knowledge of S/36 application programming and a basic knowledge of AS/400 programming are assumed. (158 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.3. GG24-3251-00 IBM S/38 Application Migration to AS/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3251-00 IBM S/38 Application Migration to AS/400 This document provides a general introduction of S/38 migration to AS/400. Information on S/38 Environment and on how to configure the system are provided as well. It is intended for SE's and migration supervisors. (46 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.4. GG24-3304-01 Converting System/36 Environment Applications to ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3304-01 Converting System/36 Environment Applications to Native AS/400 This document is intended for AS/400 users, planners or managers who plan to convert a S/36 Environment application to native AS/400. Readers should be familiar with RPG, COBOL, OCL and SFGR and the S/360 environment and AS/400 data base. (232 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.5. GG24-3321-03 SQL/400: A Guide for Implementation OS/400 V2 R 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3321-03 Structured Query Language/400: A Guide for Implementation OS/400 Version 2 Release 2.0 This document is intended for experienced AS/400 programmers, analysts, and implementers who are responsible for the creation and maintenance of application programs on the AS/400 system. It assumes the reader has an appreciation of programming in RPG/400, COBOL/400, C/400, FORTRAN/400 or PL/I as available on the AS/400 system at Version 2 Release 2 Modification Level 0, and understands the AS/400 system database, the design and creation of physical and logical files, and how to design, create and maintain high-level language programs. This document has two main purposes. First, it compares and contrasts the alternative query interfaces available on the AS/400 system. Secondly, it intends to give the reader an understanding of SQL/400, and provide guidelines and examples for implementation in an application programming environment. It covers areas associated with application development with SQL/400. (358 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.6. GG24-3438-00 Writing SAA Applications for AS/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3438-00 Writing SAA Applications for AS/400 This document describes design and programming techniques that can be used to implement Systems Application Architecture applications on the Application System/400 today. As Systems Application Architecture (hereafter referred to as SAA) application goals vary between organizations, both SAA and non-SAA programming practices are discussed as well as the merits of using each. This document illustrates programming methods that can be used to conform to the SAA Common User Access (CUA). This document is intended for business partners, customers and IBM systems engineering representatives who need to know how to develop or advise others how to develop SAA applications on the AS/400 system. The purpose of this document is to assist with the development of SAA applications, as this is a new area for many. A knowledge of either RPG/400 or COBOL/400, as well as CL programming and DDS definition is assumed. (310 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.7. GG24-3632-00 AD/Cycle Implementation for AS/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3632-00 AD/Cycle Implementation for AS/400 This document describes application development on the Application System/400 (AS/400) using available Application Development/Cycle (AD/Cycle) products. It introduces the products and the interfaces between the products and highlights experiences with these products and interfaces. This document is intended for business partners, customers, and IBM systems engineering representatives who need to know how to develop or advise others how to develop AS/400 applications using the AD/Cycle products. While it is beneficial to read this document without prior knowledge of AD/Cycle or any of the products used, full benefit can only be achieved with a base understanding of AD/Cycle concepts, Application Development Workbench (ADW), Excelerator/IS, Synon, EASEL for OS/2 Extended Edition, Workstation Interactive Test Tool (WITT), and Cross System Product (CSP). (232 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.8. GG24-3723-01 AS/400 Performance Management Version 2 Release 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3723-01 AS/400 Performance Management Version 2 Release 2 This document describes a methodology for performance management on IBM AS/400. It includes setting up performance objectives, collecting and reviewing performance data, tuning of resources, and capacity planning. Performance guidelines and application design tips are also provided. The Version 2 Release 2 Performance Tools (5738-PT1) reports and the Advisor function are the primary tools used for performance management. Other performance evaluating tools are also discussed. This document is intended mainly for IBM system engineers and IBM business partners who want to implement a performance management structure on an AS/400 customer system, but may also be useful to IBM customers. (322 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.9. GG24-3806-00 Application Development on the AS/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3806-00 Application Development on the AS/400 The purpose of this document is to help customers learn how to improve their Application Development environment, including the use of AD/Cycle products. This includes both the concept and the tools. It also includes tools from vendors, who are not members of the IBM International Alliance for AD/Cycle, but which we think are useful and related to AD/Cycle. This document is intended for o IBM Marketing o Customer Development Department o Third Party Development Department o Consultants who need to know about AD/Cycle. Knowledge of AS/400 is assumed. No knowledge of AD/Cycle is assumed. (130 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.10. GG24-3908-00 AS/400 Performance Capacity Planning V2R2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3908-00 AS/400 Performance Capacity Planning V2R2 This document describes the OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 capacity planning tool - "BEST/1 for the AS/400," provided with the Performance Tools/400 Licensed Program 5738-PT1. It provides an introduction to the fundamentals of the tool and explains how to effectively use it, including step-by-step examples. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers and other computer professionals including business partners and customers who need to know how to use the tool. A working knowledge of AS/400 Work Management and the AS/400 Performance Tools/400 licensed program is assumed. (204 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.11. GG24-3928-00 AD/Cycle CODE/400, App Dev Mgr/400 & App Serv/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3928-00 AD/Cycle CoOperative Development Environment/400 - AD/Cycle Application Development Manager/400 and Application Services/400 The purpose of this document is to provide guidelines for the implementation of the products: AD/Cycle CoOperative Development Environment/400, AD/Cycle Application Development Manager/400 and Application Dictionary Services/400, in an AS/400 development environment. The document details our experiences with using these products to develop and maintain existing applications on the AS/400. The document is intended for business partners, customers, and IBM system engineering representatives who implement, administer, or develop applications on the AS/400. The document is also applicable to those who are considering a commitment to new development tools and/or strategies but are not using any of the above products. (92 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.12. GG24-4006-00 Mainframe CICS to CICS/400 V2R2 Migration Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4006-00 Mainframe CICS to CICS/400 V2R2 Migration Cookbook This publication describes application migration consideration to CICS/400 Version 2 Release 2 (program number 5738-DFH) from the mainframe CICS platforms such as MVS or VSE. It provides an introduction to the fundamentals of the product, facilities and restrictions concerning application migration, as well as guidance for coding in COBOL/400 for CICS on an AS/400. This publication is intended for IBM systems engineers and other computer professionals, including business partners and customers, who need to know how to migrate an application from an enterprise systems CICS platform to CICS/400 V2R2. Basic mainframe CICS and AS/400 knowledge is assumed. (172 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.13. GG24-4028-00 IBM AS/400 Printing III ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4028-00 IBM AS/400 Printing III This document describes printing functions and products as they relate to AS/400 Version 2.0 Release 3.0. It provides information on available AS/400 printing functions by way of examples, programming samples and diagrams. This document is intended for customers, business partners, and IBM systems engineers who need to know how to develop or advise others concerning the design or development of AS/400 printing applications. This document is not intended to replace the existing AS/400 printing publications such as IBM AS/400 Printing II, GG24-3704, or AS/400 Guide to Programming for Printing, SC41-8194. Knowledge of the AS/400 system and its printing functions in general is assumed. (396 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.14. GG24-4030-00 Performance Benchmarking for the AS/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4030-00 Performance Benchmarking for the AS/400 This document is intended to give an overview of existing public standard and non-standard benchmarks. Furthermore, it provides guidelines for organizing and running a customized benchmark on the IBM Application System/400 (AS/400) and systems serving similar purposes. Key objectives of this publication are: o Show and explain benchmark types o Give reasons for public benchmarks or custom benchmarks o List considerations for development of good benchmarks o Explain tools and services available for evaluation of performance benchmarks This document is intended for use by IBM system engineers (SEs), business partners, IBM customers, and anyone with a need to compare the performance of two or more computer configurations. It is assumed that readers have already found a need for benchmarking either in connection with the AS/400, a predecessor, or another system. (106 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. GBOF-5223: AS/400 PC Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.1. GG24-3207-00 System/36 Token-Ring Attachment in an IWS Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3207-00 System/36 Token-Ring Attachment in an Intelligent Workstation Environment This bulletin is intended to provide a fast path for anyone who needs to plan and install System/36 Token-Ring LAN attachment in an IWS environment. (139 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.2. GG24-3519-00 Co-existence of AS/400 PC Support w/ IBM PC LAN Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3519-00 Co-existence of AS/400 PC Support with IBM PC LAN Programs The purpose of this document is to provide an overview of the co-existence of the IBM Local Area Network products running under DOS or OS/2, with the AS/400 PC Support product in a token-ring network environment. It contains tips and technical topics regarding the implementation of IBM LAN licensed program products. However, this document is not intended to cover these products in detail. This edition applies to Release 3.0 of AS/400 PC Support (Program Number 5728-PC1) and to all subsequent releases until otherwise indicated in new editions or technical bulletins. (264 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.3. GG24-3636-00 PC Support/400 Implementation and Performance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3636-00 PC Support/400 Implementation and Performance The purpose of this document is to explain the implementation of PC Support/400 and to give advice on tuning the AS/400 system and PWSs to improve performance. The document also give advice on interpreting the Performance Tools reports in relation to PC Support/400. The document is written for Version 1 Release 3 of PC Support/400 but there is information regarding the Performance Tools that relates to Version 2 Release 1 of PC Support/400. For optimum comprehension, the reader should have a thorough knowledge of PC Support/400. A good working knowledge of AS/400 system performance tuning is assumed. This document covers PC Support/400 running in single-byte character set (SCBS) environment. It does not describe double-byte (DBCS) support, which applies to traditional Chinese, Korean and Japanese national language versions. (182 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.4. GG24-3808-00 PC Support/400 Asynchronous and SDLC Configuration Ex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3808-00 PC Support/400 Asynchronous and SDLC Configuration Examples The purpose of this document is to provide guidelines for planning and implementing IBM AS/400 PC Support (Version 2 Release 1.1) in the DOS environment using synchronous data link control (SDLC) and asynchronous (ASYNC) connections with various types of modems. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the basic functions of AS/400, OS/400, AS/400 PC Support, Communications and DOS. This document is intended for: o Persons responsible for planning and installing PC Support under DOS through SDLC and ASYNC connections. o Systems Engineers (IBM and vendors) providing technical support to customers. (202 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.5. GG24-3856-00 Using DOS PC Support/400 in OS/2 V2 Virtual DOS Machine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3856-00 Using DOS PC Support/400 in OS/2 Version 2 Virtual DOS Machines This document describes how to use DOS PC Support/400 routers in a Virtual DOS Machine under Operating System/2 Version 2, and contrasts this environment with running OS/2 PC Support/400 under OS/2 Version 2 with Extended Services. It compares several environments, gives advice on supported and/or preferred environments and configuration details. It does not cover OS/2 Version 2 in detail nor configuration of OS/2 Extended Services. This document is intended for customers, business partners and IBM system specialists. Some knowledge of OS/2 Version 2 and a good working knowledge of PC Support/400 is assumed. (102 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.6. GG24-3877-00 Cooperative Processing and GUI in an AS/400 Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3877-00 Cooperative Processing and Graphical User Interfaces in an AS/400 Environment The purpose of this document is to show how graphical user interfaces and cooperative processing are implemented between IBM AS/400 systems and IBM PS/2s connected via any of the available methods. Examples are given showing the development of the graphical user interface and describing different approaches to cooperative processing using various application programming interfaces (APIs). This document is intended for AS/400 and PS/2 software developers. Some experience with personal computers is assumed. Although not mandatory, some experience with the C programming language will be useful. The examples in the document and on the two 3.5 inch diskettes that come with the document run in one of the following personal system environments: o IBM Operating System/2 Version 2 or Version 1 Release 3 o Windows 3.0 and higher running with DOS 5.0 (340 pages, with two 3.5 inch diskettes) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.7. GG24-4013-00 DOS PCS/400 with Novell NetWare 3.11 & NetWare SAA 1.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4013-00 Using DOS PC Support/400 with Novell NetWare 3.11 and NetWare for SAA 1.3 This document describes using DOS PC Support/400 with Novell NetWare 3.11 and NetWare for SAA 1.3. The document is aimed primarily at users of the Extended DOS version of PC Support/400 although information on the Basic DOS version is provided when appropriate. This document does not does not cover Novell NetWare 4.0 or OS/2 PC Support/400. It provides advice and guidance for deciding how to run coexistence between NetWare and PC Support/400 clients, looking at two main options: direct connect and gateway connect using NetWare for SAA 1.3. Configuration examples are provided for token-ring and Ethernet users. This document is intended for customers, IBM systems engineers, NetWare resellers and IBM business partners. Some knowledge of PC Support/400 and NetWare is assumed. (194 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.8. GG24-4027-00 AS/400 Client Series Products and Positioning ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4027-00 AS/400 Client Series Products and Positioning This document describes the AS/400 Client Series products, giving the reader a flavor of each of the products. It places special emphasis on ENVY/400, a product based on object oriented programming, which is new to most AS/400 users. It also positions the nine products of the AS/400 Client Series relative to each other. Some simple examples are given to help describe some of the functions. This document is intended for readers who are considering using the AS/400 in a client-server environment. A knowledge of Personal Computer software (OS/2 and MS-Windows), PC Support/400 and database access on the AS/400 is assumed. (190 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.9. GG24-4094-00 ENVY Hints and Tips - Online Guide to ENVY/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4094-00 ENVY Hints and Tips - Online Guide to ENVY/400 Terminology and Functions This document provides an application (on diskette) which presents hints and tips for using ENVY/400. ENVY/400 is an object-oriented development tool on the AS/400 platform - the application included in this book was written using ENVY/400. The application presents information to help you understand the terminology and functions of ENVY/400 and also give you advice and guidance about how to perform certain functions. The application is written to run in both OS/2 and Microsoft Windows environments and can be run on a stand-alone PS/2. (96 pages, with two 3.5 inch diskettes) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. GBOF-5224: AS/400 Office and Advanced Technology ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.1. GG24-3268-00 AS/400 Office in a DIA/SNADS Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3268-00 AS/400 Office in a DIA/SNADS Network This document offers information and examples about the implementation of Distribution Services and Library Services on the AS/400 and the definitions required for communications on the AS/400 Office. Various types of communication were evaluated. The functions of the required administration steps and the usage of the AS/400 Office functions are also included. The bulletin is primarily for Systems Engineers and System Administrators. The reader should have an S/38 background and a good understanding of S/36 Office. (184 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.2. GG24-3579-00 OV/400 & AS/400 Query Applications in a Multilingual Env ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3579-00 OV/400 and AS/400 Query Applications in a Multilingual Environment This document contains information about how to use and implement OV/400 and AS/400 Query applications in a multilingual environment. (92 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.3. GG24-3625-00 OfficeVision/400 in a DIA/SNADS Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3625-00 OfficeVision/400 in a DIA/SNADS Network This document describes the implementation of Distribution Services and Library Services with OfficeVision/400. It provides examples of required definitions for communications on the AS/400. This document is intended for System Administrators who need to know how to set up DIA/SNADS environment on the AS/400. A knowledge of OS/400 is assumed. (250 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.4. GG24-3697-00 OfficeVision/400 Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3697-00 OfficeVision/400 Printing This document describes printing in an AS/400 office environment. It is intended to help AS/400 system engineers and customers to manage OfficeVision/400 printing. It contains information about native AS/400 and ASCII printers appropriate for use with OfficeVision/400. This document also discusses several methods for attaching ASCII printers to AS/400 systems via 3197/3477 displays, the ASCII workstation controller, DOS PC Support, and the OS/2 Communications Manager 5250 Work Station Feature. It also explains virtual printing and how to create and revise printer function tables. Techniques are also given for including images and graphics within OV/400 documents by using Advanced Function Printing with OfficeVision/400. (242 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.5. GG24-3743-00 Multimedia Examples with the AS/400 Using AVC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3743-00 Multimedia Examples with the AS/400 Using Audio Visual Connection (AVC) This document is intended for SEs, customers, and IBM's business partners who would like to use multimedia, specifically IBM Audio Visual Connection (AVC) under OS/2, with the AS/400. Introductory material gives an overview of multimedia and AVC and shows what added benefits an AS/400 will bring to the multimedia environment. The manual also provides examples, tips, and techniques to assist in implementing multimedia applications running on the AS/400 and the PS/2 using PC Support/400. Some knowledge of the AS/400 is required and knowledge of AVC is recommended. (130 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.6. GG24-3793-00 Artificial Intelligence and the AS/400: NN and KBS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3793-00 Artificial Intelligence and the AS/400: Neural Networks and Knowledge-Based Systems This document is intended as a practical introduction to artificial intelligence and those products available to the AS/400 customer. It introduces KnowledgeTool/400, the Neural Network Utility and The Integrated Reasoning Shell, and provides information to assist a prospective implementer of such systems in choosing the most appropriate tool to solve the business problem. It is intended for persons who may be interested in using such tools to solve business problems, primarily in an AS/400 environment. (162 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.7. GG24-3868-00 OfficeVision/400 Application Enabler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3868-00 OfficeVision/400 Application Enabler This document describes the concepts and configurations of the OfficeVision/400 Application Enabler which allows other office applications such as editors and spreadsheets to be used from the document handling interfaces of OfficeVision/400. This document is intended for experienced office administrators and systems engineers who need to implement the integration of office applications with OfficeVision/400. A knowledge of OfficeVision/400, the applications which are to be integrated, programming in CL and RPG is assumed. (100 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.8. GG24-3885-00 OfficeVision/400 Application Programming Interfaces V2R2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3885-00 OfficeVision/400 Application Programming Interfaces Version 2 Release 2 This document describes the OfficeVision/400 Application Programming Interfaces (APIs). It provides a description of each OV/400 command, API and exit program when used in any application written in a high-level language or Control Language (CL), and examples of how to use them in a business application environment. This document is intended for programmers who need to know how to integrate OV/400 with their applications. A knowledge of OS/400, OV/400, CL and an HLL is assumed. (358 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.9. GG24-3896-00 OV/400 Integration with CallPath/400 & Fax Support/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3896-00 OfficeVision/400 Integration with CallPath/400 and Facsimile Support/400 This document describes the integration of CallPath/400 and Facsimile Support/400. It provides sample programs and examples of how to perform this integration. This document is intended for experienced office administrators and systems engineers who need to implement the integration of the above mentioned applications with OfficeVision/400. (132 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.10. GG24-3937-00 OfficeVision/400 Version 2 Technical Tips and Techniques ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3937-00 OfficeVision/400 Version 2 Technical Tips and Techniques This document is intended to provide technical tips and techniques for commonly-used OfficeVision/400 functions. This publication addresses functions available through Version 2 Release 2. Some of the tips and techniques that are described will only work if Version 2 Release 2 is installed. This document is intended for OfficeVision/400 users and administrators, and for AS/400 system operators. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with OfficeVision/400 and the AS/400. This document is not intended to teach you how to use OfficeVision/400, but to enhance your OfficeVision/400 knowledge. (106 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.11. GG24-4020-00 Ultimedia Video Delivery System/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4020-00 Ultimedia Video Delivery System/400 This document describes the Ultimedia Video Delivery System/400 PRPQ. It provides an overview of the product, hints on installing the software, information on how to use the application programming interfaces and sample scenarios. This document is intended for IBM system engineers, customers and IBM's business partners who would like to control a video network using the AS/400 system and add video to their applications. (160 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.12. GG24-4050-00 Current-OV-400 Workgroup Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4050-00 Current-OV-400 Workgroup Program This document describes the Current-OV/400 Workgroup Program. It provides an overview of the product, its installation and customization and it focuses on its use as a graphical user interface to OfficeVision/400. This document is intended for systems engineers and business partners who need to know how to set up intelligent workstations with Current-OV/400 as their front end to OfficeVision/400. A knowledge of OfficeVision/400, PC Support/400 and Windows is assumed. (149 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.13. GG24-4072-00 OfficeVision/400 Application Enabler V2R3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4072-00 OfficeVision/400 Application Enabler Version 2 Release 3 This document describes the concepts and configurations of the OfficeVision/400 Application Enabler which allows other office applications, such as editors and spreadsheets, to be used from the document handling and mail interfaces of OfficeVision/400. This document is intended for experienced Office administrators, programmers and systems engineers who need to implement the integration of office applications with OfficeVision/400. A knowledge of OfficeVision/400, the applications which are to be integrated and programming in CL and RPG is assumed. (212 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. GBOF-5225: AS/400 Communications and Systems Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.1. GG24-3253-00 IBM AS/400 Communication Migration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3253-00 IBM AS/400 Communication Migration This document is intended to provide a fast path for anyone who needs to plan and install IBM AS/400 in a peer communication environment. It provides information on the following topics: o Migration Concept and Support o Migration of Configurations o Migration of Applications o Migration Tips and Hints Also included in the appendixes are listings about configurations, procedures, programs, IDDU, and DDS specifications. (214 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.2. GG24-3288-00 S/3/X and AS/400 APPN Nodes Using the SNA/LEN Subarea ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3288-00 S/3/X and AS/400 APPN Nodes Using the SNA/LEN Subarea Network The purpose of this document is to describe the incorporation of an S/370 SNA subarea into a network comprising APPN network nodes. It is intended for system programmers and system engineers in the intermediate systems and VTAM/NCP areas. (182 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.3. GG24-3289-00 Mgmt of AS/400 in SNA Subarea Network Using NetView Product ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3289-00 Management of AS/400 in SNA Subarea Network Using NetView Products This document will be helpful to System/370 professionals, system programmers and systems engineers responsible for designing and implementing network management of AS/400 systems attached to a SNA subarea network. (238 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.4. GG24-3305-00 IBM AS/400 Communications Problem Determination ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3305-00 IBM AS/400 Communications Problem Determination This document describes the facilities and tools available on AS/400 to perform communications problem isolation/determination. Intended audience: IBM SE's and customers implementing or operating communications on AS/400. (176 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.5. GG24-3336-00 AS/400 - S/370 Connectivity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3336-00 AS/400 - S/370 Connectivity This document describes the connectivity options available when the AS/400 is connected to a S/370 host. The S/36 and S/38 currently have many of these functions, therefore we have included the migration aspects relevant when moving from a S/36 or S/38 to an AS/400 in a S/370 environment. This document will be helpful to AS/400 and S/370 systems engineers who have to set up connections and run applications between an AS/400 and S/370 host. (248 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.6. GG24-3420-00 AS/400, S/38 and PS/2 as T2.1 Nodes in a Subarea Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3420-00 AS/400, S/38 and PS/2 as T2.1 Nodes in a Subarea Network This document contains information on the implementation of Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) in a network consisting of an AS/400, System/38, PS/2 and an S/370 SNA subarea network. This document should be treated as a supplement to the standard IBM reference publications. (368 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.7. GG24-3442-01 IBM AS/400 TCP/IP Configuration and Operation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3442-01 IBM AS/400 TCP/IP Configuration and Operation This document describes the Transmission Control/Internet Protocol for AS/400 Licensed Program. It is intended for customers who need to configure and use the program product without having special AS/400 TCP/IP skill, and it provides additional considerations for those who want to get to know the program product in more detail. A knowledge of the basic operation of the AS/400 system is assumed. (230 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.8. GG24-3447-00 IBM AS/400 in Large Networks: A Case Study ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3447-00 IBM AS/400 in Large Networks: A Case Study This document presents scenarios involving the IBM AS/400 system in large networks. It evaluates the feasibility of implementing those scenarios by indicating possible limitations and suggesting solutions to problems that arise. This document is intended for IBM communication specialists and network implementers. Advanced knowledge of Systems Network Architecture and network management is assumed. (186 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.9. GG24-3449-00 AS/400 Communication Definitions Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3449-00 AS/400 Communication Definitions Examples This document includes consistent definition examples which will help the professionals to incorporate AS/400 in communication networks. It is intended for communication professionals who are in charge of defining connections between AS/400's and systems like System/370, System/36 and System/38, Personal System/2 and terminal controllers. (440 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.10. GG24-3479-00 IBM AS/400 Object Dist Facility & SNA RSCS/PROFS Bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3479-00 IBM AS/400 Object Distribution Facility and SNA RSCS/PROFS Bridge This document is intended to provide IBM systems engineers and network specialists with the necessary information for guiding, planning, configuring, implementing and running AS/400 Objective Distribution Facility and SNA RSCS/PROFS Bridge. (328 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.11. GG24-3517-00 IBM AS/400 ISDN Connectivity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3517-00 IBM AS/400 ISDN Connectivity This document describes the implementation of ISDN support on the AS/400 system and discusses the hardware and software required for connecting the AS/400 system to an ISDN. (194 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.12. GG24-3614-01 Managing Multiple AS/400's in a Peer Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3614-01 Managing Multiple AS/400's in a Peer Network This document describes the tasks required to manage multiple AS/400 systems in a networked environment with an AS/400 acting as the management focal point. It provides descriptions and practical examples of the tasks required and the tools available in this area. The tools are those provided through the announcement of V2R2 of OS/400. The document is intended for AS/400 technical analysts who need to understand multiple systems management and to control APPN networks. Technical knowledge of managing a single AS/400, and basic AS/400 communications is assumed. This document is not a substitute for any AS/400 system manual. It does not repeat detailed information available in the system manuals. Use these system manuals if you need more detailed information. (340 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.13. GG24-3639-00 AS/400 Audit and Security Enhancements in OS/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Release 3 GG24-3639-00 AS/400 Audit and Security Enhancements in OS/400 Release 3 OS/400 Release 3.0 introduces new security and audit features and enhancements to existing security functions. This book discusses the new and enhanced security and audit features available in Release 3.0 and is intended to complement existing publications. Using this book in conjunction with AS/400 AS/400 Security and Auditing Considerations Release 2 should provide a thorough understanding of OS/400 security and audit facilities. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers who advise on aspects of AS/400 customers needing to implement sound security practices, and those auditing such installations. (122 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.14. GG24-3704-00 IBM AS/400 Printing II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3704-00 IBM AS/400 Printing II This document describes the printing functions and products of AS/400 Version 2 Release 1. It provides the information of available AS/400 printing functions by way of examples, programming samples and their actual printouts. This document is intended for customers, business partners and IBM systems engineers who need to know how to develop or advise others for design or development of AS/400 printing applications. This document is not intended to replace the existing AS/400 printing manuals such as a "Guide to Programming for Printing, SC41-8194.". Knowledge of AS/400 system and its printing functions in general is assumed. (370 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.15. GG24-3717-00 AS/400 APPN with PS/2 APPN, 3174 APPN, 5394 & Subarea ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3717-00 AS/400 APPN with PS/2 APPN, 3174 APPN, 5394 and Subarea Networking This document describes the concepts, configurations and flows between Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network nodes, Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) end nodes and Low-Entry Networking (LEN) nodes. It provides a number of scenarios with these nodes interacting both through and independently of a subarea network. It also provides discussion of the most recent implementations of APPN and T2.1, for AS/400, PS/2, 3174, 5394 and VTAM 3.4. This document is intended for use by IBM system engineers, system planners and network administrators who are involved in designing APPN networks within a single corporation or between different corporations. A basic knowledge of networking concepts and terminology is assumed. (332 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.16. GG24-3719-00 Centralized Security Administration in AS/400 Peer Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3719-00 Centralized Security Administration in AS/400 Peer Network This document discusses security administration in a AS/400 peer network. It provides a general discussion about how to administer security tasks from a central point within the network, and describes tools that are available to manage these tasks. This document is intended for people responsible for the security policy within a company, and for the security officer and security administrator that have to carry out the security tasks. A knowledge of security on a single AS/400 system is assumed. (94 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.17. GG24-3722-00 AS/400 CPI Communications Selected Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3722-00 AS/400 CPI Communications Selected Topics This document describes the IBM OS/400 Common Programming Interface Communications (CPI Communications) support. It provides tips and hints on how to design, program, and test CPI-Communications applications effectively. A knowledge of OS/400 programming and concepts is assumed. The information herein is restricted to RPG programming. It should, however, be easy to apply the information to other SAA programming languages available on OS/400. It is intended for programmers who intend to write CPI-Communications applications. (90 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.18. GG24-3758-00 Getting Started with AS/400 OSI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3758-00 Getting Started with AS/400 OSI This document provides a cookbook-style configuration guide to: o OSI Communications Subsystem/400 o OSI Message Services/400 o OSI File Services/400 It is intended for IBM technical support personnel and customers performing OSI configuration on the AS/400, in a simple OSI network, without having prior knowledge of OSI. A knowledge of the AS/400 is assumed. (238 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.19. GG24-3763-00 AS/400 Communications Definitions Examples - Volume 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3763-00 AS/400 Communications Definitions Examples - Volume 2 This document is the second volume in a series of AS/400 Communications Definitions Examples. It is addressed to communication professionals in charge of defining connections between AS/400s and systems such as System/390, System/36 and System/38, Personal System/2 and terminal controllers. The document includes definitions examples which will help the professionals to incorporate AS/400 in both local area networks (LANs) and wide area networks (WANs). This document complements, but does not replace, AS/400 Communications Definitions Examples, GG24-3449. You will need both volumes for a complete set of definitions examples. (698 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.20. GG24-3797-00 Facsimile Support/400 Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3797-00 Facsimile Support/400 Implementation This document describes Facsimile Support/400. It provides guidance on the implementation and use of Facsimile Support/400. This document is intended for customers who need to know how they can utilize Facsimile Support/400 in their applications. A knowledge of the AS/400, RPG/400 and PC Support/400 is assumed. (170 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.21. GG24-3828-00 5494 & OS/2 ES: Connecting Remote Users Groups to AS/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3828-00 5494 and OS/2 Extended Services: Connecting Remote User Groups to AS/400s This document describes using the IBM 5494 remote control unit, and OS/2 Extended Services, as different means for connecting remote work groups to an IBM AS/400 system. Connection to different Systems in an Advanced Peer to Peer Networking (APPN) Network is also covered. It provides tips and hints on how to install, configure and operate these products. Sample working configurations are provided for different environments. This document is intended for IBM customers, IBM Systems Engineers and IBM Business Partners who need to understand the capabilities of the IBM 5494, or need to install the IBM 5494 or OS/2 Extended Services. It is also a handy quick reference manual for the IBM 5494 functions. (242 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.22. GG24-3912-00 AS/400 System Availability and Recovery for V2R2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3912-00 AS/400 System Availability and Recovery for V2R2 The purpose of this document is to describe enhancements made to AS/400 system availability and recovery under OS/400 V2R2. This document is intended for customers, IBM system engineers, IBM Business partners and consultants who want to understand new enhancements, specially, the Auxiliary Storage Pool Management, Save While Active function and Device Parity Protection. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with dedicated service tool, disk management, work management, control language (CL), and the save restore commands on the AS/400. (182 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.23. GG24-3918-00 AS/400 Network Routing Facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3918-00 AS/400 Network Routing Facility This document describes the support in Operating System/400 Version 2 Release 2 for Network Routing Facility Version 1 Releases 5, 6 and 7. It allows 3270 terminal users to sign-on to an AS/400 through an NCP which is resident in a communications controller, as though they were using 5250 devices. This document is intended for customers and systems engineers who will be responsible for the planning and implementation of this type of network. A knowledge of AS/400 communications and SNA networking is assumed. (132 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.24. GG24-3919-00 AS/400 SNA Pass-Through Communications Definitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3919-00 AS/400 SNA Pass-Through Communications Definitions and Examples This document describes the concepts and configurations of the SNA Pass-Through Facility, including definitions and examples. It provides various scenarios which shows how 327x emulation or terminal, retail or finance device, can pass through one or more AS/400 systems and access primary applications on a System/370 or System/390 host computer. This document is intended for use by IBM customers, IBM systems engineers, system planners and network administrators who are involved in designing and installing AS/400 SNA Pass-Through facility. A basic knowledge of SNA VTAM/NCP communications, APPN, OS/2, DOS, NS/2, FBSS, LANDP, IBM 4680 and AS/400 is assumed. (196 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.25. GG24-4039-00 AS/400 and RISC System/6000 Connectivity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4039-00 AS/400 and RISC System/6000 Connectivity This document has two main subjects. One of them is the comparison of connectivity options between AS/400 and RISC System/6000. The three major options discussed in this document are pure TCP/IP, using AIX AS/400 Connection Program/6000 V2 over TCP/IP, and using the same product over SNA. The option of AIX Viaduct for AS/400 is also mentioned. It is intended to provide the guidelines that a system administrator could use when selecting connectivity options between the two systems. The other main subject is for programmers and system administrators to provide planning, installation, configuration and use information for TCP/IP, SNA, and AIX AS/400 Connection Program/6000 V2. Among other options, AIX AS/400 Connection Program/6000 V2 is heavily discussed in this part especially for remote printing and NLS. A general knowledge of AS/400, RISC System/6000, and TCP/IP and SNA communications is assumed. (188 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.26. GG24-4092-00 The IBM AS/400 as a TCP/IP Network File Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4092-00 The IBM AS/400 as a TCP/IP Network File Server This document describes TCP/IP File Server Support/400, which is a Network File System (NFS) server for an AS/400 in a TCP/IP network. TCP/IP File Server Support/400 provides access for NFS clients to the AS/400 document library objects, database and source files. This document contains installation and customization scenarios for IBM and multivendor client systems to the AS/400 TCP/IP File Server Support/400. There are specific scenarios for RISC System/6000, OS/2, DOS, SUN and DEC VMS clients. It also details tips and techniques specifically for the AS/400 user and administrator. This document was written for the AS/400 system administrator and the network coordinator of a multivendor TCP/IP network. Some knowledge of TCP/IP and the AS/400 is assumed. (232 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. GBOF-6300: Personal Systems Hardware ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27.1. GG24-3463-00 Using Realtime Interface Co-Processor & Extended Service ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3463-00 Using the IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor and Extended Services This document describes how to create user-written tasks using the IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor hardware and the RIC Extended Services software. Besides an overview of hardware and software, the document mainly describes the sample programs. This document is designed as reference material for teachers and students of the IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Extended Services course. (149 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27.2. GG24-3477-01 Micro Channel Architecture Bus Master Release 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3477-01 Micro Channel Architecture Bus Master Release 1.1 This bulletin offers an overview and information for potential manufacturers of Micro Channel Architecture Bus Master Adapters on hardware and software design. A bus master card is intended to serve as an intelligent interface between IBM Micro Channel and the "outside" world that makes use of the channel to its full extent. This bulletin is primarily intended for Other Equipment Manufacturers (OEM). (84 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27.3. GG24-3584-00 A Plain Man's View of the IBM Micro Channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3584-00 A Plain Man's View of the IBM Micro Channel This publication is a systems engineering technical paper for the purpose of assisting the reader in understanding the wider issues relating to interconnection of IBM products. (136 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27.4. GG24-3616-00 PS/2 Models 95 XP 486, 90 XP 486, 55 LS & P75 486 Fund ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3616-00 Personal System/2 Models 95 XP 486, 90 XP 486, 55 LS and P75 486 Fundamentals This document offers information on the PS/2 products announced in the fourth quarter of 1990. The following systems are covered: o IBM Model 90 XP 486 o IBM Model 95 XP 486 o IBM Model 55 SX LS o IBM Model 75 486 In addition, new features and options are discussed. New Personal Systems/2 based on the Intel i486 are elaborated, as well as an installation scenario for the Model 55 LS system. The contents of this document are designed as reference material for IBM customers and IBM systems engineers. (200 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27.5. GG24-3671-00 IBM PS/2 Advanced Server Planning Guide Version 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3671-00 IBM Personal System/2 Advanced Server Planning Guide Version 1.0 The objective of this document is to describe a precise and clear understanding of the hardware and software used in a server environment. It provides information on IBM PS/2 8590 and 8595 systems and the DASD options that can be configured to optimize a customers' server requirements. The document also provides an overview of IBM's software offerings in the server environment. It also outlines the capability of a workstation to access both an IBM LAN server and a Novell NetWare server concurrently. This document is intended for IBM customers and system engineers who need to know the PS/2 server environment as well as capabilities of the software offerings. A basic knowledge of IBM Personal System/2, DOS, and OS/2 operating systems, as well as LAN concepts, is assumed. (180 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27.6. GG24-3927-00 Advanced PS/2 Servers Planning and Selection Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3927-00 Advanced PS/2 Servers Planning and Selection Guide This document provides an overview of the range of PS/2 server hardware and software from IBM, a general discussion of server requirements and design considerations, and an analysis and relative positioning of PS/2 servers. It also describes in detail the advanced PS/2 database and file servers (including the PS/2 Server 295 and the PS/2 Model 95 XP 486 50MHz); and the advanced PS/2 disk subsystems (including the 3514 High Availability External Disk Array and the 3515 High-Performance Disk Subsystem). This document is intended for IBM customers, dealers, systems engineers, and consultants who need to know the capabilities of the IBM PS/2 server range. A basic knowledge of IBM PS/2, DOS, OS/2 and LAN concepts is assumed. (198 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27.7. GG24-4002-00 IBM PS/2 and PS/ValuePoint Subsystems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4002-00 IBM PS/2 and PS/ValuePoint Subsystems This document describes various hardware subsystems of the IBM PS/2 and PS/ValuePoint product range. It explains the SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) standard and the implementation of SCSI in PS/2 computers as well as the IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) standard and the IDE implementation in PS/ValuePoint computers. The video subsystems XGA (Extended Graphics Adapter) and XGA-2 as found in PS/2s and the SVGA implementations of the PS/ValuePoint systems are described. In addition, this document gives an overview on security standards and security features as implemented in some PS/2 models. This document is intended for IBM customers and systems engineers who need an understanding of the various hardware subsystems found in PS/2 and PS/ValuePoint systems. (172 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. GBOF-6301: OS/2 V1.X ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.1. GG24-3267-00 PC LAN Prog 1.3: A Gde to Install & Use in Working Env ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3267-00 IBM PC LAN Program 1.3: A Guide to Installation and Use in a Working Environment This document explains how to install and use IBM PC LAN Program V1.30 in a working LAN Environment. Because the emphasis is on practical advice, the bulletin also covers installation of applications under PCLP 1.3. A complete set of practical exercises is included in the appendix. (214 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.2. GG24-3370-00 IBM OS/2 Standard Edition Kernel & Presentation Mgr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3370-00 IBM Operating System/2 Standard Edition Kernel and Presentation Manager This document describes the architecture and capabilities of the IBM Operating System/2 Standard Edition. Both the kernel functions and the Presentation Manager user interface are discussed. It also gives some design hints for OS/2 application developers using Presentation Manager. The content of this volume can be used as course material for instructors and students of an OS/2 Standard Edition class. A recommended course schedule and layout for a 5-day class covering this material is described in Appendix A. Note: This material is based on Version 1.1 of IBM OS/2 Standard Edition. (274 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.3. GG24-3422-00 OS/2 Presentation Manager Application Design Release 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3422-00 OS/2 Presentation Manager Application Design Release 1.0 This bulletin describes how to write well-structured applications for OS/2 Version 1.2 Presentation Manager based on proven software engineering techniques. The bulletin also introduces some common routines which ease the development process of CUA-confirming PM applications and lead to better maintainable programs. (202 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.4. GG24-3467-00 OS/2 1.2 Dialog Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3467-00 OS/2 1.2 Dialog Manager This bulletin provides a comprehensive introduction to programming the OS/2 1.2 Dialog Manager. It is provided as handout material in the "OS/2 Standard Edition 1.2" workshop and can also be used as a self-study guide. This document is intended for IBM Systems Engineers and programmers who are familiar with the OS/2 environment but new to Dialog Manager programming. (188 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.5. GG24-3557-00 IBM OS/2 EE V 1.2 Cookbook: DB Services & Query Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3557-00 IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 Cookbook: Database Services and Query Manager This document covers the IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 Database Manager. Other documents in this series provide detailed coverage of the Remote Data Services and User Profile Management facilities. It is intended for IBM Marketing Representatives and Systems Engineers who are responsible for proposing, designing, implementing or maintaining IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 based applications, and for system developers and users of these systems. (246 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.6. GG24-3558-00 IBM OS/2 EE V 1.2 Cookbook: DB Mgr - Remote Data Service ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3558-00 IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 Cookbook: Database Manager - Remote Data Services This document covers the IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 Database Manager Remote Data Services (RDS) facilities. It is intended for IBM marketing representatives and system engineers who are responsible for proposing, designing, implementing or maintaining IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 based applications, and for system developers and users of these systems. (240 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.7. GG24-3559-00 IBM OS/2 EE V 1.2 Cookbook: DM Mgr - User Profile Mgmt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3559-00 IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 Cookbook: Database Manager - User Profile Management (Data Access Control) This document covers the IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 Database Manager User Profile Management (UPM) facilities. It also covers Database security, authorization and maintenance. It is intended for IBM marketing representatives and system engineers who are responsible for proposing, designing, implementing or maintaining IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 based applications, and for system developers and users of these systems. (122 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.8. GG24-3630-00 OS/2 Version 1.3 Volume 1: New Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3630-00 OS/2 Version 1.3 Volume 1: New Features This document describes the new features of OS/2 Version 1.3 including the Extended Edition. The purpose of this is to explain and exploit the most important enhancements. It is not a programmer's guide nor can it replace the standard reference manuals of OS/2. The contents of this bulletin can be used as course reference material for instructors and students of an OS/2 class. Also, the picture segments of the original Presentation Manager screens might be useful for developing additional material. (266 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28.9. GG24-3631-00 OS/2 Version 1.3 Volume 2: Print Subsystem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3631-00 OS/2 Version 1.3 Volume 2: Print Subsystem This document discusses the entire Print Subsystem under OS/2. A sample PM application is provided for programmers who need to include print functions in their own applications. This document is meant to support the administrators and programmers who use OS/2 in a local, LAN, or host-connected environment. It should also help planners and designers to define their system requirements properly. (452 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. GBOF-6302: Personal Systems Software & Application Development ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.1. GG24-3456-00 IBM CUA 1989 Evaluation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3456-00 IBM CUA 1989 Evaluation This document describes the main features and functions of Common User Access as described in the "SAA Common User Access Advanced Interface Design Guide" and compares it to CUA 1989 as described in the SAA Common User Access Panel Design and User Interaction." It is not intended to be a complete reference for CUA 1989; it is rather meant to be a high-level overview of the Entry Model, the Graphical Model and its Workplace Environment and Text subset. It also describes the main features and controls of the PWS Graphical model. This document is intended for IBM system engineers, marketing representatives and customers who fulfill the following prerequisites: o have a basic understanding of the concept of Systems Application Architecture o have an understanding of CUA 1987. (74 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.2. GG24-3580-01 Developing a CUA Workplace Application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3580-01 Developing a CUA Workplace Application This document explains the requirements for developing an application that conforms to the Common User Access standards for the (CUA) workplace environment. It describes the process for designing such applications and provides two examples o a car dealer service application, which shows how the process works for larger, "line of business" applications o a ToDo application, which provides a more detailed design, including alternative interfaces and setting views. The design makes makes extensive use of direct manipulation for the user's interaction with the application. This document is intended for IBM System Engineers and customers who need to understand how to design advanced applications. Knowledge of the CUA 1991 guidelines and OOPS is assumed. (152 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.3. GG24-3612-00 IBM DOS 5.0 Windows Connection 2.0 PC/3270 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3612-00 IBM DOS 5.0 Windows Connection 2.0 Personal Communications/3270 2.0 This document provides an overview of the installation and functions of IBM DOS 5.0 Microsoft Windows 3.0, IBM Windows Connection 2.0 and IBM PC/3270 Version 2.0 for Windows. This document is intended for IBM workstation specialists, Systems Engineers and those supporting IBM authorized dealers and Customer Information Center functions. (242 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.4. GG24-3641-01 A Practical Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3641-01 A Practical Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming This bulletin provides a practical introduction to object-oriented (OO) programming. It supplies OO terms and definitions, and it explains OO principles through exercises using the Smalltalk/V language. A sample application is also included which contains useful advice on how to implement commonly needed application behavior. This document is intended for systems engineers, designers and developers. It is assumed that they have access to a licensed copy of the Digitalk Smalltalk/V PM Version 1.3 product. (236 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.5. GG24-3673-00 IBM SAA Delivery Manager Vol 1: Functions & Positioning ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3673-00 IBM SAA Delivery Manager Volume 1: Functions and Positioning This document describes Systems Application Architecture Delivery Manager (SAA D/M). It provides an overview of its functional capabilities and positioning relative to NetView Distribution Manager (NDM). This document is intended for customer personnel and IBM systems engineers who need to know how to implement the product in their own environments. A knowledge of OS/2 Extended Edition (OS/2 EE) is assumed. (218 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.6. GG24-3752-00 SAA Delivery Mgr Vol 2: Dist of DOS & OS/2 Op Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3752-00 IBM SAA Delivery Manager Volume 2: Distribution of DOS and OS/2 Operating Systems This document describes SAA Delivery Manager and LAN Download utility. It provides practical tips on using these products to install and maintain OS/2 and DOS centrally. This document is intended for PWS specialists who need to know how to install and maintain PWS operating systems using a mainframe delivery mechanism. A knowledge of SAA Application Connection Services, SAA Delivery Manager and LAN Download Utility is assumed. (150 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.7. GG24-3761-00 Secured Workstation Manager/DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3761-00 Secured Workstation Manager/DOS This document describes Secured Workstation Manager/DOS, covering the general concepts and implementation of the product. It describes normal uses, administrative processes, usage in a LAN environment, and possible relationships with a host-based security manager. This document is intended for a security administrator, but is also useful for a single-system owner wanting to install Secured/DOS. (92 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.8. GG24-3762-00 Secured Workstation Manager/DOS API Examples: Single Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3762-00 Secured Workstation Manager/DOS API Examples: Single-Logon, Authentication This document describes, by way of an example, typical uses of the Application Programming Interfaces available with the Secured Workstation Manager/DOS product. The example implements a relatively secure, single-logon process between a personal computer and large mainframe systems. Source code listings are included. (66 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.9. GG24-3766-00 SAA Application Services 1.1.3 Distributed Print Facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3766-00 IBM SAA Application Services 1.1.3 Distributed Print Facility This document describes the Distributed Print facility of IBM SAA Application Connection Services. It provides guidelines for installation, configuration and usage of this IBM SAA AConnS component in the enterprise. This document is intended for customer personnel and IBM system engineers who need to know how to implement the product to their own environments. (136 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.10. GG24-3794-00 Extended Services for OS/2 Database Manager New Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3794-00 Extended Services for OS/2 Database Manager New Features The IBM Extended Services for OS/2 product provides a set of database and communications services that can be installed on an IBM OS/2 Standard Edition 1.30 and later or an IBM OS/2 Version 2.00 base. This product is a follow on product to the IBM OS/2 Extended Edition product. This book describes the Database Manager features that are new or changed in Extended Services for OS/2 from its predecessor Extended Edition product. In addition, the book describes the new IBM SAA Distributed Database Connection Services/2 product. This is a complementary product that extends the Database Manager environment to enable application programs to access databases on IBM host systems using a Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA) link. (344 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.11. GG24-3903-00 Smalltalk Portability: A Common Base ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3903-00 Smalltalk Portability: A Common Base This document describes an approach to developing portable application code using the Smalltalk programming language. It specifies a common base of Smalltalk classes and methods. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers and customers who need to know what degree of portability can be implemented using Smalltalk. A knowledge of object-oriented programming and the Smalltalk language is assumed. (84 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.12. GG24-3978-00 PenPoint Operating System Overview and Application Dev ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3978-00 PenPoint Operating System Overview and Application Development This document describes the architecture of the PenPoint IBM version, operating system providing sample code for application developers. The PenPoint IBM version executes on IBM ThinkPad 700T and special bid machine IBM ThinkPad 2521. This document provides an overview of the functional capabilities of the operating system and the process of application development. This document is intended for system engineering personnel and application developers who need to know how to implement pen-based systems. A knowledge of C programming and object oriented programming techniques is assumed. (142 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.13. GG24-4022-00 System Tuning Techniques for IBM Personal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4022-00 System Tuning Techniques for IBM Personal Application System The performance of IBM Personal Application System (Personal AS) is directly related to the tuning of the IBM Personal System that this software product has been installed onto. This document discusses how various system elements can be tuned to optimize the performance of Personal AS installed on IBM PS/2, PS/ValuePoint, and PS/1 systems and is intended for use by technical professionals responsible for supporting end users of these systems. Tuning techniques for Personal AS operating in the OS/2, DOS/Windows, and WIN-OS/2 environments are provided. Although this document is primarily intended for use by technical professionals supporting IBM Personal AS installations, the majority of the system performance improvement techniques described in this document are applicable for use with other OS/2, WIN-OS/2 and DOS/Windows end user applications. (70 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.14. GG24-4034-00 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager Storage Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ Services: Implementation Examples New GG24-4034-00 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Mgr Storage Mgment Services This document describes how to build a working environment for ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager Release 1. The document is written for storage administrators, LAN administrators, and workstations users. In this publication we describe the implementation steps for the MVS and VM servers and for the OS/2, AIX, DOS, Windows, and Macintosh clients. The communication protocols that we use are: TCP/IP APPC 3270 emulation To show how to implement ADSM in a customer's environment, we created a sample enterprise to use for the implementation examples. (216 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.15. GG24-4052-00 OS/2 2.0 WPS Development C++ User Interface Class Lib ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4052-00 OS/2 2.0 WPS Development C++ User Interface Class Library This document describes the IBM C++ Class Library: User Interface. It will help you develop your own applications and will enable you to start using the User Interface Class Library classes. It will provide a library of classes that you can use to develop graphical user interface for object-oriented applications using the C++ programming language. This document is intended for Application Developers and System programmers; a knowledge of the C++ language is assumed. This Book is part of the Product documentation of the C++ Compiler, Document Number S71G-2230-00. (316 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.16. GG24-4179-00 Writing OS/2 Client/Server App Using Distributed APP/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4179-00 Writing OS/2 Client/Server Application Using Distributed Application/2 This document describes how to write simple applications in C and REXX that make use of Distributed Application/2. It provides readers with sample program listings that will enable the them to get started programming to the Distributed Application/2 APIs. This document is intended to help application developers who need to understand how to program to the Distributed Application/2 APIs. This document assumes that the reader is generally familiar with OS/2 programming and has a knowledge of IBM OS/2 2.0, C or REXX. (130 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. GBOF-6303: OS/2 V2.X ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30.1. GG24-3822-00 Migrating from a DOS/Windows Environment to OS/2 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3822-00 Migrating from a DOS/Windows Environment to OS/2 2.0 Porting Windows Applications to OS/2 2.0 This document describes both the process of migrating to OS/2 2.0 from a DOS/Windows environment and the process of porting Windows application source code to OS/2 2.0. o Part 1 of this document is intended for IBM system engineers, IBM authorized dealers, IBM customers and DOS/Windows users in general. The document assumes that the reader is familiar with the DOS/Windows environment. o Part 2 of this document is intended for programmers and application developers who need to know how to port Windows applications to OS/2. The document assumes that the reader is familiar with the concepts used in developing a Windows application. (190 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30.2. GG24-3944-00 Evaluation of OS/2 V2.0 Application Development Tools ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3944-00 Evaluation of OS/2 V2.0 Application Development Tools This document describes a process for evaluating application development tools for OS/2 Version 2.0. This document is intended to help systems engineers, field personnel, and customers evaluate OS/2 application development tools. A knowledge of OS/2 and CUA91 is assumed. (78 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30.3. GG24-3948-00 OS/2 2.1 Technical Update ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3948-00 OS/2 2.1 Technical Update This document describes OS/2 2.1. It provides an overview of all the new and changed functions in OS/2 2.1, and a detailed technical discussion of the major new topics. It also includes advice on programming Workplace Shell objects which is applicable generally to OS/2 Version 2, as well as information on OS/2 2.00.1 and the Service Pak XR06055 for OS/2 2.0. This document should be used in conjunction with the OS/2 Version 2.0 Technical Compendium, GBOF-2254. This document is intended for IBM customers, dealers, system engineers, consultants and others who need to know what is new in OS/2 2.1 and to understand the benefits. A knowledge of OS/2 2.0 is assumed. (400 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30.4. GG24-4042-00 MMPM/2 Advanced Programming Techniques ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4042-00 Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 Advanced Programming Techniques This document describes how to write applications in C that make use of the Multimedia I/O and Media Control Interface services of MMPM/2. It provides the reader with working sample programs on diskette to get them started programming for the different multimedia data formats and devices currently supported by MMPM/2. It is considered a follow-on publication to Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 Programming using Digital Audio Examples, GG24-3963. This document is intended for application developers who need to know how to program different types of multimedia devices and how to handle multimedia data formats using the Application Programming Interface (API) supported by the MMPM Toolkit/2. This document assumes that the reader is generally familiar with the different types of multimedia devices and data formats and has a basic knowledge of the MMPM/2 architecture, Presentation Manager, and the C programming language. (378 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. GBOF-6306: Storage Hardware - Magnetic DASD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.1. GG24-3266-00 VM DASD Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3266-00 VM DASD Topics The information contained in this bulletin is a collection of DASD and DASD-related topics which can be found in many other IBM manuals. The intent is to have these topics accumulated in one single document. This document provides information about important aspects of planning for and supporting of DASD devices in the VM environment. It is primarily intended for VM Systems Engineers, VM Systems Programmers, and VM Application Programmers who need information about DASD. Among the topics included are: o Introduction to VM DASD Support o Installing New DASD o the DDR Utility Program o CMS DASD Support o DASD Sharing o FBA DASD Considerations o VM/XA SP Considerations o VSE Guests o MVS/ESA Guests o Performance Management o 3990 Considerations o DFSMS/VM Program Product The following VM systems are described: VM, XA SP, VM/SP and VM/SP HPO. (204 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.2. GG24-3361-00 3990 Storage Control & DASD Performance & Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3361-00 IBM 3990 Storage Control and DASD Performance and Configuration Guidelines This publication contains Performance and Configuration Guidelines for 3990 and 3380. The development of the theoretical part and configuration is reinforced by available measurements or DCAT projections. The objective of this publication is to help the customer get a better understanding of these devices. (126 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.3. GG24-3373-01 IBM 3390 Direct Access Storage Migration Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3373-01 IBM 3390 Direct Access Storage Migration Guide This document describes guidelines and procedures for migration from the 3380 DASD to the 3390 DASD. A migration scenario for each data set type, such as system data sets and data bases, is explained in detail for a non-DFSMS environment. The document also describes general considerations for migration of TSO and batch data in a DFSMS environment. (236 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.4. GG24-3511-00 3990 Storage Control Extended Function Presentation Gde ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3511-00 IBM 3990 Storage Control Extended Function Presentation Guide This publication contains the presentation of the IBM 3990 Storage Control with Extended Function. The presentation explains the extended function and the impact is has on an installation. The objective of this publication is to help the customer get a better understanding of these subsystems and to further his education based on this document. (198 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.5. GG24-3515-00 DASD Migration in DFSMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3515-00 DASD Migration in DFSMS The objective of this publication is to provide guidance for DASD migration in the DFSMS environment. The assumption is that the data being considered is already under DFSMS management. (88 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.6. GG24-3571-00 Extended Count Key Data and NonSynchronous DASD I/O ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3571-00 Extended Count Key Data and NonSynchronous DASD I/O This publication contains presentation foil masters and a presenter script. It discusses the differences between Count Key Data and Extended Count Key Data channel programs, the concept and benefits of nonsynchronous DASD I/O and the ECKD software status. (164 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.7. GG24-3619-00 3990 Storage Control Operation and Recovery Automation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3619-00 IBM 3990 Storage Control Operation and Recovery Automation This document provides information on the automation of an IBM 3990 Storage Control with Extended Edition. A set of panels and REXX CLISTs has been developed to be used as a base to automate a specific subsystem. (138 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.8. GG24-3667-00 3990 Storage Control M3 Monitoring & Capacity Plann Auto ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3667-00 IBM 3990 Storage Control Model 3 Monitoring and Capacity Planning Automation This document provides information on automating the monitoring and reporting of IBM 3990 Extended Function activity. The NetView Clists and Service Level Reporter tables that are provided can be used to assist in achieving an installation's IBM 3990-3 service levels. (142 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.9. GG24-3803-00 IBM 3990 Storage Control ESCON Features Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3803-00 IBM 3990 Storage Control ESCON Features Presentation Guide This document contains foils and script of a presentation that describes the IBM 3990 storage control ESCON features. The features themselves are described, together with information on performance, operating modes and software support. Advice on migrating from a parallel channel environment and on developing operating procedures is also included. Finally, background information on ESCON configurations, nonsynchronous I/O and IOCP coding for ESCON is provided. (226 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.10. GG24-3886-00 IBM Storage Subsystem Enhancements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3886-00 IBM Storage Subsystem Enhancements This book contains presentation foils and scripts that describe the 3995-151 Optical Library Dataserver, the enhanced dynamic cache management function of DFSMS/MVS 1.1.0, and the enhancements to the 3990 Storage Control and the 9340 DASD Subsystem that were announced on May 19, 1992. The book provides general description, performance, and some planning information on each of the four subjects. This book is intended for IBM customers and technical professionals who need to understand and plan for the new enhancements to IBM's storage subsystems. A general understanding of DASD subsystems and their use is assumed. (222 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.11. GG24-3909-00 IBM Storage Products Announcement: May 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3909-00 IBM Storage Products Announcement: May 1992 This publication provides an overview as well as summary of the May 19, 1992 IBM Storage Products announcement. The announcement covered a broad range of hardware and software enhancements and introduced a new platform for managing distributed data. (298 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.12. GG24-3936-00 Concurrent Copy Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3936-00 Concurrent Copy Overview This document introduces the new concurrent copy function, which, in cooperation with DFSMS/MVS and the IBM 3990-3, provides an attractive new way of creating backup copies of data sets without significantly affecting on-line system availability. The document focuses on the following topics: o concurrent copy operation o Concurrent copy base software support o DFSMSdfp* support o DFSMSdss* support o DFSMShsm* support o IMS o CICS* o Migration considerations The document is based on the ADSTAR product announcement of May 19, 1992. (122 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31.13. GG24-4009-01 Automating IBM 3990 DASD Recovery Using REXX Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4009-01 Automating IBM 3990 DASD Recovery Using REXX Programs and NetView This book describes how NetView event processing can be used to automate certain operations of an IBM 3990 subsystem. The operations that can be automated are the responses to some DASD and MEDIA SIM alert messages. The REXX programs included with this book invoke transient dual copy to preserve data for DASD SIMs and concurrent media maintenance for MEDIA SIMs. This book is intended for customers and IBM technical professionals who need to understand and plan for 3990 recovery automation. A thorough knowledge of IBM 3990 Storage Control operations, REXX, and NetView is assumed. This edition applies to Version 2 of the Transient Dual Copy Routines, shipped with this publication. This edition replaces and makes obsolete the previous edition, GG24-4009-00. (216 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. GBOF-6307: Storage Hardware - Tape ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32.1. GG24-3094-01 Guide to the IBM 3480 Automatic Cartridge Loader ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3094-01 Guide to the IBM 3480 Automatic Cartridge Loader This document provides installation, migration and usage guidelines for the IBM 3480 Automatic Cartridge Loader Feature. It is primarily addressed to systems engineers consulting with the customer before installing and migration of the IBM 3480 Automatic Cartridge Loader Feature. It describes which tape application could be considered for the IBM 3480 Automatic Cartridge Loader Feature and which changes are necessary to get the best benefit from it. The document was revised to reflect the recent changes in MVS/SP, DFP, and the microcode in 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem, which improve the IBM 3480 Automatic Cartridge Loader operations. (96 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32.2. GG24-3906-00 IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3906-00 IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver Presentation Guide This presentation guide is designed to assist IBM technical support personnel in marketing the IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver, and is based on the product announcement of May 19,1992. The tape storage environment, IBM 3495 hardware, and software support are discussed. (228 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32.3. GG24-3954-00 Tape Implementation Strategies ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3954-00 Tape Implementation Strategies This document provides information to aid in the selection of IBM tape hardware and software products that best suit customer requirements. This document examines the benefits of each product and offers a methodology for determining the most appropriate product implementation path. The methodology can be used by IBM customers and technical professionals to determine the applicability and justification of the various IBM tape solutions: o Tape Mount Management o DFSMSrmm o the IBM 3490E Tape Subsystem o System-managed Tape o IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver. Additionally, general implementation information is provided for each product. A general understanding of tape subsystems and their use is assumed. (158 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32.4. GG24-3987-00 IBM 3495 Implementation Primer for MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3987-00 IBM 3495 Implementation Primer for MVS This document describes the implementation of the IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver in an MVS/ESA environment. DFSMSrmm implementation is not covered. This book is intended for IBM technical support personnel who plan to implement the IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver. A general knowledge of IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver hardware and DFSMS is assumed. (192 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32.5. GG24-4044-00 Tape Mount Management Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4044-00 Tape Mount Management Cookbook This document provides information to aid in the analysis and implementation of Tape Mount Management (TMM) using the Volume Mount Analyzer, now a part of DFSMS/MVS V1.1. The document describes the TMM philosophy and offers a step-by-step approach to the use of the Volume Mount Analyzer tool. The information provided in this document can guide technical professionals through a TMM study and subsequent TMM implementation. This document provides not only the TMM study methodology, but also examples of the Volume Mount Analyzer parameters, SMS constructs, and automatic class selection (ACS) routines. The experiences of many IBM professionals have been included to highlight potential problems with TMM implementations specifically and tape environments generally and provide solutions. (158 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32.6. GG24-4089-00 Basic Tape Library Support Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4089-00 Basic Tape Library Support Presentation Guide This presentation guide describes the Basic Tape Library Support programming offering. Basic Tape Library Support provides a tape automation facility for customers who are not ready to implement a DFSMS tape environment. (176 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. GBOF-6308: Storage Hardware - Optical DASD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33.1. GG24-3764-00 IBM 3995 and Object Access Method System Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3764-00 IBM 3995 and Object Access Method System Guide This publication contains presentation foil masters and a script. It provides product and implementation information on the IBM 3995 Optical Library Dataserver and the supporting software - Object Access Method. This publication can be used to support a formal classroom session or it can be used as reference material. This document is intended for systems programmers, storage administrators, database administrators and technical managers in MVS accounts. This material assumes the audience has the following prerequisite knowledge: o large systems and/or storage background o a working knowledge of DFSMS o some basic knowledge of DB2 SQL (262 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. GBOF-6309: Storage Software - DFSMS/MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.1. GG24-1725-02 DFHSM Implementation Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1725-02 DFHSM Implementation Primer The objective of this document is to provide systems engineers and storage administrators implementing DFHSM 2.6 for the first time with: o basic guidelines for implementing DFHSM 2.6 o helpful hints for DFHSM operation The implementation guidelines are based on practical DFHSM experience and are applicable in a DFSMS environment. This document focuses on: o installation of DFHSM in a DFSMS environment (Chapter 2) o operational aspects of DFHSM (Chapters 3, 4 and 5) Where applicable, installation checklists are provided to assist with the implementation of DFHSM in your installation. It is recommended that "DFHSM General Information, GH35-0092" be read before using this document; it provides a good description of DFHSM's overall capabilities. Some basic understanding of the DFSMS environment is also assumed. (164 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.2. GG24-3201-01 System-Managed Storage Technical Overview Presentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3201-01 System-Managed Storage Technical Overview Presentation Guide This document is a technical overview of Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem which includes MVS/DFP Version 3 and other components of the Data Facility family, including RACF. It is a major revision of GG24-3201-00 and includes new information on: o MVS/DFP 3.2.0/3.3.0 o DFHSM 2.5.0 o DFDSS 2.5.0 It is intended for systems programmers, storage administrators, data base administrators and technical managers in MVS accounts. (248 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.3. GG24-3301-01 DFSMS Implementation Primer Designing Class/Stoage Grps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3301-01 DFSMS Implementation Primer Series: Designing Classes and Storage Groups This documents technical and formal changes that have been made to the text and illustrations of GG24-3301-00. The focus of this document is on setting up classes and storage groups for a Storage Management Subsystem. (120 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.4. GG24-3302-00 DFSMS Implementation Primer Series: DFSMS Quick Start ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3302-00 DFSMS Implementation Primer Series: DFSMS Quick Start This publication is intended to help MVS installations take immediate advantage of some of the benefits of DFSMS while still planning for full implementation of system-managed storage. Using the information and selected DFSMS functions in this publication will provide not only immediate practical utility, but also the guidance, experience, and confidence that will facilitate full migration to DFSMS. (156 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.5. GG24-3311-00 DFSMS(TM) Value Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3311-00 DFSMS(TM) Value Guide This document explains the value of the Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem (DFSMS) to MVS computer installations. Descriptions are provided on how DFSMS delivers value and a cross reference between the functions of DFSMS and the areas of values is included. (88 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.6. GG24-3317-00 DB2 Usage in the DFSMS Environment - Part 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3317-00 DB2 Usage in the DFSMS Environment - Part 1 This document describes the characteristics and interactions of DB2 and DFSMS and assists Storage Administrators, Database Administrators and IBM Systems Engineers in planning and organizing for DB2 in a DFSMS environment. (82 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.7. GG24-3334-00 MVS/DFP Version 3 Catalog Enhancements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3334-00 MVS/DFP Version 3 Catalog Enhancements This document is intended to help the reader understand and take advantage of the new and enhanced facilities of catalog management in MVS/DFP Data Facility Product Version 3. (74 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.8. GG24-3357-00 Converting to DFSMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3357-00 Converting to DFSMS This manual is a two-part document. Part One documents the conversion tools, testing techniques and general DFSMS conversion considerations. Part Two explains the milestone approach for implementing system-managed storage. This approach allows an installation to convert to DFSMS in a set of manageable steps that provide measurable benefits to the installation. This is an extension to the Quick Start Approach. (314 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.9. GG24-3378-00 DFSMS Impl Primer Series: DFSMS & RACF Usage Considerations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3378-00 DFSMS Implementation Primer Series: DFSMS & RACF Usage Considerations This document is written primarily for storage administrators involved in the installation and implementation of system-managed storage with security management. The purpose is to help these people understand the benefits of RACF for SMS and give recommendations for implementing RACF in an SMS environment. (94 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.10. GG24-3403-01 DFSMS Implementation Primer Series: Writing ACS Routines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3403-01 DFSMS Implementation Primer Series: Writing ACS Routines This publication is written for the storage administrator responsible for designing, coding and maintaining ACS routines for the installation. It addresses the coding techniques and the design philosophy of writing ACS routines. This edition applies to: o MVS/DFP Version 3.3, Program Number 5665-XA3 o DFHSM Version 2.6, Program Number 5665-329 o DFDSS Version 2.5, Program Number 5665-327 o RACF Version 1.9, Program Number 5740-XXH (120 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.11. GG24-3493-00 Planning for Data Availability in a DFSMS Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3493-00 Planning for Data Availability in a DFSMS Environment This bulletin contains guidelines on how to implement a high data availability in a Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem (DFHSM) environment. It focuses mainly on the availability of the critical control data sets and recovery of DASD volumes in a DFDSMS environment. It does not discuss availability for hardware. (132 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.12. GG24-3499-00 DFSMS Disaster Recovery Planning with ABRS Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3499-00 DFSMS Disaster Recovery Planning with Aggregate Backup and Recovery Support Usage Guide This document describes the concepts of disaster backup and recovery and details the steps required for DFHSM Aggregate Backup and Recovery Support (ABARS). It assists storage administrators, systems programmers and IBM systems engineers in planning for disaster backup and recovery. (130 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.13. GG24-3514-00 DFSMS Multi-Site Data Interchange Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3514-00 DFSMS Multi-Site Data Interchange Presentation Guide This presentation guide is intended to provide guidelines on the interchange of data sets between multiple DFSMS systems. Movement of data sets from DFSMS systems to target systems without DFSMS is not considered in this presentation. (166 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.14. GG24-3525-00 Enterprisewide DFSMS Guidelines for Workstations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3525-00 Enterprisewide DFSMS Guidelines for Workstations This document explains how DFSMS can be extended to a distributed environment and presents the main concepts of an enterprisewide storage management system (ESMS). It also gives sone implementation guidelines to be used in preparing for the evolution toward an ESMS. This document provides information to prepare customers for centralized storage management in a distributed environment. Existing DFSMS implementation and guidelines on a MVS host system are discussed and used as a basis to introduce enterprisewide DFSMS concepts. This edition applies only to MVS environments using DFSMS. VM environments using DFSMS are not considered in this edition. (114 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.15. GG24-3540-00 DFSMS Planning and Reporting with DCOLLECT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3540-00 DFSMS Planning and Reporting with DCOLLECT DCOLLECT is an enhancement to MVS/DFP V3 R2 that collects data about an installation's active, migrated and backed up data sets, volumes, and DFHSM DASD and tape capacity. This document describes the DCOLLECT command, the output data, and provides guidelines on using this data to aid in Storage Management, Capacity Planning, and Cost Accounting for DASD storage. (170 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.16. GG24-3597-00 Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE) Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3597-00 Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE) Usage Guide This guide provides information on the use of Partitioned Data Sets Extended (PDSEs), the new data set structure introduced with MVS/DFP Version 3 Release 2. The guide is intended to supplement the MVS/DFP manuals. It includes migration from existing partitioned data sets (PDSs), performance and sharing considerations, and software requirements. The intended audience is: o users of partitioned data sets o system programmers o storage administrators (92 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.17. GG24-3598-00 DFSMS: A World of Difference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3598-00 DFSMS: A World of Difference This presentation guide provides information on the development rationale for DFSMS. The major sections in this publication are: o an introduction o a look back at IBM's track record in the storage system area o a discussion of the major design choices made in the development of DFSMS o a description of the evolution of and requirements in the storage systems area The intended audience is Information Systems (I/S) executives, managers system programmers and storage administrators, and IBM account teams. (86 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.18. GG24-3599-00 DFSMS Disaster Recovery Planning with ABARS Supplement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3599-00 DFSMS Disaster Recovery Planning with Aggregate Backup and Recovery Support, Supplementary Material This document contains sample exits and CLISTs to be used in conjunction with DFHSM Aggregate Backup and Recovery Support. It assists storage administrators, system programmers, and IBM systems engineers in planning for disaster backup and recovery. (92 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.19. GG24-3861-00 DFSMShsm Enhancements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3861-00 DFSMShsm Enhancements This document describes DFSMShsm, the Hierarchical Storage Management functional component of DFSMS/MVS. It provides an introduction to new ABARS functions and DFSMShsm enhancements. This document is intended for technical IBM customer management and professional personnel who need to know the enhancements to DFSMShsm. A knowledge of DFSMS/MVS, DFHSM V2R6.0 functions, and DFHSM V2 R6.0 ABARS functions is assumed. The presentation foil masters are included in Appendix C. (198 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.20. GG24-3914-00 DFSMSrmm Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3914-00 DFSMSrmm Presentation Guide This document provides a set of foils and text that describes the removable media manager component of DFSMS/MVS (DFSMSrmm). A set of full-size foils for presentations is available on MKTTOOLS (IBM marketing disk). Customers interested in this set of foils can request it from their IBM marketing representatives. This document is intended for MVS technical professional and computer center managers. It describes the functions of DFSMSrmm and IBM's tape management strategy. A knowledge of the IBM 3495 Tape Library Dataserver is assumed. (200 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.21. GG24-3988-00 Planning Guide for Conversion to DFSMSrmm ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3988-00 Planning Guide for Conversion to DFSMSrmm This document describes the planning process for conversion to DFSMSrmm, the removable media manager functional component of DFSMS/MVS. This document is intended for IBM customer technical professional personnel who are planning conversions from another vendor product to IBM's DFSMSrmm. It could also be used by IBM services professionals as part of a services offering. The book provides analyses of reports produced by Computer Associates'** tape management systems CA-DYNAM/TLMS** and CA-1**. The main objective of this book is to describe the processes needed to convert from any vendor's tape management system to DFSMSrmm. The process begins by analyzing reports from another vendor's products in order to understand how these products are set up and to compare the terms and functions of those products with DFSMSrmm terms and functions. The results of the analysis is then used to help develop a recommended plan to convert from another vendor's product to DFSMSrmm. In addition, the book describes two sample customer-written data extract programs that produce a sequential data set that is used as input data set to the IBM-written conversion program. (258 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. GBOF-6310: Storage Software - DFSMS/VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35.1. GG24-3654-00 Getting Started with DFSMS/VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3654-00 Getting Started with DFSMS/VM This document is intended to offer an introduction to DFSMS/VM Release 1.1 (and DFSMS/VM Function Level 210). It introduces the topic of system-managed storage by defining concepts and terminology. Installation and usage tips are provided. (233 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35.2. GG24-3739-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 220 Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3739-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 220 Presentation Guide This document provides information on DFSMS/VM Function Level 220. It describes the features of DFSMS/VM Function Level 220, the structure of the product's virtual machines, and some early considerations for installations considering the use of the product. It is written for VM support personnel who are involved with the administration of user disk storage. (246 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35.3. GG24-3965-00 DFSMS/VM and ISMF: A Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3965-00 DFSMS/VM and ISMF: A Primer This document is designed as a reference to the functions provided by DFSMS/VM Function Level 220. The document contains three sections, a task-oriented guide for working with files and understanding the space management criteria defined by an installation, a panel-by-panel reference section with a description of the functions that each panel provides, and a section on completing DFSMS/VM tasks in the CMS environment. This document is intended for storage administrators and end users who need to know how to perform DFSMS/VM tasks. A knowledge of CMS, the Shared File System, and basic DFSMS/VM Function Level 220 is assumed. (146 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35.4. GG24-3966-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 220 Installation and Implementa ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3966-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 220 Installation and Implementation This document is intended to help VM support staffs understand how to in DFSMS/VM Function Level 220 and determine how to write routines that will enable them to implement storage management for Shared File System files VM/ESA 1.1.1. The document is intended for system programmers, storage administrators, other personnel with an interest in storage management. A knowledge of VM/ESA and Shared File System is assumed. (118 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35.5. GG24-4098-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 221: The Undiscovered Feature ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4098-00 DFSMS/VM Function Level 221: The Undiscovered Feature This document describes the installation and use of DFSMS/VM Function Le 221, a feature of VM/ESA Release 2. It provides an overview of the installation tasks and guidance on how to implement the new Function Lev 221 functions. This document is intended for personnel who are responsible for system support or space management. Readers should be familiar with VM/ESA Release 2. (174 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. GBOF-6311: Storage Software - Distributed Storage Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36.1. GG24-3913-00 DFDSM Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3913-00 DFDSM Presentation Guide This document describes the Data Facility Distributed Storage Manager, it introduces some common problems on distributed storage management and discusses the concept of enterprisewide storage management. The document provides an overview of all the DFDSM functions and explains the storage management functions in detail from both a server and a client point of view. It also provides information on integrity, recovery, and security for both the product itself and user files on the server. (216 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. GBOF-6312: VSE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.1. GG24-1676-02 CICS/DOS/VS - VSE/VSAM Interface Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1676-02 CICS/DOS/VS - VSE/VSAM Interface Guide The objective of this guide is to provide, for users of CICS/DOS/VS with VSE/VSAM, the necessary information to better understand this interface. The guide is written from the perspective of the CICS/DOS/VS user. (56 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.2. GG24-3227-00 IBM 9370 LAN Volume 2 - IEEE 802.3 Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3227-00 IBM 9370 LAN Volume 2 - IEEE 802.3 Support This document is Volume Two of a series of two volumes on the 9370 LAN installation. It describes the installation and usage of the 802.3 Integrated 9370 Subsystem (Feature 6130/6035). (72 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.3. GG24-3246-00 CICS/DOS/VS Report Controller Technical Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3246-00 CICS/DOS/VS Report Controller Technical Primer This guide describes the new Report Controller Feature available with CICS/DOS/VS 1.7. (202 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.4. GG24-3318-00 ES/3090 Processor Complex, PR/SM Feature, VSE/SP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3318-00 IBM ES/3090 Processor Complex, PR/SM Feature, VSE/SP in a Logical Partition This document describes how to operate an ES/3090 Processor Complex in LPAR mode, with a VSE/SP operating system active in one or more logical partitions. (54 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.5. GG24-3332-00 VSE/SP Version 3 Installation of Large CICS Partitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3332-00 VSE/SP Version 3 Installation of Large CICS Partitions The intent of this publication is to give skilled system programmers information necessary to start up a VSE/SP with VTAM in a private address space. Provides detailed instructions on how to install a large CICS partition(s) in the production system of that shared VSE environment. (146 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.6. GG24-3335-00 VSE/SP V4R1 Install Support Shared Sys/Large CICS Part ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3335-00 IBM VSE/System Package Version 4 Release 1 Installation Support for Shared Systems and Large CICS Partitions This publication provides instructions, sample jobs, and CICS RDO definitions to implement a large CICS application system in a shared VSE/SP environment. It provides a relief to those customers which are currently, or very soon will be, running into virtual storage constraints. This document is intended for skilled system programmers. (240 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.7. GG24-3426-00 VSE & VM/VSE Performance Analysis and Tuning Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3426-00 VSE and VM/VSE Performance Analysis and Tuning Cookbook This document contains guidelines on how to monitor and analyze the performance on a VSE native or VM/VSE system, as well as a discussion of the most important tuning options within these systems and how they affect the system. (254 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.8. GG24-3427-00 CICS/DOS/VS Performance Analysis and Tuning Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3427-00 CICS/DOS/VS Performance Analysis and Tuning Cookbook This document contains guidelines on how to monitor and analyze the performance on a CICS/DOS/VS 1.7 system running in the VSE/SP version 3 environment. (242 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.9. GG24-3460-00 CICS OS/2 Communications with CICS/VSE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3460-00 CICS OS/2 Communications with CICS/VSE This document is designed to be used as a cookbook for installing and configuring the Customer Information Control System for Operating System/2 (CICS OS/2) on a PS/2 running OS/2. This document should be used by the VSE Systems Programmer or IBM Systems Engineer to: o install CICS OS/2 o configure and test Function Shipping (FS) on an LU2.0 communications link o configure and test Functions Shipping (FS) and Transaction Routing (TR) on an LU6.2 Link (264 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.10. GG24-3490-00 ES/9370 ASCII Subsystem Support of IBM Plotters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3490-00 ES/9370 ASCII Subsystem Support of IBM Plotters This publication describes how to exploit IBM ASCII plotters in an ES/9370 with the ASCII Subsystem and in a VM operated environment. It provides examples and the systems programming for making these plotters available to their potential users. It addresses people with skills in basic VM systems programming and graphic applications who are responsible for the planning and implementation of the information processing resources needed by both technical and business computing users requiring support in graphics. (58 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.11. GG24-3582-00 CICS OS/2 Cooperative Processing Appl Design Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3582-00 CICS OS/2 Cooperative Processing Application Design Guide This document is written for IBM customers and IBM Systems Engineers who are responsible for supporting CICS installations that are considering, or are in the process of implementing, Cooperative Processing with CICS OS/2. It should be used by CICS application programmers, CICS system programmers, and those responsible for implementing new technology for end-users. Information is provided for evaluating and modifying current host-based applications for Cooperative Processing with CICS OS/2. Guidelines are also provided for using CICS OS/2 with other tools, to design new Cooperative Processing applications. A general knowledge of traditional CICS transaction processing is assumed. (118 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.12. GG24-3663-01 Enterprise System/9000 Models 120, 130, 150, 170 SE Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3663-01 Enterprise System/9000 Models 120, 130, 150, 170 SE Guide This document describes the IBM Enterprise System/9000* (ES/9000) rack mounted processors Models 120, 130, 150, and 170. It provides information that can be found in several other publications. Please refer to Appendix A, "Publications" on Page 393 on this manual for details. This document is intended for system programmers, IBM SEs, and marketing representatives who need to know more about the ES/9000 rack-mounted system. In addition to using this document for general information on the ES/9000 rack-mounted system, it will also be valuable as a reference for planning purposes. (446 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.13. GG24-3751-00 VSE/ESA 1.2.0 VSE/POWER 5.1 Networking Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3751-00 VSE/ESA 1.2.0 VSE/POWER 5.1 Networking Functions This document describes the networking support provided by VSE/POWER Version 5.1 included in VSE/ESA 1.1. or later. It provides the basic knowledge and samples to help the reader to implement a network with VSE/POWER. This document is intended as a reference guide to help users plan and implement an installation using PNET, the networking function of VSE/POWER. It will also describe and give samples of connections involving POWER, RSCS and JES2/3 using CTCAs, SDLC and BSC lines. A good understanding of the first two chapters of the manual VSE/POWER Networking (SC33-6573) is required. This publication replaces the VSE/POWER Networking Design Guide (GG24-1570) which is no longer available for distribution. (176 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.14. GG24-3791-00 VSE/ESA DOS/VS COBOL TO VS COBOL II Migration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3791-00 VSE/ESA DOS/VS COBOL TO VS COBOL II Migration Considerations This document describes considerations and techniques which can be applied by current users of DOS/VS COBOL, who want to convert their applications to VS COBOL II Release 3.2. It also provides guidelines for the current VSE/SP user on how to prepare for VSE/ESA, including its future 31-bit addressing potential by migrating his programs to VS COBOL II. This document is intended for persons who are responsible for planning or implementing the migration of their COBOL programs. It should also be a valuable reference guide for IBM systems engineers who wish to advise during such a project. Good knowledge of the COBOL language is a prerequisite. The reader should also have studied the IBM DOS/VS COBOL to COBOL II Migration Guide. (164 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.15. GG24-3857-00 A CICS/VSE Performance and Tuning Supplement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3857-00 A CICS/VSE Performance and Tuning Supplement This document describes CICS/VSE 2.1 (5686-026). It provides information on improvements to the product, and the environment in which it runs, which have an effect on performance, and highlights new considerations affecting tuning. This document is intended for customers and Systems Engineers who need to know how changes to CICS/VSE and VSE/ESA and its subsystems have affected the performance characteristics of CICS/VSE and it's performance measurement and tuning. A knowledge of VSE/ESA, and also of performance issues relating to CICS/DOS/VS 1.7 (Program Number 5746-XX3) is assumed. (74 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.16. GG24-3883-00 VSE/ESA V1 Implementa Improved CICS/VSE2.1 MRO Function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3883-00 VSE/ESA Version 1 Implementation of Improved CICS/VSE2.1 MRO Function Shipping This document is intended to provide system programmers with detailed knowledge required to implement CICS/VSE MRO Function Shipping in a VSE/ESA environment in order to achieve virtual storage constraint relief (VSCR) and performance improvement for their system. A knowledge of both VSE and CICS is assumed. It also shows various performance data obtained in a sample environment which may help determining the most applicable tuning options for an individual environment. (80 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.17. GG24-3935-00 ES/9000 M120, 130, 150, 170 & 200 Install/Imple Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3935-00 Enterprise System/9000 Models 120, 130, 150, 170 and 200 Installation/Implementation Cookbook This document describes the initial setup and operational procedures for the Enterprise System/9000 (ES/9000) rack-mounted processors Models 120, 130, 150, 170 and 200. It provides a step-by-step implementation procedure for the initial installation of the 9221 series of ESA processors. This document is intended for system programmers and IBM SEs who need to know how to set up the 9221 series of processors. (244 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.18. GG24-3969-00 Database Considerations in a CICS/VSE XRF Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3969-00 Database Considerations in a CICS/VSE XRF Environment This document describes the use of the Extended Recovery Facility (XRF) of CICS/VSE Version 2 with database products. Special emphasis is placed on SQL/DS Version 3 Release 2 (5688-103) and DOS/VS DL/I Version 1 (5746-XX1). This document is intended for customers and Systems Engineers who need to know how to implement the XRF process. A knowledge of CICS/VSE, SQL/DS and DOS/VS DL/I is assumed. (160 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.19. GG24-4004-00 VSE/ESA V1 Implementation of CICS/VSE XRF Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4004-00 VSE/ESA Version 1 Implementation of CICS/VSE XRF Systems This document describes how to implement the CICS Extended Recovery Facility to improve availability in a VSE/ESA environment. Most benefits will accrue when XRF is implemented in a "multiple VSE" environment. This could potentially provide protection against outages caused by failure of VSE, VTAM, CICS or the processor. The sample environment used in this publication consists of two CECs. The primary CICS partition and the alternate CICS partition are set up in different processors. This document is intended for the system programmer who will be implementing CICS/VSE XRF. A knowledge of both VSE/ESA and CICS is assumed. (98 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.20. GG24-4025-00 VSE/ESA 1.3 Migration Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4025-00 VSE/ESA 1.3 Migration Guide This document describes the main steps necessary to migrate currently installed VSE systems to VSE/ESA Version 1 Release 3. Systems prior to VSE/SP 3.2 are not considered in this publication. System Programmers and other people involved in the planning and implementation of a VSE to VSE/ESA 1.3 conversion, will find many hints and tips to assist them in their task. (114 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.21. GG24-4096-00 Migrating DPPX Appl to VSE/ESA Customer Selected Sample ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4096-00 Migrating DPPX Applications to VSE/ESA - A Customer Selected Sample The experience gained in this pilot conversion will assist in selecting VSE/ESA as a replacement for DPPX/370. The objectives of the project are to describe the experience gained during the conversion of a representative set of interdependent production applications. Also included is a description of the applications' infrastructure, and special considerations related to job submission and control. The information in this document is restricted to the specific conversion of one set of customer applications, but does not provide a comprehensive guide for all aspects of DPPX/370 to VSE/ESA application conversion. This manual is the result of a joint project between the customer John Lewis Partnership, ORBIT International, and IBM, using tools provided by ORBIT International. (146 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.22. GG24-4134-00 Implementation of the VSE/ESA Workstation Platform ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4134-00 Implementation of the VSE/ESA Workstation Platform This document describes the IBM VSE/ESA Workstation Platform Version 1 Release 3. It provides practical information on how to install and use the VSE/ESA Workstation Platform in an IBM Personal System/2 environment. This document is intended for IBM personnel, and customers who need to know more about the VSE/ESA Workstation Platform. Knowledge of PS/2 and OS/2 is assumed. (136 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.23. GG24-4174-00 Cross Domain Networking In VM/ESA 2.0 and VSE/ESA Environments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4174-00 Cross Domain Networking In VM/ESA 2.0 and VSE/ESA 1.3 Environments Implementation Guide This document is a step-by-step implementation guide for cross domain communication using IBM 9221 processors, between VM/ESA 2.0 and VSE/ESA 1.3 environments. Various network connections are covered in this document, using different hardware facilities such as Parallel and ESCON Channels, ESCON Directors, Token-Ring Adapters, Integrated Communication Adapters, and the IBM 3745. All samples provided in this document have been implemented and thoroughly tested. They are provided to help you quickly reproduce cross domain networks in the same or a similar software/hardware environment. This document is intended primarily for customer personnel and IBM technical professionals who need to implement cross domain communication in the VM/ESA 2.0 and VSE/ESA 1.3 environments. The reader is assumed to have a basic working knowledge of VM/ESA, VSE/ESA, and SNA networking in VM/ESA and VSE/ESA host environments. (262 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.24. GG24-3462-00 VM/VSE SQL/DS Guest Sharing Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3462-00 VM/VSE SQL/DS Guest Sharing Guide SQL/DS Guest Sharing is the facility to access data stored in an SQL/DS database under VM/SP from a VSE system running as a VM guest machine. This bulletin intended to serve as a guide for system and database administrators in an SQL/DS Guest Sharing environment and for Guest Sharing users. It gives a picture of the difference between SQL/DS working under VM/SP, under VSE/SP (running under VM/SP), and in a Guest Sharing environment. It contains information on how to set up a Guest Sharing environment, how to operate it, and how to manage it. In addition, performance considerations are covered. (92 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.25. GG24-3468-00 IBM VSE/SP V4 Central Operation of VSE/SP under VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3468-00 IBM VSE/SP Version 4 Central Operation of VSE/SP under VM The intention of this publication is to give skilled system programmers the information necessary to set up VM/SP and VSE/SP in such a way that multiple systems can be controlled from one central operator console. (78 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.26. GG24-3792-00 Guidance for VM/VSE ESA Environments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ .GG24-3792-00 Guidance for VM/VSE ESA Environments This document describes the implementation of the VSE/ESA product running under VM/ESA (in ESA mode). It provides setup information, and hints and tips for this environment including V=R recovery, DASD Sharing, SQL Guest Sharing, and the use of the VM/VSE Interface routines. This document is intended for both customers and systems engineers who need to know how best to set up VSE/ESA when running under VM/ESA. A knowledge of both the VM and VSE products is assumed. (116 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.27. GG24-3847-00 Controlling Multiple VSE Systems under VM/ESA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3847-00 Controlling Multiple VSE Systems under VM/ESA This document describes the Virtual Machine/Enterprise Systems Architecture* (VM/ESA*) and Virtual Storage Extended/Enterprise Systems Architecture* (VSE/ESA*). It provides the information necessary to set up VM/ESA and VSE/ESA in such a way that multiple systems can be controlled from one central operator console. This document is intended for customers who need to know how to operate many VSE systems centrally under VM. A basic knowledge of VM and VSE is assumed. (184 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.28. GG24-4046-00 VSE/ESA Version 1.3 under VM/ESA Release 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4046-00 VSE/ESA Version 1.3 under VM/ESA Release 2 This document describes experiences made during the installation of VM/ESA Rel 2 and VSE/ESA V1.3 as a VM guest in different hardware environments. It provides hints and tips for the installation and for the usage of VSE/ESA V1.3 guests under VM/ESA Rel 2. This document is intended for the VM/VSE user and system programmer who will install or work within such a VM/VSE environment. A knowledge of VM/ESA and VSE/ESA is assumed. (90 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37.29. GG24-4097-00 Using HMF/VM with Multiple VSE Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4097-00 Using HMF/VM with Multiple VSE Systems This document describes the functions and the usage of the Host Management Facilities/VM (5684-157) in a VM/VSE environment. It provides tips for the installation and the customizing of the program and shows how to make use of its functions. This document is intended for the VM/ESA and/or the VSE system programmer and operator and in general for those who plan to set up a centralized operating environment for multiple VSE systems running under VM/ESA. A knowledge of VM/ESA and VSE/ESA is assumed. (132 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. GBOF-6314: VM/VSE - SQL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.1. GG24-3280-00 SQL/DS Version 2 Release 2 Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3280-00 SQL/DS Version 2 Release 2 Usage Guide This document serves as a guide for Structured Query Language/Data System (SQL/DS) Version 2 Release 2. A description of the new items is included as well as usage and migration considerations. (174 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.2. GG24-3281-00 SQL/DS Version 2.2 Referential Integrity Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3281-00 SQL/DS Version 2.2 Referential Integrity Usage Guide This document serves as a guide for the Referential Integrity facilities implemented in Structured Query Language/Data System (SQL/DS) Version 2 Release 2. (218 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.3. GG24-3429-00 SQL/DS Performance Analysis and Tuning Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3429-00 SQL/DS Performance Analysis and Tuning Cookbook This document is intended to be used by IBM systems engineers and customer personnel who are not specialists in the performance area. It will allow preliminary analysis and tuning of a system. (168 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.4. GG24-3587-00 SQL/DS Version 3 Release 1 Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3587-00 SQL/DS Version 3 Release 1 Usage Guide This document describes the new functions and facilities of SQL/DS Version 3 Release 1. It is primarily intended for the customers' database administrator and for IBM database specialists and account SE's. (220 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.5. GG24-3593-00 Transfer of Relational Data between VM SQL/DS & OS/2 DM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3593-00 Transfer of Relational Data between VM SQL/DS and OS/2 DM This publication describes a solution sample to transfer relational data between an IBM* HOST and an IBM PS/2* System in both directions. This document is intended for SEs and for users who need to know more detailed aspects from a systems point of view in order to investigate an equivalent project. This scenario could also be used as a start in the direction of distributed data and its related considerations (for example data management, security). General knowledge of IBM's Operating Systems VM and OS/2 and the related network and database product capabilities is assumed. (102 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.6. GG24-3705-00 Getting Started with SQL Master/VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3705-00 Getting Started with SQL Master/VM This document describes the installation process of the IBM SQL/Master Program Offering providing additional explanation where necessary. It provides usage scenarios for SQL Master/VM which can be adapted to the customer's environment. Finally some questions and answers are included to avoid the most trivial errors. This document is intended for Customers, IBM System Engineers and anybody else who has a need to know. Good knowledge of SQL/Data System is a prerequisite for a good understanding of the topics covered. (76 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.7. GG24-3706-00 Monitoring the Usage of SQL/DS Queries under QMF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3706-00 Monitoring the Usage of SQL/DS Queries under QMF This document describes how the QMF VM/SP Governor enables users to audit and control the utilization of database resources used by the QMF users in an SQL/DS database. It provides an example of how to implement monitoring functions that can be used by the SQL/DS and QMF administrators to control and monitor QMF activities. This document is intended for SQL/DS and QMF administrators, QMF application developers and QMF end-users, who are responsible for the implementation and usage of QMF applications under VM/SP. General knowledge of SQL/DS at a performance and tuning level, of QMF VM/SP at an implementation and tuning level, and of SQL/DS application programming in Assembler and COBOL are required. (518 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.8. GG24-3733-01 Setup and Usage of SQL/DS in a DRDA Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3733-01 Setup and Usage of SQL/DS in a DRDA Environment This document pertains to the use of Structured Query Language/ Data System (SQL/DS) Version 3 Release 3 in a mixed-platform, distributed relational database (DRDA) environment. It describes SQL/DS considerations for application design, security, and general use in the subject environment with SQL/DS acting as both an Application Server (AS) and an Application Requester (AR). Also provided is setup information, including system file tailoring examples, for SQL/DS, VM/SP, DB2, MVS, VTAM, and OS/2. This document is intended to assist customers and IBM Systems Engineers in evaluating or implementing an SAA distributed database system involving SQL/DS. A knowledge of the components and use of SQL/DS is assumed. Knowledge of SNA and VM networking is required for those interested in the setup of links between DRDA systems. (360 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38.9. GG24-4047-00 SQL/DS Version 3 Release 4 Performance Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4047-00 SQL/DS Version 3 Release 4 Performance Guide This document provides performance guidelines for designing and implementing cost-effective SQL/DS databases and applications for the VM and VSE environments. It will cover all current SQL/DS versions up to Version 3 Release 4 including the VMDSS feature. (392 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. GBOF-6317: VM/VSE - CSP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39.1. GG24-3228-00 CSP V3 Application Design and Coding Under VM or VSE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3228-00 CSP Version 3 Application Design and Coding Under VM or VSE This document is intended as a working document to help Systems Engineers and their customers to design and code applications using CSP. (293 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39.2. GG24-3310-00 CSP/AD/AE Version 3 and SQL/DS Interface Study ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3310-00 CSP/AD/AE Version 3 and SQL/DS Interface Study This document is meant to assist Systems Engineers and customers, as a consolidated source, when searching information about all the different functions implemented in CSP/AD and CSP/AE to support SQL/DS in VM/CMS and VSE/SP. (188 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39.3. GG24-3428-00 CSP/AD - CSP/AE Performance Analysis and Tuning Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3428-00 CSP/AD - CSP/AE Performance Analysis and Tuning Cookbook This document contains guidelines on how to monitor and analyze the performance of CSP/AD and CSP/AE running in a VM or VSE system. It is assumed that the reader has experience in installing and using CSP/AD and CSP/AE under VM and/or VSE. (172 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39.4. GG24-3644-00 An Introduction to the CSP/AD PWS Feature ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3644-00 An Introduction to the CSP/AD PWS Feature This document is intended for SE's traditionally supporting CSP/AD on the Host and for Customer Personnel responsible for CSP/AD Library administration and application programming. (128 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. GBOF-6318: ImagePlus/MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.1. GG24-3526-01 MVS/ESA ImagePlus, Customization Hints and Tips ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3526-01 MVS/ESA ImagePlus, Customization Hints and Tips This bulletin documents an MVS/ESA ImagePlus customization to set up class laboratories for the MVS/ESA ImagePlus Design Class and the Implementation Class. The Folder Application Facility at level 1.2 was also installed. Only the customization tasks and activities are discussed. The installation of the products from the distribution support is not described. The customized Folder Application Facility is the CICS version but most of the information provided may be useful as well for the IMS version of the Folder Application Facility. This document is intended for IBM system engineers, customer application designers, analysts, and system programmers who have to implement and customize an MVS/ESA ImagePlus application. (178 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.2. GG24-3670-00 SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Install & Customizing Gde V2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3670-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Installation and Customizing Guide, Version 2.1 This document is intended to assist IBM systems engineers and customers to install and customize IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Version 2.1. It covers the implementation of the IBM SAA Folder Application Facility (FAF) MVS/ESA Application Programming Interfaces (API), and the IBM SAA Distribution Manager (IODM). It has sample COBOL programs to assist with verification that the product is installed and working correctly. The document covers end-to-end installation and testing. It has chapters on the Image Workstation Program, IWP (DOS), IWP/2 (OS/2), DB2, Systems Managed Storage (SMS), and CICS customizing required to make the ImagePlus system operational. It assumes the reader has access to MVS/ESA system programming skills to successfully complete this work. (176 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.3. GG24-3699-00 SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Implementing IPFAF APIs V2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3699-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Implementing IPFAF APIs Version 2.1 This document provides systems engineers and customer technical personnel, with information on developing, preparing, installing, and testing COBOL programs that call the IBM SAA ImagePlus Folder Application Facility (IPFAF) MVS/ESA Version 2.1 Application Programming Interface (API). It can be used when implementing the APIs for the first time, or as a tutorial document to explain the process of creating a complete application. The document describes an application of our own design which we called Desktop Image Processing. It consists of 31 COBOL programs and associated BMS maps. The programs were developed to run in a CICS environment and use DB2. This document assumes that ImagePlus MVS/ESA has already been installed, and is a logical follow-on to document IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Installation and Customizing Guide, Version 2.1 (GG24-3670). (272 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.4. GG24-3724-00 SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Install & Customizing Gde V2.1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3724-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Installation and Customizing Guide Version 2.1.1 This document is intended to assist IBM systems engineers and customers to install and customize IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Version 2.1.1. It covers the installation of IBM SAA ImagePlus Folder Application Facility (IPFAF) MVS/ESA, and the IBM SAA ImagePlus Object Distribution Manager (IODM). The document covers end-to-end installation and testing. It has chapters on DB2, Object Access Method (OAM), Systems Managed Storage (SMS), and CICS customizing required to make the ImagePlus system operational. It assumes the reader has access to MVS/ESA system programming skills to successfully complete this work. (212 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.5. GG24-3821-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Diagnosis Guide Version 2.1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3821-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Diagnosis Guide Version 2.1.1 This document describes how to diagnose an ImagePlus MVS/ESA V2 system. The work was performed in a CICS 3.1.1 environment, however some of the information in this document will also be applicable to an IMS/ESA environment. It has been designed to assist those installing ImagePlus MVS/ESA for the first time, and will also be useful to installations where ImagePlus is already operating successfully. This document is intended for systems engineers and customers who will be installing and verifying the ImagePlus system. A knowledge of ImagePlus MVS/ESA, CICS, DB2, and TSO is assumed. (192 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.6. GG24-3837-00 SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA High-Speed Scanning Implem V2.1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3837-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA High-Speed Scanning Implementation Version 2.1.1 This document describes installing and using the ImagePlus High-Speed Capture Subsystem, Batch Storage, and associated document scanners. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers and customer technical personnel who need to know more detail about ImagePlus high-speed scanning and using the Batch Storage Facility. A knowledge of ImagePlus MVS/ESA Version 2.1.1, and MVS systems programming is assumed. (268 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.7. GG24-3884-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Version 2.1.1 Coded Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3884-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Version 2.1.1 Coded Data Implementation This document provides IBM systems engineers and customer technical support personnel with information on the development and implementation of coded data storage processing in an IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Version 2.1.1 environment. It can be used as a guide when approaching the concept of coded data storage for the first time as it may be viewed as a platform from which a more detailed and customized application can be built at a customer location. The programs which were developed and used in this document were designed to run in a CICS environment and to use DB2. This document assumes that ImagePlus MVS/ESA has already been installed, and is a logical follow-on to the IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Installation and Customizing Guide, Version 2.1.1. (192 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.8. GG24-3904-00 SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Using the IPFAF Workflow APIs V2.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3904-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Using the IPFAF Workflow APIs Version 2.2 This document describes the use of the Workflow Application Programming Interface in ImagePlus MVS/ESA IPFAF Version 2.2. The first part of the document begins with an overview of the Workflow APIs then describes a sample image workflow application that was developed to exercise the workflow APIs. The Workflow API Sample Programs (WASP) that were developed are described in detail, and the source code is supplied in an appendix. The second part of the document describes workflow concepts, and gives an example of a simple workflow database design. This document is intended for IBM systems engineers and customer staff who are planning to implement a workflow system using the IPFAF APIs. (488 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.9. GG24-3930-00 SAA ImagePlus IODM/2 V1.1 Installation & Customization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3930-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus IODM/2 Version 1.1.0 Installation and Customization Guide This document describes the installation and customizing of IBM SAA ImagePlus Object Distribution Manager/2 (IODM/2). It provides step-by-step installation tips and techniques beginning with a stand-alone IODM/2 system. It progresses to an IODM/2 system integrated with host IPFAF and IODM, with multiple IWPM/2 workstations. This document is intended for technical specialists with a knowledge of ImagePlus MVS/ESA. Some knowledge of OS/2, Communications Manager, CICS, and networking, is required to use this document effectively. (104 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40.10. GG24-4055-00 SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Install & Customizing Gde V2.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4055-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Installation and Customizing Guide Version 2.2 This document is intended to assist technical professionals to install and customize IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA Version 2.2. It covers the installation of IBM SAA ImagePlus Folder Application Facility (IPFAF) MVS/ESA, and the IBM SAA ImagePlus Object Distribution Manager (IODM) MVS/ESA. The document covers end-to-end installation and testing. It has chapters on DB2, Object Access Method (OAM), Systems Managed Storage (SMS), and CICS customizing required to make the ImagePlus system operational. It assumes the reader has access to MVS/ESA system programming skills to successfully complete this work. (430 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. GBOF-6319: ImagePlus/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41.1. GG24-3604-01 IBM SAA ImagePlus WAF/400 API's Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3604-01 IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 Application Programming Interfaces Implementation This document describes IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 APIs usage. It provides customers and system engineers with information for using the programming interfaces inside their applications to personalize their needs and to avoid the typical case follow-up used by Workfolder Application/400. This document is intended for programmers who need to know how to call programming interfaces in the order in which they must be executed to maintain the database integrity. A good knowledge of Workfolder Application Facility/400 and COBOL/400 or RPG/400 is assumed. (454 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41.2. GG24-3680-00 WAF/400 5363 Optical Subsystem Config, Install, Recommd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3680-00 Workfolder Application Facility/400 5363 Optical Subsystem Configuration, Installation and Recommendations This document provides systems engineers and customers with advice and tips for installing the implementing IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 and IBM System/36 5363 Optical Subsystem. The RPQ's and PRPQ's and the hardware and software required for the system are described. A complete step-by-step example of the installation of an IBM System/36 5363 Optical Subsystem connected to IBM AS/400 and the PS/2 is included. This example has been tested with the installation of an IBM 9247 only. (114 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41.3. GG24-3778-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus WAF/400 User Exits Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3778-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 User Exits Implementation This document describes IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 exits usage. It provides customers and system engineers with information for using the exits to personalize their needs and interface with their own applications. This document is intended for the programmers who need to know how to call exits in the order in which it must be done to maintain the database integrity if some APIs are used inside a called program. A good knowledge of Workfolder Application Facility/400 and RPG/400 is assumed. (204 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41.4. GG24-3790-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus WAF/400 Install Considerations for NLV ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3790-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 Installation Considerations for NLV This document describes the installation and test of several Workfolder Application/400 National Language Version on one and on several AS/400 platforms. It provides information on installing different languages for users in a multi-national business environment. This document is intended for customers and system engineers who need to know how WAF/400 can be implemented in a multinational business environment. A knowledge of Workfolder Application Facility/400, AS/400 and IWP/2 is assumed. (188 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41.5. GG24-3866-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus WAF/400 Adminstration & User Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3866-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 Adminstration and User Examples This document describes the different steps to set up Workfolder Application Facility/400 utilization and how a user can handle the different possibilities. It contains the description of each phase necessary for the administrator to set up the users' environment and the description of most functions that users will need to understand to accomplish their job. This document will be of greatest use to relative newcomers to Workfolder Application Facility/400 as it takes a step-by-step approach to most functions. It is meant to be used in conjunction with the related publications. (262 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41.6. GG24-4016-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus WAF/400 Work Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4016-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 Work Management This document describes the new functions of work management and show how to implement their utilization. It provides examples in a step-by-step approach to define work processes. Each step and logic is documented to create action lists, route profiles that include collection points and decision points to describe a process. The related user exits are documented as they are considered a step in the work process. This document is intended for customers and system engineers that want to create a Workfolder Application Facility application using Work Management processes. (286 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. GBOF-6320: ImagePlus/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42.1. GG24-3773-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus/2 Installation and Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3773-00 IBM SAA ImagePlus/2 Installation and Implementation This document is intended for IBM systems engineers and customers to assist them in installing and implementing IBM SAA ImagePlus/2. The reader should use this manual as a guide to installing the prerequisite software components and IBM SAA ImagePlus/2, and as a guide to building a sample image application. Discussion of experiences with the Kodak Automated Disk Library is included. (158 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. GBOF-6321: Application Development Platform ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43.1. GG24-3510-00 Repository Manager/MVS Release 1 Early Experiences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3510-00 Repository Manager/MVS Release 1 Early Experiences The purpose of this document is to provide some guidelines for installing and using Repository Manager/MVS Release 1, 5665-461. The advice and guidelines we offer are based on experiences with an early version of the product. This bulletin is meant to be used by systems programmers installing Repository Manager/MVS, administrators and tool builders. (218 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43.2. GG24-3538-01 SCLM Workstation Platform/2 Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3538-01 Software Configuration Library Manager Workstation Platform/2 Usage Guide This document describes how to get started with two key AD/Cycle components: SCLM and AD/Cycle WorkStation Platform/2. The document is intended to assist software development organizations in their implementation of these products. This document also contains information that will enable those already familiar with the basics of SCLM and AD/Cycle WorkStation Platform/2 to further utilize the product function. (332 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43.3. GG24-3833-00 AD/Cycle: SCLM 3.4 New Functions Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3833-00 AD/Cycle: SCLM 3.4 New Functions Usage Guide This document contains information about new functions introduced in SCLM 3.4. It describes how the new functions can be implemented to set up a library environment in a customer installation and remove restrictions that previously existed in SCLM. The benefits gained by migrating from SCLM 3.3 to SCLM 3.4 are discussed. The possibility of extending SCLM to interface with other library systems is also considered. (160 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43.4. GG24-3900-00 AD/Cycle Documentation Tool PrDM Early Experiences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3900-00 AD/Cycle Documentation Tool PrDM Early Experiences This document relates early experiences in using the Professional Documentation Manager/MVS. The document is intended to assist organizations who are about to install and use PrDM. This document can be seen as a companion to the product guides. (110 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. GBOF-6322: Application Development Maintenance and Test ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44.1. GG24-3827-00 AD/Cycle Test Tools: WITT and SATT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3827-00 AD/Cycle Test Tools: WITT and SATT This document provides application developers and testers with guidance on installing and using the Workstation Interactive Test Tool Version 1 Release 2 and the Software Analysis Test Tool Version 1 Release 3. It also explains the integration of those products with AD/Cycle WorkStation Platform/2 and Software Configuration and Library Manager. (140 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44.2. GG24-3979-00 COBOL Code Reengineering ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3979-00 COBOL Code Reengineering This document describes a redevelopment case study conducted on a pilot COBOL application. The document concentrates on COBOL code reengineering aspects. The document illustrates how to use the COBOL and CICS Command Level Conversion Aid to migrate from an OS/VS COBOL to a VS COBOL II environment, and explains how COBOL Structuring Facility and the VIASOFT Existing Systems Workbench can be used and combined to reengineer COBOL legacy code. This document is intended for technical professionals. At least a basic knowledge of COBOL is assumed. (252 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44.3. GG24-4021-00 Migrating Applications from Vendor Libraries to SCLM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4021-00 Migrating Applications from Vendor Libraries to SCLM This book describes and documents the process used to migrate two customer applications from CA-LIBRARIAN and ENDEVOR to ISPF/PDF Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM). The tools developed to support the migration are included. Readers can apply the techniques used and the experience gained during our project to migrations from any vendor library system to SCLM. The book is intended for project leaders, library administrators, system programmers, and application developers involved in migrating applications from vendor libraries to SCLM. It assumes that users are familiar with the basic concepts of SCLM. (192 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44.4. GG24-4038-00 AD/Cycle: Dev of CICS, IMS, DB2 & TSO using Micro Focus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4038-00 AD/Cycle: Development of CICS, IMS, DB2 and TSO Application Using Micro Focus Products & CODE/370 OS/2 workstations to develop host applications for the MVS TSO, IMS, and CICS environments, using relational (DB2) and hierarchical (DL/I) databases, VSAM files, and ISPF panels. The Micro Focus product set used in this document includes: c. o Micro Focus COBOL Workbench o Micro Focus Host Compatibility Option for IBM Database Manager o Micro Focus IMS Option o Micro Focus CICS Option o Micro Focus CICS OS/2 Option o Micro Focus 370 Assembler with ANIMATOR/370 o Micro Focus ADMVS. The IBM AD/Cycle CODE/370 product is used for deployment of the applications on the MVS platform. This document provides guidelines for setting up the Micro Focus products, migrating databases from the host to the PWS, and developing sample applications using the Micro Focus products. This document is intended for workstation administrators and COBOL programmers. A knowledge of the COBOL language is assumed. (242 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. GBOF-6323: Application Development Design and Modeling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45.1. GG24-3615-00 AD/Cycle - BACHMAN Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3615-00 AD/Cycle - BACHMAN Usage Guide This document provides guidelines for using some of the products within the BACHMAN/Re-Engineering Product Set in both the DOS and OS/2 environments and IBM DATABASE 2 (DB2). It the context of the AD/Cycle framework, it addresses data modelling, application logic, process modelling, database design and maintenance. It is intended mainly for: o Application systems analysts o Data administrators o DB2 database administrators This edition applies to: Version 2 Release 2 of IBM DATABASE 2 (Program Number 5665-DB2) Version 2 Release 2 of the BACHMAN/Re-Engineering Product Set (DOS) Version 3 Release 1 of the BACHMAN/Re-Engineering Product Set (OS/2) (218 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45.2. GG24-3651-00 AD/Cycle: CSP/AD & KnowledgeWare's IEW ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3651-00 AD/Cycle: Implementation of CSP/AD and KnowledgeWare's Information Engineering Workbench This document provides guidelines for the implementation of an AD/Cycle solution utilizing Cross System Product and an AD/Cycle front-end CASE tool. It describes several development scenarios when using the KnowledgeWare AD/Cycle Business Partner tools that support the Cross System Product External Source Format interface. The document is intended to assist those responsible for planning and implementing an AD/Cycle framework solution that includes Cross System Product/Application Development and Information Engineering Workbench. (144 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45.3. GG24-3982-00 BACHMAN/Analyst, BACHMAN/Designer, and CSP/2AD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3982-00 BACHMAN/Analyst, BACHMAN/Designer, and CSP/2AD Implementation Experiences This document describes experiences gained when using BACHMAN products to support the development of Cross System Product applications. The BACHMAN/Analyst, BACHMAN/Database Administrator, and BACHMAN/Designer products were used to model a sample application system while CSP/2AD was used to test the Cross System Product External Source Format code created using BACHMAN/Designer. Guidelines, problems, and work-arounds discovered when modeling and implementing the Cross System Product system with BACHMAN products are documented. This document is intended for programmers and database administrators that are or are considering the use of BACHMAN products and CSP/2AD as part of application development environment. General BACHMAN and CSP/2AD product knowledge is assumed. (176 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. GBOF-6324: Application Generators ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.1. GG24-3074-00 Cross Systems Product Version 3 New Function Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3074-00 Cross Systems Product Version 3 New Function Guide This document describes the new functions of version 3 of the Cross System Product. This new version supports relational data bases (SQL/DS and DB2) and is the fulfillment of IBM's statement of direction. (146 pages) 1986 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.2. GG24-3362-00 CSP/AD and High-Level Languages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3362-00 Cross Systems Product Application Development (CSP/AD) and High-Level Languages This document provides examples and guidelines for the integration of CSP/AD and High-Level Languages (COBOL II, PL/I, FORTRAN, PASCAL, REXX) in both the MVS and VM environments. The audience for this bulletin is Systems Engineers, Systems Programmers and Programmers responsible for implementing, administering and using CSP/AD with High-Level Languages. The user of this document must be familiar with CSP/AD, CSP/AE, the High-Level Languages and the operating environments. (170 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.3. GG24-3504-00 Using Easel OS/2 EE to Front-end IMS, CICS and CSP/AD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3504-00 Using Easel OS/2 EE to Front-end IMS, CICS and CSP/AD This document shows how to use Easel OS/2 EE to front-end host applications running under IMS, CICS and CSP/AD for TSO. Design guidelines and sample application code are provided for systems engineers and application developers who wish to interface to existing or new host applications. (256 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.4. GG24-3523-00 CSP3.3 New Function Overview & CSP/AD PWS Feature Exampl ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3523-00 Cross System Product 3.3 New Function Overview and CSP/AD PWS Feature Examples This document provides an overview of some of the new function available in CSP/AD Version 3 Release 3. Examples of defining applications on an OS/2 using the CSP/AD Programmable Workstation Definition Feature are provided. The impact of long names on common CSP/AD naming standards is analyzed. Suggestions for new naming standard guidelines are provided. This book is intended to support an application development group planning to install and adapt development methods to CSP/AD 3.3. (140 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.5. GG24-3583-00 CSP/370 Runtime Services V1R1 Early Experiences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3583-00 Cross System Product/370 Runtime Services V1R1 Early Experiences This document provides guidelines for the implementation and operation of the Cross System Product/370 Runtime Services V1R1 product. Application definition, testing approaches, and methods of configuring CSP/AD applications in an IMS/DC environment are explored. This document is intended to assist those who will install and use Cross System Product/370 Runtime Services V1R1. (160 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.6. GG24-3757-00 CSP Product Set: CSP/370AD V4.1 & CSP/370RS V2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3757-00 AD/Cycle Application Generators: Cross System Product Set CSP/370AD V4.1 and CSP/370RS V2.1 CSP/2AD V1.1 and CSP/2RS V1.1 This document describes the changes and enhancements to the Cross System Product set (CSP/370AD, CSP/370RS, CSP/2AD and CSP/2RS) that were announced on September 11, 1991. COBOL generation, application development on a PS/2 using CSP/2AD, and the Runtime Services products are described in detail. The Cross System Product set of products supports the development and implementation of generated COBOL applications for IMS/VS, IMS BMP, MVS/TSO, MVS CICS, MVS batch, and OS/2 (CICS OS/2) platforms. (254 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.7. GG24-3760-00 Client/Server Computing with AD/Cycle Generators ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3760-00 Client/Server Computing with AD/Cycle Application Generators (Cross System Product and EASEL) This document provides guidelines on how to design and implement a Client/Server computing system using the AD/Cycle application generators, Cross System Product and EASEL. It discusses in detail the design and implementation process and describes available Client/Server computing configurations. Source code for the applications developed during this project is included on a diskette packaged with this document. (222 pages, with 3.5 inch diskette) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.8. GG24-3923-00 AD/Cycle Library Integration: SCLM V3.4 & CSP/370AD V4.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3923-00 AD/Cycle Library Integration: SCLM V3.4 and CSP/370AD V4.1 This document describes the ISPF/PDF Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM) support for Cross System Product/370 Application Development Version 4.1 (CSP/370AD V4.1). Additional information on how to implement the SCLM interface for CSP/370AD COBOL generation, examples, and advanced topics not covered in the product publications are provided. This document is intended to assist those responsible for the implementation and administration of an SCLM environment for CSP/370AD and those who will use this combined product environment. A knowledge of CSP/370AD and SCLM is assumed. (302 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46.9. GG24-3943-00 Performance Data: CSP/370AD V4.1, CSP/370RS V2.1.... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3943-00 Performance Data: CSP/370AD V4.1, CSP/370RS V2.1, CSP/2AD V1.1, and CSP/2RS V1.1 This document provides performance data for CSP/370AD V4.1, CSP/370RS V2.1, CSP/2AD V1.1, and CSP/2RS V1.1. It provides measurements of these products in different development and execution environments. Data comparing the performance of CSP/370AD V4.1 and CSP/AD V3.3 and CSP/370RS V2.1 and CSP/AE V3.3 is also provided. This document is intended for programmers, Cross System Product administrators, and capacity planners who need to know how the use of CSP/370AD V4.1, CSP/370RS V2.1, CSP/2AD V1.1, and CSP/2RS V1.1 will change their current Cross System Product development and execution environments. A knowledge of Cross System Product Version 3 and Version 4 is assumed. (92 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. GBOF-6325: High Level Languages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47.1. GG24-3509-00 VS COBOL II Usage in a CICS/ESA and CICS/MVS Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3509-00 VS COBOL II Usage in a CICS/ESA and CICS/MVS Environment This document provides information on VS COBOL II and its use in a environment. OS/VS COBOL to VS COBOL II migration and coexistence considerations are also included. Two appendices provide examples of how to use different functions in a COBOL - CICS environment. (246 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47.2. GG24-3872-00 Cooperative Development of HLL App Using CODE/370,LE/370 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3872-00 Cooperative Development of High-Level Language Applications Using CODE/370 and LE/370 This document is intended to help customers get started with the SAA AD/Cycle CoOperative Development Environment/370 product. CODE/370 is a cross-platform, cross-language tool for cooperatively editing, compiling, and debugging applications written in high-level languages. This document contains information on how to install, integrate, customize, and use the CODE/370 product together with other related AD/Cycle products, including LE/370, COBOL/370, C/370, DB2, IMS, CICS, and SCLM. The program development tasks covered include edit, precompile, compile, link, bind, run, and debug. This document assumes that you understand how to: o create and edit an HLL program o compile and link an HLL program o debug and run an HLL program (208 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47.3. GG24-3910-00 IBM High Level Assembler for MVS, VM and VSE Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3910-00 IBM High Level Assembler for MVS, VM and VSE Presentation This document provides materials for three presentations describing the IBM High Level Assembler/MVS & VM & VSE. The presentations are: o An Executive Summary, explaining the benefits and value of High Level Assembler o A Technical Overview, giving a summary of the new technical features of High Level Assembler o A Survey of Technical Details, containing information about many of the new technical features of High Level Assembler and some illustrative examples. (178 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. GBOF-6326: Artificial Intelligence and Knowledge Based Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48.1. GG24-3247-00 Knowledgetool Exploitation in a DB/DC Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3247-00 Knowledgetool Exploitation in a DB/DC Environment This document provides guidelines for using KT Release 1 in the large MVS/DB2/IMS/CICS environment. It complements the standard KT User's Guide and Reference. This bulletin addresses expert system developers who want to complement commercial applications with AI technology. (126 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48.2. GG24-3355-00 A Development Method for Expert Sys Environment R2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3355-00 A Development Method for Expert Systems Environment Release 2.0 This document provides guidelines for the evolutionary development of expert systems using Expert System Environment Release 2.0 in the TSO or CMS environment, which can be executed in the MVS/DB2/IMS/CICS environments. This bulletin addresses expert system developers to complement commercial applications with AI technology. (206 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48.3. GG24-3436-00 Usage Guide for Expert System Environment Release 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3436-00 Usage Guide for Expert System Environment Release 2.0 This document provides guidelines and checkpoints to consider when designing ESE knowledge-based applications. It covers: o Data Integrity o Application Structure and Control o Application Maintenance o Application Testing o Performance o Integration with other Applications and Products This document is intended to help the user install, migrate, tune, diagnose and customize the ESE environment. It primarily contains the information needed to perform these tasks. (96 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48.4. GG24-3776-00 AD/Cycle TIRS V1 R2 MVS Subsystem Installation Notes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3776-00 AD/Cycle - The Integrated Reasoning Shell (TIRS) Version 1 Release 2 MVS Subsystem Installation Notes This document describes installing AD/Cycle - The Integrated Reasoning Shell (TIRS) Builder/370 Version 1 Release 2 (1.2) and AD/Cycle - The Integrated Reasoning Shell (TIRS) Runtime/370 Version 1 Release 2 (1.2) on an MVS/ESA system to use a TIRS/MVS subsystem (a new feature with TIRS 1.2) and explains how to use the KCARDB sample application to verify subsystem installation. Hints and tips on planning how to run and manage a TIRS/MVS subsystem are included. (84 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48.5. GG24-3777-00 Application Development Using IBM PROLOG for OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3777-00 Application Development Using IBM PROLOG for OS/2 This document describes the use of IBM PROLOG for OS/2 (IBM PROLOG) and the IBM PROLOG Language Workbench/2 (IPW/2) for programmable workstation application development. It explains the integration of a customized Presentation Manager front end, OS/2 Database Manager use, and an EASEL for OS/2 Extended Edition graphical user interface with IBM PROLOG for OS/2. The document also describes the use of named pipes with IBM PROLOG in a single workstation and token-ring LAN Client-Server environment. Tips and techniques for IBM PROLOG and IPQ/2 programming are presented. (372 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48.6. GG24-3825-00 IMS Applications with the AD/Cycle TIRS/MVS Subsystem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3825-00 Integrating IMS Applications with the AD/Cycle - TIRS/MVS Subsystem This document describes using AD/Cycle-The Integrated Reasoning Shell (TIRS) Builder/370 1.2.1 and Runtime/370 1.2.1 on an MVS/ESA system communicating with the TIRS/MVS subsystem, developing an IMS/ESA application for use with the TIRS/MVS subsystem, and developing an IMS application including the use of the Batch Terminal Simulator and DB2. Readers will also want to have available a companion document, AD/Cycle-The Integrated Reasoning Shell (TIRS) Version 1 Release 2 MVS Subsystem Installation Notes (GG24-3776) to fully exploit the information in this document. (76 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48.7. GG24-3901-00 Developing and Integrating a TIRS Knowledge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3901-00 Developing and Integrating a TIRS Knowledge Application with AD/Cycle Products This document describes how the development and use of a knowledge based system were integrated with AD/Cycle tools and software. This document is intended to assist software developers in their integrated use of AD/Cycle products throughout the development life cycle. The development project shown in this book uses AD/Cycle components for library management (SCLM), cooperative development (WSP/2), knowledge based system development (TIRS), database management (DB2), programming language (COBOL), and controlled testing (WITT). (328 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. GBOF-6327: Object Oriented Technology ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49.1. GG24-3566-00 Object-Oriented Analysis of the ITSO Common Scenario ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3566-00 Object-Oriented Analysis of the ITSO Common Scenario This document describes a subset of the business requirements of a car dealership servicing and repair operation which are based on information from two application packages: 1. application implemented at Porsche Austria/EXTERNA 2. Package 5777-WBB, developed by APDC Vienna (246 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49.2. GG24-3801-00 Cooperative Processing in an Object-Oriented Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3801-00 Cooperative Processing in an Object-Oriented Environment This document describes the results of a joint project between the ITSO and the Cary laboratory, which was aimed at investigating the practical aspects of building cooperative applications using object-oriented technology. On the programmable workstation side, object-oriented technology is used to implement the front-end of the cooperative application. For implementation purposes, the object-oriented environment is Smalltalk/V PM version 1.3 running under the IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.3 operating system. Back-end services are implemented using CICS OS/2 1.2 in simulation of a host CICS. Readers should have a basic familiarity with object-oriented concepts and with cooperative processing. (168 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49.3. GG24-3859-00 OO Technology in the Application Development Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3859-00 Object-Oriented Technology in the Application Development Environment This publication is intended to provide managers, analysts, project leaders, and users with an understanding of the role of object-oriented technology in the development of computer-based applications. It presents a perspective on the impact of object-oriented technology in the application development life cycle, and analyzes the tools and techniques used in an object-oriented development environment. The life cycle of an object-oriented application is illustrated by a step-by-step development example, from requirements to code. (170 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49.4. GG24-4165-00 Experiences with SOMobjects: Distributed Sys Object Model ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ NEW GG24-4165-00 Experiences with SOMobjects: Distributed System Object Model This document describes experiences gathered while developing a sample application with the SOMobjects Developer Toolkit. The Distributed System Object Model (DSOM) framework was used extensively and is therefore the context in which most of the information will be presented. This book will supplement the documentation provided with the SOMobjects Developer Toolkit. A diskette is shipped with this book that will contain all of the source files for the sample application developed. This document was written for application developers that will be using the SOMobjects Developer Toolkit. Some knowledge of C/C++ and object-oriented program development is assumed. It is recommended that the SOMobjects Develop Toolkit documentation be read prior to or in conjunction with the reading of this document. (148 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. GBOF-6328: CICS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.1. GG24-1625-00 DBRC and Data Sharing for the CICS/VS User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1625-00 DBRC and Data Sharing for the CICS/VS User CICS 1.6.1 exploits DBRC R3 and IMS 1.3 Data Sharing. This document describes the new function available for Recovery Control and sharing DL/I data at the Data Base and Block levels between CICS and IMS subsystems on the same processor or on multiple local processors. Procedures and recommendations are included for installing the software, implementation, and operational use in the environment of multiple on-line CICS-DL/I and Batch DL/I subsystems within a single processor under MVS. (220 pages) 1984 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.2. GG24-3108-00 CICS/VS Multiple Region Planning Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3108-00 CICS/VS Multiple Region Planning Guide This book is intended to help data processing managers and their technical staff to plan for a CICS/VS system which spans multiple MVS regions. Its main objectives are: o explain the potential benefits compared to single region systems o describe and compare the techniques available o provide a methodology for designing viable configurations o consolidate information about known problems and their solutions (112 pages) 1986 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.3. GG24-3224-00 CICS MRO Tuning and Performance Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3224-00 CICS MRO Tuning and Performance Guide This guide provides CICS users with practical advice on the tuning and performance aspects of MRO systems. The audience for this document is customer systems programmers and IBM Systems Engineers with responsibilities for tuning and performance of CICS-MRO system. Major topics covered are: o CICS-MRO Introduction o Tuning Parameters in CICS MRO o CICS MRO Systems with TOR and AOR o CICS MRO Systems with DOR o CICS MRO Systems with Multiples TORs and AORs o CICSPARS/MVS (96 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.4. GG24-3295-00 SAA and LU6.2 Considerations on CICS/MVS Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3295-00 SAA and LU6.2 Considerations on CICS/MVS Applications This document contains guidelines on CICS/MVS application design in an SAA environment using LU6.2 communication. Techniques used to distribute applications and/or functions at a programmable workstation are also described. The recommendations are implemented in a set of sample application programs, with skeleton source code provided in an appendix. (126 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.5. GG24-3319-00 CICS/MVS Overseer Program Customization Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3319-00 CICS/MVS Overseer Program Customization Guide This guide provides CICS users with additional information in using and customizing the CICS/MVS Overseer Program. The audience for this document is customer systems programmers and IBM Systems Engineers with responsibilities for tuning CICS/MVS restart procedures in an XRF environment. Major topics covered are: o Introduction o Customizing the Sample Overseer Program o Automatic Start/Stop of an Alternate CICS/XRF o Automatic Stop/Start of DB2 o Automatic Takeover After VTAM Failures o Implementation Summary (86 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.6. GG24-3375-00 CICS/MVS Security Guidelines using RACF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3375-00 CICS/MVS Security Guidelines using RACF This guide provides CICS users with guidelines on how to implement security in a CICS/MVS environment using RACF. The intended audience comprises all those involved in planning and implementing security in CICS/MVS installations, particularly CICS system programmers and IBM systems engineers. Major topics covered are: o Introduction o The CICS/MVS-RACF Interface o Security in a CICS/MVS Single Region Environment o Security in a CICS/MVS-MRO Environment o CICS/MVS-RACF Administration o Implementation Checklist (72 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.7. GG24-3484-00 CICS/ESA and IMS/ESA: DBCTL Migration for CICS Users ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3484-00 CICS/ESA and IMS/ESA: DBCTL Migration for CICS Users This document contains information on the CICS-ESA-IMS/ESA/DBCTL interface. It supplements the product manuals and services as a guide for CICS users implementing the DBCTL facility of IMS/ESA. Planning, installation, migration and operational aspects are covered. Appendices contain details of various error situations that can arise. (200 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.8. GG24-3508-00 Data Propagation - Introduction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3508-00 Data Propagation - Introduction This document describes the planning tasks for the installation and customization of the IBM Data Propagator MVS/ESA. Different data propagation models and the functions provided by the IBM Data Propagator MVS/ESA are covered. This document supplements the standard IBM data Propagator MVS/ESA publications and should be used in conjunction with proper publications. It is intended for professionals involved in planning an IMS/DB - DB2 database coexistence environment using the IBM Data Propagator MVS/ESA for data propagation. (124 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.9. GG24-3541-00 CICS OS/2 and CICS/ESA Cooperative Processing... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3541-00 CICS OS/2 and CICS/ESA Cooperative Processing: Implementation Examples This document contains information on the CICS OS/2 interface with a host CICS system. It describes the functions provided by CICS OS/2 in association with a host CICS system and suggests ways of using those functions. The document details three CICS OS/2 configurations that were set up, describes how they can be used in a cooperative environment, and includes the programs that were developed to test the various CICS OS/2 functions. This edition applies to CICS/ESA Version 3.1.1 and CICS OS/2 OS/2 Version 1.20. (278 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.10. GG24-3728-00 Client/Server Computing with Transaction Processing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3728-00 Client/Server Computing Application Design Guidelines A Transaction Processing Perspective This document is an overview of Client/Server computing intended to help managers, analysts, and project leaders evaluate, develop, and design applications in a transaction processing environment. It reviews Client/Server computing implementations using current technology products and software. The document presents considerations and guidelines that will assist in designing Client/Server computing applications running on SAA platforms. It focuses on those areas of Client/Server computing design and implementation that affect data integrity, consistency, and availability. (144 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.11. GG24-3768-00 OS/2 & CICS/ESA Dist Function Implement Example with CPI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3768-00 OS/2 and CICS/ESA Distributed Function Implementation Example with CPI Communications This document is intended for customers who are planning to implement an SAA cooperative processing application with distributed functions between OS/2 client and CICS/ESA server environments using SAA Common Programming Interface Communications (CPI Communications). This document provides an implementation example of a sample cooperative processing application and covers: o CPI Communications communication programs in the OS/2 and CICS/ESA environments. o Server application programs in the CICS/ESA environment o General service programs, such as code conversion, in the OS/2 and CICS/ESA environments. (188 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.12. GG24-3769-00 Data Integrity in a Cooperative Processing Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3769-00 Data Integrity in a Cooperative Processing Environment This document is intended to help customers design a cooperative processing application with distributed functions and data. Hints are provided on how to maintain the integrity of the data distributed across multiple unlike data resource managers. On the programmable workstation the data is assumed to reside in Operating System/2 Database Manager tables. On the host, however, the data is not necessarily in a relational database; it could reside in a VSAM or a flat file. The document contains sample design and code of an application using CICS/ESA 3.2.1 and OS/2 EE 1.3. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the basic concepts of cooperative processing, data integrity and data recovery. (148 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.13. GG24-3805-00 CICS Transaction Design: Pseudo-Conversational ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3805-00 CICS Transaction Design: Pseudo-Conversational or Conversational Recent developments in CICS, specifically the virtual storage constraint relief provided in CICS/ESA Version 3.2, have led to the suggestion that all future CICS applications should be designed using conversational techniques. This document outlines the reasons why pseudo-conversational design is still the recommended approach for most CICS applications. (56 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.14. GG24-3855-00 Designing Client-Server Applications with CICS & GUI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3855-00 Designing Client-Server Applications with CICS and a GUI: A Practical Guide This book is a practical guide to designing a cooperative processing application using client-server design, a graphical user interface, and CICS servers. Although the specific project on which the book is based used EASEL to provide the graphical user interface, the book approaches client-server design in a general manner. (158 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.15. GG24-3939-00 Security in a CICS OS/2-CICS/ESA LU6.2 Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3939-00 Security in a CICS OS/2-CICS/ESA LU6.2 Environment This document describes how the standard facilities of CICS/ESA, CICS OS/2, OS/2 Communications Manager, and RACF combine to provide security in an LU6.2 environment. It presents the various parameters that can be defined and explains the effects of each parameter. The document also presents some of the issues involved in implementing security in a CICS and LU6.2 environment. (102 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.16. GG24-4017-00 Client/Server Applications with CICS OS/2 V 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4017-00 Planning for Client/Server Applications with CICS OS/2 Version 2.0 This document describes the new functions of CICS OS/2 Version 2.0. The document presents a functional overview of the new features and reviews in detail the external call interface, the external presentation interface, and the enhancements in the areas of file control, sync pointing, security, performance, and attachment of ASCII terminals. It also describes the improved coordination with DB2/2. Sample code related to the external call interface and security is presented. Configuration samples are included on how to set up connections between CICS OS/2 Version 2.0 and CICS/ESA and how to connect ASCII terminals. This document is intended for technical professionals who are working in the area of client/server computing in transaction processing environments. (198 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.17. GG24-4026-00 CICS/ESA and TCP/IP for MVS Sockets Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4026-00 CICS/ESA and TCP/IP for MVS Sockets Interface This document gives practical advice for implementing, operating and writing applications that use the IBM CICS to TCP/IP Version 2 Release 2.1 for MVS Sockets Interface (part of 5735 -HAL- TCP/IP Version 2 Release 2.1 for MVS). This document is intended for technical professionals involved in the involved in the planning, installation, programming and/or maintenance TCP/IP application that involves a CICS/ESA system. A knowledge of application programming under CICS (in either COBOL or C) and basics of coding TCP/IP sockets applications is assumed. (212 pages With 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50.18. GG24-4185-00 CICS/VSE V2R2 Data in Memory & Virtual Storage Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4185-00 CICS/VSE Version 2 Release 2 Data in Memory and Virtual Storage Usage This document describes CICS/VSE 2.2 and its exploitation of Data in Memory (DIM). It provides information on the benefits and costs of the various DIM implementations that are available in this release, and also contrasts them with other options which exist to reduce or remove the cost of I/O operations. This document is intended for IBM technical professionals and for customer systems programming and planning personnel who need to know the costs and benefits of the new options for DIM which are available. A knowledge of CICS/VSE and VSE/VSAM is assumed, together with knowledge of performance measurement and tuning. (150 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. GBOF-6329: IMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.1. GG24-1633-00 Guide to IMS/VS V1 R3 Data Entry Data Base (DEDB) Facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1633-00 Guide to IMS/VS V1 R3 Data Entry Data Base (DEDB) Facility This document contains information on the DEDB facility available in IMS/VS Version 1 Release 3. It is intended to be used as a reference guide by systems designers, data base administrators, systems programmers and application programmers. The guide provides a wide range of information from overview to a detailed description of the DEDB facility, including considerations on installation and recovery. (314 pages) 1984 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.2. GG24-1652-00 IMS/VS Version 1 Release 3 Recovery/Restart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1652-00 IMS/VS Version 1 Release 3 Recovery/Restart IMS/VS 1.3 has changed significantly since the earlier releases. The System and Recovery components, as well as their new facilities, are described. Internal processes, utilities, commands and datasets are discussed. (196 pages) 1984 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.3. GG24-1684-00 IMS/VS Fast Path Application Design ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1684-00 IMS/VS Fast Path Application Design This document is intended for the application designers in the IMS/VS Fast Path mixed mode environment. IMS/VS Fast Path is an integrated part of IMS/VS and the designer should use the Fast Path and the Full Function resources that are best suited to meet the application requirement. The document will give guidelines on when to choose Fast Path resources and when to choose Full Function resources. All phases of a project are described based on the assumption that most applications in the future will use a mixture of Fast Path and Full Function resources. (200 pages) 1985 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.4. GG24-1749-00 IMS/VS HDAM to DEDB Conversion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1749-00 IMS/VS HDAM to DEDB Conversion This document is intended for installations considering usage of Data Entry Data Bases (DEDBs) instead of HDAM DL/1 databases. It assumes a thorough knowledge of HDAM facilities and can be used to estimate the work needed to convert from an HDAM to a DEDB. It can also be used to get a quick overview of the differences between the two database types. Many HDAM databases and applications can be converted to DEDBs without programming changes. (42 pages) 1986 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.5. GG24-3066-00 IMS/VS V2 R2 Offline Print Dump - User Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3066-00 IMS/VS V2 R2 Offline Print Dump - User Guide This guide introduces and describes the IMS/VS V2 R2 Offline Dump Formatter facility. It is written primarily for the IMS/VS Systems Programmer. It may also be of interest to other people who are supporting IMS/VS installations. (95 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.6. GG24-3149-00 IMS/VS Automated Operations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3149-00 IMS/VS Automated Operations This bulletin describes the results of a project conducted at the International Technical Support Organization (ITSO) Santa Teresa. This documentation gives guidelines how automated operations can be implemented for the IMS environment. The NetView product and the new functions and facilities of IMS/VS V2 R1 and its Data Base Recovery Control feature (DBRC) were used to automate various tasks. The areas of IMS automation include system startup, shutdown, monitoring, time initiated input of command and event handling such as automated recovery for DL/1 or DEDB data bases. The publication contains a description of the test environment, the various scenarios and test results including the procedures used. (156 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.7. GG24-3150-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): General Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3150-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): General Information This document provides an overall picture of XRF. It describes the basic concepts and terminologies of XRF and how MVS/XA, DFP/XA, IMS/VS, VTAM and NCP work together with XRF. Related publications include: o GG24-3151: IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Planning o GG24-3152: IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Implementation o GG24-3153: IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Technical Reference (84 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.8. GG24-3151-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Planning ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3151-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Planning The intent of this document is to provide Systems Engineers with the basic information to assist the customer in planning for XRF before receiving the XRF code. (70 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.9. GG24-3152-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3152-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Implementation This document is addressed specifically to the systems programmers responsible for installing the XRF products. (82 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.10. GG24-3153-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Technical Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3153-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Technical Reference IMS XRF support is provided to improve system availability for an IMS on-line system by introducing a second system to take over the workload in the event of a failure. This document describes the new functions in support of XRF provided by IMS, MVS/XA, VTAM and NCP. (112 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.11. GG24-3154-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Operation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3154-00 IMS/VS Extended Recovery Facility (XRF): Operation and Recovery This document describes operations and recovery for an IMS XRF environment. It is written to help an installation to implement operational and recovery procedures for IMS XRF. (130 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.12. GG24-3203-00 IMS/VS: A Planning Guide for IBM Database 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3203-00 IMS/VS: A Planning Guide for IBM Database 2 This document provides planning information on connecting, implementing and using the attachment of a DB2 system to an existing IMS/VS production environment. Some of the information may also apply to other environments (like CICS/VS), but this bulletin deals ONLY with the IMS/VS Data Base/Data Communication environment. It is intended for system planners, application planners and security administrators. (134 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.13. GG24-3217-00 Query.DL/I Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3217-00 Query.DL/I Implementation Guide This bulletin provides hints and tips regarding how to install, implement and customize release 1.2 of the IBM Query.DL/I Licensed Program (5665-462) for IMS/VS and CICS/OS/VS, or IBM Query.DL/I Licensed Program (5666-351) for CICS/DOS/VS. This bulletin supplements the standard Query.DL/I publications. This bulletin is intended for system programmers and data base administrators. (104 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.14. GG24-3282-00 IMS/VS MSC/ISC Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3282-00 IMS/VS MSC/ISC Implementation This bulletin provides hints and tips regarding how to install, implement and customize IMS/VS Interconnection between two IMS/VS systems and an ISC connection with IMS/VS and CICS/OS/VS. This bulletin supplements standard IMS/VS publications and should be used in accordance with proper IMS/VS publications. This bulletin is intended for those who are involved with installing, customizing and implementing MSC or ISC in an IMS/VS environment. (130 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.15. GG24-3293-00 IMS/VS 2.2 Overnight Processing Benchmark Report ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3293-00 IMS/VS 2.2 Overnight Processing Benchmark Report This document describes the results of a benchmark run of the overnight processing workloads required for an Information Management System/ Virtual Storage (IMS/VS) Version 2 Release 2 (5665-332) Application. Included is a description of the workloads measured, and the benchmark environment, but the document does NOT include detailed analysis of the workload characteristics, or the internal jobs within the major processing steps. This document is intended to be used by personnel involved in planning, designing and implementing IMS/VS applications. (50 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.16. GG24-3323-00 IMS/VS LU 6.2 ADAPTER Function and Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3323-00 IMS/VS LU 6.2 ADAPTER Function and Implementation This document describes the IMS LU6.1 Adapter for LU6.2 applications. It provides hints and tips for installing, implementing, and customizing the Adapter for LU6.2 Application. It gives information about the functions and connectivity possibilities the Adapter provides. APPC application design and error recovery are also covered. This document supplements standard IMS/VS publications and should be used in accordance with proper IMS/VS publications. This bulletin is intended for those involved with installing, customizing and implementing the Adapter for LU6.2 applications or connecting Intelligent Workstations to IMS/VS. (114 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.17. GG24-3324-00 Writing IMS SAA Applications: A Design Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3324-00 Writing IMS SAA Applications: A Design Guide This bulletin describes some SAA considerations for IMS applications and provides hints and tips regarding how to develop IMS applications according to SAA rules. Usage of programmable workstation in an IMS environment is also covered. This bulletin supplements standard IMS publications and should be used in accordance with proper IMS publications. This bulletin is intended for those involved with designing of IMS applications or in implementing programmable workstation into IMS. (162 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.18. GG24-3325-00 Guide to IMS with MVS/ESA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3325-00 Guide to IMS with MVS/ESA This document describes new data management facilities of MVS/ESA which can benefit an IMS installation. It should assist IMS system programmers, who are considering to migrate the current IMS/VS subsystem to an MVS/ESA environment. For further details, corresponding documentation is listed at the end of each chapter. (94 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.19. GG24-3333-00 Data Base Recovery Control: Examples and Usage Hints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3333-00 Data Base Recovery Control: Examples and Usage Hints This document provides usage tips and hints for an environment that is fully controlled by DBRC. Special emphasis is put on recovery- restart scenarios with a wide offering of practical examples. All examples are based on the current level of DBRC. The audience for this bulletin will be the system programmers, the data base administrators, and the operation personnel responsible for implementing, administering and using DBRC. (160 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.20. GG24-3443-00 IMS/VS MSC/ISC Performance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3443-00 IMS/VS MSC/ISC Performance This bulletin describes performance considerations for MSC and ISC links in an IMS environment and shows the result of the MSC/ISC benchmark in an IMS/VS Version 2, Release 2 environment. This bulletin is intended for those involved with debugging or investigating performance-related issues for MSC/ISC links. (64 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.21. GG24-3445-00 Guide to Migration from IMS/VS V1 to IMS/ESA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3445-00 Guide to Migration from IMS/VS V1 to IMS/ESA This document describes the planning and implementation tasks required to migrate an IMS/VS V1 system to IMS/ESA. It should assist IMS System Programmers, Database Administrators, and Operations Staff who have been assigned this responsibility. (130 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.22. GG24-3609-00 Data Propagation - Solution Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3609-00 Data Propagation - Solution Guide This document describes the preparations, installation and customization tasks for the IBM Data Propagator MVS/ESA Version 1 Release 1. Different modes of data propagation and the appropriate functions are provided by the IBM Data Propagator MVS/ESA are covered. This document supplements the standard IBM Data Propagator MVS/ESA publications and should be used in conjunction with those and other related publications. It is intended for professionals involved in preparing or customizing an IMS/DB-DB2 database coexistence environment using the IBM Data Propagator MVS/ESA for data propagation. (330 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.23. GG24-3812-00 Cooperative Processing Solutions Using IMS Client Server/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3812-00 Cooperative Processing Solutions Using IMS Client Server/2 This document shows how to write IMS Client Server/2 applications. Sample applications are provided for systems engineers and application developers who wish to interface to IMS host applications. (140 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.24. GG24-3980-00 IMS/ESA V4 ETO Installation and Planning Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3980-00 IMS/ESA Version 4 Extended Terminal Option (ETO) Installation and Planning Guide This document covers the implementation of Extended Terminal Option (ETO), a separately priced feature of IMS/ESA Transaction Manager. The ETO feature is discussed and installation experiences, including the coding of exits are described. (162 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.25. GG24-3981-00 Client/Server Computing with IMS/ESA Using APPC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3981-00 Client/Server Computing with IMS/ESA Using APPC This document describes the APPC implementation of IMS/ESA Version 4 Release 1. It provides an overview of client/server concepts, APPC and IMS concepts, and how IMS/ESA Version 4 Release 1 has implemented APPC support. The document explains how the MVS, IMS, and OS/2 environments must be configured to communicate with IMS using APPC. The document provides sample programs using CPI Communications written in REXX that run in the TSO/E and IMS environments. It also provides sample programs written in EASEL that run in the OS/2 environment and communicate with the IMS installation verification programs, phone book and parts. This document is intended for technical professionals who plan to use APPC or CPI Communications to communicate with IMS/ESA. (202 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.26. GG24-3986-00 Data Propagator V1R1 Implementing a Receiver Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3986-00 Data Propagator V1R1 Implementing a Receiver Program for Asynchronous Propagation This document provides detailed information for those users of the Data Propagator (DProp) product who design or write a receiver program to implement asynchronous propagation. It expands on the information in Chapter 19, "Asynchronous Data Propagation," of the DProp V1 R1 Administration Guide(SC26-4738). A knowledge of Data Propagator (DProp) MVS/ESA is assumed. (62 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51.27. GG24-4010-00 IMS/ESA Performance and Tuning Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4010-00 IMS/ESA Performance and Tuning Guide The objective of this document is to provide the IMS/ESA user with guidelines for evaluating system performance and tuning the IMS environment. This document is intended for IMS/ESA systems programmers. An in-depth knowledge of IMS/ESA is assumed. (292 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. GBOF-6330: DB2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.1. GG24-1581-00 IBM Database 2 Relational Concepts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1581-00 IBM Database 2 Relational Concepts This document describes the relational approach to data base systems in general and to IBM DATABASE 2 (DB2) in particular. The relationship between IMS/VS DL/I and DB2 applications is also covered. The intended audience is DP professionals who wish to understand the relational model of data and how it is implemented in DB2. (80 pages) 1983 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.2. GG24-1583-00 IBM Database 2 SQL Usge Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1583-00 IBM Database 2 SQL Usge Guide This document demonstrates the power of Structured Query Language (SQL), a data base management language which permits IBM DATABASE 2 (DB2) users to access and manipulate data in relational data bases. This document is intended for DP professionals who wish to obtain a good functional knowledge of SQL. (156 pages) 1983 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.3. GG24-3180-00 DB2 Operations and Recovery Sample Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3180-00 DB2 Operations and Recovery Sample Procedures This bulletin provides operations and recovery guidance. It can be used by DB2 System Administrators and Data Base Administrators to help them address the planning and definition of backup and recovery strategies. It provides examples of operation, maintenance, recovery and restart procedures. These procedures may be used by DB2 System Administrators and Data Base Administrators to help them tailor procedures in their own installation. (182 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.4. GG24-3189-00 Data Base Relational Application Directory DBRAD Gde ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ .GG24-3189-00 Data Base Relational Application Directory DBRAD Usage Guide This document provides guidelines on how to use the DBRAD product to improve control over all your relational applications and to provide productivity for your data base administration and application programming. (186 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.5. GG24-3200-00 Introduction to Distributed Relational Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3200-00 Introduction to Distributed Relational Data This bulletin explains the need for, the possible functions in, and complexities of a Distributed Data Base Management System (D-DBMS) based on the relational data model. Its purpose is to help managers, administrators, and analysts understand the impact of distributed applications in their installation. (104 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.6. GG24-3261-00 DB2 V2 Presentation Guide: Vol 1 Overview Referential ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3261-00 IBM Database 2 Version 2 Presentation Guide: Volume 1 Overview, Referential Integrity The purpose of this document is to allow DB2 Specialists to familiarize themselves with the new functions and enhancements included in DB2 Version 2. (398 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.7. GG24-3262-00 DB/2 V2 Presentation Gde: Vol 2 Operational, Utilities ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3262-00 IBM Database 2 Version 2 Presentation Guide: Volume 2 Operational, Utilities, Performance The purpose of this document is to allow DB2 Specialists to familiarize themselves with the new functions and enhancements included in DB2 Version 2. (552 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.8. GG24-3299-00 DB2 V2 R1 Security & Authorization Extensions Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3299-00 DB2 Version 2 Release 1 Security and Authorization Extensions Guide The purpose of this document is to assist DB2 System Administrators, DB2 Database Administrators and Security Administrators in understanding and implementing the extended Security and Authorization functions included in DB2 Version 2 Release 1. (170 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.9. GG24-3300-00 DB2 Version 2 Release 1 Audit Trace Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3300-00 DB2 Version 2 Release 1 Audit Trace Usage Guide The purpose of this document is to help DB2 System Administrators, DB2 Database Administrators, and DP Auditors to understand and implement the Audit function provided with DB2 Version 2 Release 1. (106 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.10. GG24-3312-00 IBM Database 2 Referential Integrity Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3312-00 IBM Database 2 Referential Integrity Usage Guide This document describes Referential Integrity (RI) in DB2 V2 R1. It documents the considerations and recommendations involved in implementing applications using RI within an installation. (224 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.11. GG24-3331-00 IBM Database 2 Version 2 Release 1 Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3331-00 IBM Database 2 Version 2 Release 1 Usage Guide The purpose of this document is to give new DB2 users some suggestions for implementing their first DB2 system. This type of document has already existed for some time in Switzerland as well as several other countries. Although intended for first-time DB2 users, it also provides useful information for more experienced customers. This document deals with one single DB2 system only and does not discuss the aspects of distributed databases. (192 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.12. GG24-3371-00 DB2 Usage in the DFSMS Environment - Part 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3371-00 DB2 Usage in the DFSMS Environment - Part 2 This document provides implementation guidelines and sample scenarios for the usage of DB2 in a DFSMS installation. It assists Storage Administrators, Database Administrators and IBM Systems Engineers in implementing and using DB2 in a DFSMS environment. (116 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.13. GG24-3377-00 QMF Advanced Application Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3377-00 QMF Advanced Application Examples This document illustrates, by example, advanced implementation of QMF, using extensively the new features available with QMF Version 2 Release 3. The scenarios described either use standard QMF functions, or enhance the provided QMF commands through appropriate synonyms. It is intended for: o QMF Support Personnel o Advanced QMF users o Information Center Support o QMF Application Developers (256 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.14. GG24-3383-00 DB2 V2 R2 Design Guidelines for High Performance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3383-00 DB2 Version 2 Release 2 Design Guidelines for High Performance This book is intended to provide experienced DB2 System Administrators, DB2 Database Administrators and DB2 Programmers guidance information on how to design applications in DB2 with high performance requirements. (170 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.15. GG24-3390-00 DB2 Version 2 Release 2 Utilities Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3390-00 DB2 Version 2 Release 2 Utilities Guide This document describes the Utility Programs provided with DB2 Version 2 Release 2. The book includes on-line utilities, off-line utilities, service aids and some sample programs. The audience for this document is those planning, implementing, and supporting DB2 applications. (250 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.16. GG24-3400-00 DB2 D-DB Application Implement/Install Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3400-00 DB2 Distributed Database Application Implementation and Installation Primer This document points out design solutions and guidelines when implementing Distributed Database Applications. It provides examples of Distributed Database Transactions developed in a TSO, IMS/VS, and CICS/VS distributed environment, and contains DB2 V2 R2 and VTAM installation and migration considerations. It is intended for: o DB2 Application Analysts o DB2 System, Database, and Communication Administrators o DB2 System and Application Programmers (382 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.17. GG24-3413-00 DB2 Performance Monitor (DB2PM) Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3413-00 DB2 Performance Monitor (DB2PM) Usage Guide This bulletin supplements the reference library for DB2PM to provide in-depth analysis of key fields in all reports, an introduction to distributed performance analysis and a primer for those staff members who are new to DB2PM. This document also provides detailed information on the use of DB2 traces. (286 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.18. GG24-3505-00 QMF Version 2 Release 4 Callable Interface Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3505-00 QMF Version 2 Release 4 Callable Interface Usage This document illustrates how Query Management Facility Version 2 Release 4 implements the SAA Callable Interface and how the SAA Callable Interface element of the SAA Query CPI is implemented. It also explains, through samples provided with the product, how to use the SAA Callable Interface. The document is written for: o Application developers o QMF support personnel o Information Center support staff o Advanced QMF users (74 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.19. GG24-3512-00 Capacity Planning for DB2 Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3512-00 Capacity Planning for DB2 Applications This document is intended as a guide for DP professionals who need to perform capacity planning for DB2 applications. It provides sufficient information for the non-DB2 person to understand the key features and functions of DB2 that will have an impact on DB2 resource consumption. It describes the techniques for estimating the amount of resource needed for an application, with an indication of the effort needed and the accuracy of the result. (194 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.20. GG24-3513-00 Distributed Relational Database - Application Scenarios ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3513-00 Distributed Relational Database - Application Scenarios This document provides four examples of applications and database designs that might benefit from using SAA Distributed Database function. These applications are designed from business requirements through to database design, to assist managers, administrators and analysts relate distributed database function to their particular needs for distributed processing. (310 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.21. GG24-3600-00 DB2-APPC/VTAM Distributed Database Usage Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3600-00 DB2-APPC/VTAM Distributed Database Usage Guide This document describes DB2-APPC/VTAM concepts and explains how DB2 uses APPC/VTAM in a Distributed Database Environment. It also describes tools that might be used in the Problem Determination arena, and Problem Determination Procedures to deal with possible issues when using Distributed Database. It is intended for: o DB2 System Administrators o DB2 Communication Administrators o DB2 System Programmers (304 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.22. GG24-3601-00 DB2 Offsite Recovery Sample Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3601-00 DB2 Offsite Recovery Sample Procedures This document addresses general disaster recovery concepts, DB2 Version 2 Release 2 and DB2 Version 2 Release 3 Recovery Functions, and their use when establishing DB2 offsite recovery procedures. It also describes the main tools available for offsite recovery and suggests sample procedures that might be used as examples when tailoring your own offsite recovery procedures. It is intended for: o DB2 system administrators o DB2 system programmers o DB2 database administrators (184 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.23. GG24-3715-00 Dist Relational Database RUW Implementation: DB2-DB2 & DB2-SQL/DS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3715-00 Distributed Relational Database Remote Unit of Work Implementation DB2-DB2 and DB2-SQL/DS Volume 1 This document describes the application and system implementation considerations for DB2 to DB2 and DB2 to SQL/DS distributed unlike environments. The book is written from a DB2 perspective and investigates application development life cycle and system management issues related to the remote unit of work (RUW) and distributed relational database architecture (DRDA). (278 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.24. GG24-3716-00 Dist Relational Database RUW Implementation: DB2-DB2 & DB2-SQL/DS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3716-00 Distributed Relational Database Remote Unit of Work Implementation DB2-DB2 and DB2-SQL/DS Volume 2 This document describes the application and system implementation for DB2 to DB2 and DB2 to SQL/DS interoperability based on the remote unit of work (RUW) and distributed relational database architecture (DRDA) protocols. The primary audience is: o DB2 application analysts o DB2 application programmers o DB2 database administrators o DB2 system programmers (148 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.25. GG24-3755-00 Dist Relational DB Planning & Design Gde for DB2 Users ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3755-00 Distributed Relational Database Planning and Design Guide for DB2 Users This document describes the planning considerations and initial design guidelines for the distributed database environment using the remote unit of work (RUW) and the distributed relational database architecture (DRDA). The book is written from a DB2 perspective and investigates DB2 interoperability mainly with the DB2 and SQL/DS SAA platforms. (214 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.26. GG24-3771-00 Dist Relational Database: Using OS/2 DRDA Client Support with DB2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3771-00 Distr Relational DB Usinf OS/2 DRDA Client Support This book is a primer for application development and database administration staff who wish to implement distributed relational database applications using the OS/2 Distributed Database Connection Services/2 (DDCS/2) product and DB2 Version 2 Release 3. The document outline IBM Extended Services for OS/2 Database Manager product packaging and distributed database facilities, and describes application program design using DDCS/2 with DB2 servers. Information about configuring OS/2 Communications Manager is included together with an overview of DDCS/2-DB2 database security processing. (168 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.27. GG24-3823-00 DB2 V2.3 Nondistributed Performance Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3823-00 DB2 V2.3 Nondistributed Performance Topics This book describes the major, nondistributed, performance-related enhancements in DB2 V2.3. Some sample performance measurements are included. A set of DB2 V2.3 SQL CPU performance estimating formulae is also provided. This book is aimed at experienced DB2 development personnel ranging from application designers to programmers, and from database administrators to systems programming and operations staff. (160 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.28. GG24-3926-00 DDCS/2 and DB2 V2.3 Distributed Relational DB Performance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3926-00 DDCS/2 and DB2 V2.3 Distributed Relational Database Performance: Early Experience This document describes the results of a series of distributed relational database performance tests that were conducted using OS/2 Extended Services DDCS/2 and DB2 Version 2 Release 3. The objectives of this document are to provide customers with an insight into the performance characteristics of DDCS/2-to-DB2 operations and to describe the main factors that can influence performance in this complex heterogeneous environment. The book also provides information about DB2-to-DB2 DRDA and private protocol operations. This book is intended for database designers, database administrators, and application developers who need to understand how to implement application systems in OS/2 and DB2 DRDA environments. (132 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.29. GG24-3952-00 DB Sys Mgmt DataHub Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3952-00 Database Systems Management: IBM SystemView Information Warehouse DataHub Presentation Guide This presentation guide describes the functions and features of the IBM SystemView Information Warehouse DataHub product. It offers a complete set of presentation material as well as a Storyboard demonstration diskette. The document is intended for customers and technical professionals who want to learn and understand how to apply the functions of the DataHub platform and tools feature. A knowledge of distributed relational database systems and Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA) connectivity is assumed. (334 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.30. GG24-3962-00 QMF V3R1M1 Remote Unit of Work Implementation and Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3962-00 QMF V3R1M1 Remote Unit of Work Implementation and Use This book describes the installation, administration, and use of the remote unit of work capability in Query Management Facility (QMF) V3R1M1 in the MVS and VM environments. This book is intended for QMF planners and administrators who intend to install or upgrade QMF to deploy the ability of QMF users on one system to easily access data managed by DB2 or SQL/DS VM on another remote system. (166 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52.31. GG24-4001-00 DB2 Packages: Implementation and Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4001-00 DB2 Packages: Implementation and Use This document is a comprehensive guide to the new package function brought by DB2 V2.3. It considers both the distributed and nondistributed environments. It provides a detailed explanation of the BIND PACKAGE function, including the use of collections and versioning, recommendations on how to implement packages, and discussion of the related performance issues. The document also provides working examples on possible package management solutions. This document is intended for customers and technical professionals who need to know how to take advantage of the new package function and to administer packages. A knowledge of DB2 V2.3, DB2 V3, and Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA) connectivity is assumed. (202 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. GBOF-6331: Data Delivery and Information Warehouse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53.1. GG24-3779-00 EDA/SQL in an Information Warehouse: Early Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3779-00 EDA/SQL in an Information Warehouse: Early Installation Experiences This document is intended to provide IBM technical professionals and IBM marketing representatives and their customers with information that will facilitate the installation and administration of Enterprise Data Access/SQL for MVS using EDA/Dynamic Extender for DB2. Positioning and recommendations for appropriate use of this product set are included. (152 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53.2. GG24-3869-00 Information Warehouse Implementation Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3869-00 Information Warehouse Implementation Overview This document describes the Information Warehouse framework and a variety of program products this framework embraces. This document is intended for information systems personnel and IBM Technical Professionals intending to implement an Information Warehouse. It is intended as a high-level overview of the concepts of the Information Warehouse framework. More detailed information of this nature is available from your IBM representative. (140 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53.3. GG24-4019-00 Information Warehouse Architecture & Information Catalog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4019-00 Information Warehouse Architecture and Information Catalog Overview This document describes the Information Warehouse(TM) architecture and the Information Catalog function defined in the Information Warehouse Architecture. It provides an overview of the Information Warehouse concepts and presents these concepts as part of Information Warehouse implementations in two specific business environments. It is intended to be a companion to the Information Warehouse publication, Information Warehouse Architecture I, SC26-3244. (120 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. GBOF-6332: Distributed Data Base ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54.1. GG24-3899-00 Client/Server Computing Design & Coding of a Business App ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3899-00 Client/Server Computing: The Design and Coding of a Business Application The document describes the design and coding of a client/server application. The application is an example taken from the banking industry and consists of the functions involved in purchasing and selling foreign currency and traveler's checks at a cashier's desk. The application contains the typical characteristics of an online transaction processing program. The client part of the application runs on an OS/2 Version 2.0 programmable workstation in the CICS OS/2 environment, with a graphical user interface written in EASEL. The server part of the application, written in COBOL, runs in the CICS/ESA and CICS OS/2 environment and uses DDCS/2 and DB2. A diskette accompanying the document contains the application objects and instructions for installing the application. (344 pages, with 3.5 inch diskette) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54.2. GG24-4031-00 DataHub Implementation and Connectivity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4031-00 Database Systems Management: IBM SystemView Information Warehouse DataHub Implementation and Connectivity This document describes the implementation of the IBM SystemView Information Warehouse DataHub family of products to operate on all SAA platforms (MVS, VM, AS/400, OS/2). It provides guidelines on how to plan for DataHub, establish connectivity links in the DRDA and APPC environments, and configure DataHub. Problem determination and security issues are considered. This document is intended for customers and technical professionals who want to install and configure DataHub. A knowledge of distributed relational databases and Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA) connectivity is assumed. (320 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. GBOF-6333: Distributed Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55.1. GG24-3482-01 Program to Program Communications in a SAA Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3482-01 Program-to-Program Communications in Systems Application Architecture (SAA) Environments The purpose of this document is to provide practical guidance in implementing program-to-program communications using the Communications element of SAA's Common Programming Interface (CPI Communications) and Advanced Program-to-Program Communication application programming interface. (412 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55.2. GG24-3727-00 Client/Server Computing Appl Design Gdelines with DRDA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3727-00 Client/Server Computing Application Design Guidelines: A Distributed Relational Data Perspective This document is intended to assist managers, analysts and project leaders in the evaluation, design and development of distributed applications that are based on the Client/Server computing model and use the capabilities of IBM's database management systems that implement the Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA). (132 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55.3. GG24-3767-00 Distributed Function Design Considerations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3767-00 Distributed Function Design Considerations This document presents some considerations for planning and designing a Systems Application Architecture (SAA) cooperative processing application distributed between programmable workstations (PWSs) and multiple, unlike host environments. The document focuses on distributed function design. A request made by an application process on a PWS is categorized as either synchronous, asynchronous, or a combination of these two processes. A request can be made by an application process on either the PWS or the host. For each request processing case, this document explains: o How a request is sent to a server o What facilities are required for transmitting requests and replies o How those facilities are provided or implemented. This book is for information systems managers, application designers, application programmers, and any other information processing personnel who want to know how: o Application processes are distributed o Distributed functions (processes) are implemented Knowledge of CICS/ESA or IMS/ESA is preferred but not mandatory. (126 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. GBOF-6334: MVS/ESA Open and Client/Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56.1. GG24-3818-00 APPC Programming Considerations in MVS/ESA and OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3818-00 APPC Programming Considerations in MVS/ESA and OS/2 This document provides information about the development of cooperative applications using the capabilities offered by APPC/MVS and Networking Services/2 in the MVS/ESA Version 4 Release 2 and OS/2 environments respectively. (284 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56.2. GG24-3819-00 APPC Application Examples in MVS/ESA and OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3819-00 APPC Application Examples in MVS/ESA and OS/2 This document provides examples of cooperative applications in an OS/2 to MVS APPC environment. The objectives, required products, APPC flows, and installation procedures of each application are described in this document. (386 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56.3. GG24-3863-00 APPC/MVS Server Facilities Presentation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3863-00 APPC/MVS Server Facilities Presentation Guide This document describes the functions provided by the Advanced Program-to-Program Communication implementation in MVS/ESA (APPC/MVS) as made available in MVS/ESA SP 4.3.0. APPC/MVS reinforces the position of MVS/ESA SP Version 4 as the provider of enterprise services by allowing remote program access to MVS services and MVS controlled data and: o Providing a basis for the implementation of client/server applications utilizing MVS/ESA's unique strengths. o Providing for cooperative work scheduling in the MVS operating system. o Extending APPC connectivity to the current MVS environments: interactive workloads under TSO/E, transactional workloads under IMS/ESA, Airlines Control System Version 2 or DataTrade MVS/ESA Edition, and batch. o Providing a foundation for current and future developments in the distributed processing environment. (232 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56.4. GG24-3867-00 MVS/ESA Support for IEEE POSIX Standards Tech Presentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3867-00 MVS/ESA Support for IEEE POSIX Standards Technical Presentation Guide This document describes the OpenEdition services, which offers support for POSIX standards on MVS/ESA. It allows MVS/ESA applications to be designed and written in compliance with POSIX 1003.1, 1003.1a, 1003.2, 1003.2a subset and 1003.4a subset draft 6. It also enables porting of applications from other conforming POSIX operating systems. This document is intended for systems programmers, application programmers, and IBM Systems Engineers who need to know the capabilities of POSIX on MVS/ESA applications. A basic knowledge of MVS/ESA, DFSMS and TSO/E is assumed. This edition applies to the Open Edition support for POSIX on MVS/ESA SP 4.3, Program Number 5695-047 for JES2 4.3 and 5695-048 for JES3 4.3. (508 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56.5. GG24-3895-00 MVS/ESA and CICS/ESA: APPC Programming and Definitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3895-00 MVS/ESA and CICS/ESA: APPC Programming and Definitions This document provides information about the APPC/MVS to CICS/ESA Version 3 Release 2 APPC environment. It introduces the CICS/ESA Version 3 Release 2 LU6.2 APIs and illustrates how CICS/ESA and APPC/MVS can be used for cooperative processing. It provides a ready-to-use application sample that exploits the LU6.2 interfaces provided by CICS/ESA Version 3 Release 2 using one of the more popular programming languages. It also provides a set of guidelines for application development and testing in a cooperative environment between a transaction running under CICS/ESA Version 3 Release 2 and a transaction program residing on MVS 4.2. The required CICS definitions to allow APPC connections with non-CICS (APPC/MVS for example) are also explained. (146 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56.6. GG24-3960-00 APPC Security: MVS/ESA, CICS/ESA, and OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3960-00 APPC Security: MVS/ESA, CICS/ESA, and OS/2 This document is intended to help users to define a security policy when APPC/MVS, CICS/ESA, and OS/2 are part of a cooperative processing application. It describes the security facilities provided by these products and outlines factors to consider when defining such policy. For this project, RACF was used to define the host security policy. The RACF general profile classes and guidance on how to define profiles on these classes is given. Security considerations when APPC/MVS is the server for CICS/ESA and OS/2 transactions, and when CICS/ESA is the server for APPC/MVS and OS/2 transactions are discussed. (172 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56.7. GG24-4069-00 The Host as a Data Server Using LANRES & Novell NetWare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4069-00 The Host as a Data Server Using LANRES and Novell NetWare This document provides approaches to using host-system resources as an extension of end-user platforms in a local area network (LAN). The Novell NetWare v3.11 server product and the IBM LAN Resource Extension and Services (LANRES) product (VM and MVS) are the central elements. The synergistic effect that can be derived from both the host and LAN-based environments when NetWare and LANRES are used together is documented, as well as ways in which customers use these products. The LANRES installation process, in both the VM and MVS environments, is given special attention. This document is intended for anyone seeking creative approaches for extending the efficiency of host and LAN-based resources and their administration. A knowledge of MVS, VM, and Novell NetWare is assumed. (180 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. GBOF-6335: OS/2 LAN and Distributed Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57.1. GG24-3959-01 Experiences with the IBM OS/2 LAN Server V3.0 New Function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3959-01 Experiences with the IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0 New Functions This document describes the major functions of the IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0 product, based on the experiences of the systems engineers who participated in projects conducted at the International Technical Support Organization-Austin. The major subjects covered are: o CED Enablement o Fault Tolerance o Remote IPL o Peer Service o Virtual LAN Device Driver o TCP/IP Support o Mac Support This second edition contains information about the differences from OS/2 2.0 to OS/2 2.1 concerning the LAN Server or LAN environment. (374 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57.2. GG24-4043-00 IBM OS/2 LAN Server V3.0 System Recovery Considerations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4043-00 The IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0 System Recovery Considerations This document/diskette describe built-in and additional recovery features of the IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0 product. It is based on the experiences of the systems engineers who participated in a project conducted at the International Support Center in Austin. This document provides guidance on recovering the LAN Server Version 3.0 system. This Document mainly discusses the system file recovery considerations. It does not intend to provide any detail on the user file backup and recovery technique. It is intended for systems engineer and customers planning system recovery strategies for IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0. It also provides some LAN Server Version 3.0 internal information. A knowledge of IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 is assumed. (204 pages with 3.5 inch diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57.3. GG24-4207-00 A Collection of IBM LAN NetView Papers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4207-00 A Collection of IBM LAN NetView Papers This document is a collection of white papers discussing the IBM LAN NetView family products. These white papers include topics ranging from general information about the products themselves to more detailed information regarding the use and and programming interfaces of the products. This document will be of interest to customers and IBM system engineers who are evaluating IBM LAN NetView as a solution for distributed management of LAN based systems. (312 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. GBOF-6336: NetWare for OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58.1. GG24-3890-00 NetWare from IBM: Network Protocols and Standards ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3890-00 NetWare from IBM: Network Protocols and Standards This document provides a description of Novell communications protocols and standards. It also offers an overview of other related network protocols and Novell's implementation of products for those environments. Topics discussed are the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model, IPX/SPX, TCP/IP, AppleTalk, ODI, and NDIS. (130 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58.2. GG24-3891-00 NetWare Requester for IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3891-00 NetWare Requester for IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 This document describes the NetWare Requester for OS/2 v2.0. It provides a guide to the installation and configuration of the NetWare Requester for OS/2, and an introduction to the underlying communications concepts. This document is intended for systems engineers and systems integrators who need to have an understanding of the NetWare Requester for OS/2 environment. A knowledge of OS/2 V2.0, Extended Services, IBM LAN Server, and the NetWare environment is assumed. (144 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. GBOF-6337: AIX Communications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59.1. GG24-3489-00 AIX Distributed Environments: NFS, NCS, RPC, DS Migration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3489-00 AIX Distributed Environments: NFS, NCS, RPC, DS Migration, LAN Maintenance and Everything This publication is intended for IBM systems engineers, authorized dealers of AIX-based systems and customers as an aid to using and customizing the distributed environment functions of AIX. Products covered in this publication are: o Network File System (NFS) o Network Computing System (NCS) o Distributed Services (DS) (408 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59.2. GG24-3686-00 Crafting NetWare for AIX Installing and Config NetWare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ G24-3686-00 Crafting NetWare for AIX Installing and Configuring NetWare for AIX/6000 from IBM V3.11 NetWare for AIX/6000 from IBM V3.11, or NetWare for AIX, was announced by IBM in January 1992. NetWare for AIX provides an implementation of NetWare file and print serving functions in an AIX 3.2 environment. This document discusses how these services are implemented, and how to perform basic NetWare for AIX server configuration tasks. This document is aimed at helping people such as systems engineers, systems managers, and IBM customers to understand and implement NetWare for AIX. This document will also assist those with existing NetWare skills, such as Certified NetWare Engineers, to understand NetWare for AIX and how it differs from native NetWare. (132 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59.3. GG24-3692-01 AIX/V3 X.25 Communications Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3692-01 AIX/V3 X.25 Communications Cookbook This document describes the setup and test of X.25 communications on the RISC System/6000. It explains step-by-step how to install hardware and software, customize the X.25 support, test the connection to the network and establish a virtual call between two systems. The setup of TCP/IP, of a PAD, and of the SNA 3270 emulator in an X.25 environment are also described. For each subject, commented examples show how to proceed, what results should be obtained and how to identify and fix problems that may occur. Technical details about the X.25 protocol are included in each chapter when they can help problem determination. This document is intended for customers and system engineers that plan to install X.25 communications on the RISC System/6000. A knowledge of AIX/V3 is assumed. (274 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59.4. GG24-3826-00 Experience Using OSI Messaging & Filing for RISC Sys/6000 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ G24-3826-00 Experiences Using OSI Messaging and Filing for the RISC System/6000 This document describes the AIX Open System Interconnection Messaging and Filing PPO for the RISC System/6000 (OSIMF/6000). It provides information about the customization and configuration of the OSIMF/6000 product. This document is intended for customers and Systems Engineers that plan to install OSIMF/6000 on the RISC System/6000. A knowledge of general communications and AIX for RISC System/6000 is assumed. (198 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59.5. GG24-4014-00 Network Problem Management Examples Involving AIX Trouble Ticket/6000 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4014-00 Network Problem Management Examples Involving AIX Trouble Ticket/6000 This document provides examples of using AIX Trouble Ticket/6000 Release 1 and AIX NetView/6000 Version 1 on an AIX V3.2, RISC System/6000 platform. In addition, examples of user-written routines are shown in conjunction with trouble ticket events. This document is intended for personnel who need information related to the marketing and acceptance of the IBM RISC System/6000 AIX V3 systems in a communications and problem management environment. A general knowledge of help desk environments is assumed. (134 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. GBOF-6338: AIX Operating System/Systems Management & High Availability ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60.1. GG24-3570-00 Printing for Fun and Profit under AIX V3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3570-00 Printing for Fun and Profit under AIX V3 An important function of modern computing environments is the capability to output information on paper, or print. This document focuses on the printing facilities available in AIX* V3 for the RISC System/6000* (5756-030). Many of these facilities are new or unique to AIX V3. This document is aimed at helping people, such as systems managers, systems engineers, or integrators to understand: o The manner in which AIX V3 print spooler subsystem functions o How to install printers o How to configure printers and the print spooling subsystem o How to print files and manage the progress of print requests through print spooling subsystem o More advanced printing topics such as remote printing, printing via terminals, printing via Xstations, and configuring non-supported printers. (154 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60.2. GG24-3633-00 AIX Version 3.1 RISC System/6000 as a Real-Time System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3633-00 AIX Version 3.1 RISC System/6000 as a Real-Time System This document describes and investigates the real-time capabilities of AIX Version 3.1 for RISC System/6000. It provides a description of the real-time related kernel services and user subroutines and discusses application design for and programming considerations of real-time applications running on the RISC System/6000 under AIX Version 3.1 This document is intended for systems engineers, customers and third-party professionals concerned with design and implementation of real-time applications for the RISC System/6000. An in-depth knowledge of the AIX Operating System is assumed. (274 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60.3. GG24-3684-00 High Availability Strategies for AIX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3684-00 High Availability Strategies for AIX This document helps the reader to understand and use the high availability features and optional products of AIX Version 3.2 and the RISC System/6000. It covers general availability concepts and techniques and describes two IBM offerings for high availability in the RISC System/6000: High Availability Cluster Multi-Processing/6000 and High Availability for Network File System. The document is intended for IBM systems engineers, customer personnel, consultants, and others who need to implement a strategy for a highly available AIX Version 3.2 system on the RISC System/6000. A basic knowledge of AIX Version 3.2 and the Logical Volume Manager is assumed. (186 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60.4. GG24-3814-00 Upgrading to AIX 3.2, The Inside Story ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3814-00 Upgrading to AIX 3.2, The Inside Story This document describes the process to upgrade a RISC System/6000 from AIX 3.1 to AIX 3.2. It provides supplemental information to the IBM AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000 Installation Guide (referred to in the rest of the book as the Installation Guide) and the IBM AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000 Upgrade Utilities Guide for Upgrading AIX Version 3.2.x to Version 3.2 (referred to in the rest of the book as the Upgrade Utilities Guide). It is the summary of several weeks of using the Upgrade Utilities. This document is intended for systems engineers, systems administrators, and other technical personnel who will perform or plan for the upgrade process. A working knowledge of AIX 3.1 is assumed. (156 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60.5. GG24-3850-00 AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000 National Language Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3850-00 AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000 National Language Support This document describes the national language support of AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000. It provides a description of the implementation and administration of the national language support of AIX Version 3.2. This document is intended for systems engineers, customers, and third-party professionals concerned with installation or administration of the RISC System/6000. Knowledge of the AIX Operating System is assumed. (180 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. GBOF-6340: RISC/6000 Hardware ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61.1. GG24-3405-01 AIX PS/2 Installation Handbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3405-01 AIX PS/2 Installation Handbook This document provides a detailed description of AIX PS/2 Version 1.2. The information contained within this document is intended for professionals responsible for implementing and maintaining AIX PS/2 installations. (186 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61.2. GG24-3695-00 IBM Xstation 120/130 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3695-00 IBM Xstation 120/130 This document describes the installation, configuration, performance, and tuning of the IBM Xstation 120 and IBM Xstation 130. Configuration and performance is based on AIX Xstation Manager/6000 Version 1.2. Special attention is given to the Xstation 130 and how to configure the enhanced features. This document is intended for customers and system engineers who need to know how to setup and tune their IBM Xstations. A basic knowledge of the Xstation Manager/6000 Version 1.1 and the Xstation 120 is assumed. (138 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61.3. GG24-3858-00 IBM RISC Sys/6000 Model 220 Planning & Install w/AIX 3.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3858-00 IBM RISC System/6000 Model 220 Planning and Installation with AIX 3.2 This document describes the IBM RISC System/6000 Model 220 (diskless system). It provides general hardware configuration information and outlines the procedures of installing and customizing the server system for diskless, dataless, or stand-alone environments. Non-AIX server systems are included in this document. Two case studies are discussed: one for an university classroom configuration and another for potential use of the RISC System/6000 Model 220 as a terminal server. This document is intended for IBM system engineers and IBM marketing representatives who need to know how to advise customers in establishing diskless or dataless environments with the IBM RISC System/6000 Model 220. A basic knowledge of AIX Verion 3.2 file tree and system commands using SMIT is assumed. (210 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. GBOF-6341: NetWare for AIX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62.1. GG24-3893-00 NetWare in the TCP/IP and UNIX Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3893-00 NetWare in the TCP/IP and UNIX Environment This document describes Netware V3.11 TCP/IP subsystem, Netware NFS V1.1 and V1.2, LAN Workplace for DOS V4.0, LAN Workplace for OS/2 V2.0, TCP/IP for DOS V2.0 and TCP/IP for OS/2 V1.2. It provides system description, installation procedures and integration with Netware servers and requesters in the TCP/IP and UNIX environment. This document is intended for system engineers who need to know about interoperability in a heterogeneous environment using the TCP/IP open communication architecture. A knowledge of basic communications, different operating systems such as DOS, OS/2 and UNIX, networking and the NetWare LAN environment is assumed. (150 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. GBOF-6343: Office Systems - LAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63.1. GG24-3071-00 IBM Local Area Networks in an Office System Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3071-00 IBM Local Area Networks in an Office System Environment This document is intended for those involved in the planning, installation and use of a LAN in an O/S environment. The document describes the implementation and use of various IBM O/S products in a LAN environment. (140 pages) 1986 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63.2. GG24-3397-00 Application Printing on the LAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3397-00 Application Printing on the LAN This document is intended as an aid to those involved in planning, installing and implementing printing facilities in a local area network. The primary aim is to show some examples of how printing, from an application point of view, can be accomplished in a LAN environment. Printing to and from other platforms, such as S/370 or AS/400 hosts, will also be covered. General knowledge of OS/2 and LAN is a prerequisite for this document. (144 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63.3. GG24-3551-02 IBM OfficeVision/2 LAN 1.1.2 Cookbook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3551-02 IBM OfficeVision/2 LAN 1.1.2 Cookbook This document is an update to IBM OfficeVision/2 LAN 1.1.1 Cookbook. This document covers IBM OfficeVision/2 1.1.2 on IBM Operating System/2 EE 1.3, focusing on configuring and implementing IBM OfficeVision/2. It is intended for system engineers and support staff who are responsible for configuring, proposing, implementing and maintaining IBM OfficeVision/2 networks. The document has been updated to reflect the new features and installation procedures of IBM Operating System/2 EE 1.3. The body of the book focuses on implementation, with the conceptual matter contained in appendixes. (366 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63.4. GG24-3736-00 IBM OfficeVision/2 LAN 1.1.2 Directory Techniques ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3736-00 IBM OfficeVision/2 LAN 1.1.2 Directory Techniques This document describes OfficeVision/2 LAN Version 1 Release 1.2. It provides information about planning, installation and the technical implementation of the office directory services. This document is intended for customer representatives, systems engineers and office administrators who need to know how to install and maintain OfficeVision/2 LAN-based office systems. A knowledge of OfficeVision/2, OS/2, and OS/2 based LAN systems is assumed. (152 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63.5. GG24-3831-00 IBM OfficeVision/2 LAN Complex Connectivity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3831-00 IBM OfficeVision/2 LAN Complex Connectivity This document provides detailed information to enable installation of complex IBM OfficeVision/2 Extended Edition Version 1.3. It contains detailed description of various configuration examples involving Token-Ring, SDLC, X.25 and APPN. It is intended for sales representatives, systems engineers and support staff who are responsible for configuring, proposing, implementing and maintaining IBM OfficeVision/2 networks. (88 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63.6. GG24-3878-00 Basic Electronic Mail ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3878-00 Basic Electronic Mail This document is intended to provide a basic understanding of electronic mail (E-mail), as it exists in isolation, within each of the platform architectures investigated. (272 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. GBOF-6344: Office Systems - VM Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64.1. GG24-3830-00 Printing in a VM Office Environment: An End User's Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3830-00 Printing in a VM Office Environment: An End User's Guide This document is intended to provide detailed information about printing in a VM office environment. It contains information about basic OfficeVision printing facilities and also hints and tips for printing in general. This document is intended for the end user who needs to know how to print all kinds of notes, documents and files containing text, images and graphics. It may also be useful for office administrative people. Printing techniques are discussed for both OfficeVision/VM Version 1 Release 1 and OfficeVision/VM Version 1 Release 2. (114 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64.2. GG24-3897-00 IBM Current-OV/VM Workgroup PRPQ Implementation Experiences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3897-00 IBM Current-OV/VM Workgroup PRPQ Implementation Experiences This document describes IBM Current-OV/VM Workgroup. This product is a DOS Windows-based personal information manager that allows business professionals to manage a multitude of assignments, projects and people on a daily basis. It adds the power of OfficeVision/VM to the stand-alone Current desktop by allowing users to take advantage of host office functions through an intuitive, graphical user interface. This document is intended for customer representatives, systems engineers, and office administrators who need to know how to install and customize IBM Current-OV/VM Workgroup. It provides information about planning, installation and the technical implementation. A knowledge of Microsoft Windows and IBM Personal Communications/3270 is assumed. (132 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64.3. GG24-4054-00 PM Office/2 End User Education Guide for OfficeVision/VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4054-00 PM Office/2 End User Education Guide for OfficeVision/VM The PM Office Development team in IBM Denmark has written this document to give the end user a quick run through on how to work with PM Office/2. This document describes PM Office/2 when run against an OfficeVision/VM host. It provides some hints and tips on how to work with PM Office/2 both in general and a more advanced use. It is based on scenarios, where each scenario can be read separately. The general section can be read sequentially, as it is built as a tutorial. The advanced section covers more diversified topics and should be used to look up specific topics. This document is intended for both beginners and advanced users of PM Office/2. A working knowledge of OS/2 and some basic knowledge of OfficeVision/VM is assumed. (156 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. GBOF-6345: Office Systems - MVS Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.1. GG24-3046-01 OfficeVision/MVS VSAM Design and Tuning Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3046-01 OfficeVision/MVS VSAM Design and Tuning Guide This book is for system administrators responsible for installing, maintaining and tuning OV/MVS, DISOSS and DW370 in an MVS environment. Information and examples are provided for optimizing access to the VSAM data sets used by these products. (140 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.2. GG24-3573-00 OV/MVS R2 Application Integration & Customization Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3573-00 OfficeVision/MVS Release 2 Application Integration and Customization Guide: All You Ever Wanted to Know, But .... This document describes the application integration capabilities of OfficeVision/MVS Release 2. The publication is structured as follows: o Part 1 contains a general overview of the application integration and customizing capabilities of the MVS Office Products. o Part 2 contains details of how to customize dialogues and panels, and how exits are used to influence the dialogs. o Part 3 describes the interaction between customer written programs and the API or Exits available in OV/MVS components like Application Services (AS), Personal Services (PS) and Enterprise Address Book (EAB) but also interfaces of DisplayWrite/370 (DW/370), DIStribited Office Support System (DISOSS/370) and Disoss Library Services - Extended (DLS-E) are discussed. o Part 4 describes of LOB integration with the OV/MVS (AS, PS and EAB) and DW/370. All the code samples used are described in the various appendixes of the publication. (550 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.3. GG24-3626-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to the OV/MVS Enterprise Address Book ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3626-00 A Hitchhiker's Guide to the OfficeVision/MVS Enterprise Address Book This document provides information on the OfficeVision/MVS Enterprise Address Book, additional to that provided in the product manuals. It contains an overview of the Enterprise Address Book function, together with information relating to installation, customization, and migration using the Enterprise Address Book application programming interface, shadowing, security, recovery and performance. This edition applies to Version 1 Release 2.0 of OfficeVision/MVS (Program Number 5685-106). (514 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.4. GG24-3683-00 Working with DisplayWrite/370 V2 in the OF/MVS R2 Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3683-00 Working with DisplayWrite/370 Version 2 in the OfficeVision/MVS Release 2 Environment This document describes the use of DisplayWrite/370 Version 2 in the OfficeVision/MVS Release 2 environment. It is intended for people who need to: o Customize the the Personal Services and Document Writing feature document creation environments when DisplayWrite/370 is involved o Understand more about the way DisplayWrite/370 Version 2 is used in an OfficeVision/MVS Release 2 environment. This document is aimed at those who have practical experience of: o Creating OfficeVision/MVS Application Type Descriptions o Using Application Services, Personal Services functions and Document Writing feature of OfficeVision/MVS o Working with DisplayWrite/370 Executable CLISTs and CLIST documents in an MVS/CICS environment (358 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.5. GG24-3809-00 Cross Platform Service for OV from an OV/MVS Perspective ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3809-00 Cross Platform Services for OfficeVision from an OfficeVision/MVS Perspective This publication looks at how information interchange between OfficeVision/MVS, OfficeVision/VM, OfficeVision/400 and OfficeVision/2 will take place. Discussed is the interchange of library, directory and mail data. The publication looks at this from an OV/MVS perspective, although much of the information can be used as a starting point for similar exercises on the related platforms. (414 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.6. GG24-3810-00 Open Software Foundation DCE GDS EAB Overview/Comparison ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3810-00 Open Software Foundation DCE Global Directory Services and OfficeVision/MVS Enterprise Address Book Overview and Comparison This publication focuses on the X.500 CCITT standard. It will try to describe this standard in understandable terms. Also this publication will discuss an X.500 implementation, namely the implementation of X.500 in the Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) as made available by the Open Software Foundation (OSF). The publication will also describe the capabilities of an IBM proprietary directory system, namely the Enterprise Address Book (EAB) as it is contained in OfficeVision/MVS. A functional Comparison of both the X.500 implementation in DCE called Global Directory Services (GDS) with EAB is attempted. (160 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.7. GG24-3940-00 Migration from PROFS or OV/VM to OV/MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3940-00 Migration from PROFS or OfficeVision/VM to OfficeVision/MVS This document describes how to migrate a Professional Office System (PROFS) or OfficeVision/VM (OV/VM) system to OfficeVision/MVS (OV/MVS). It describes how to perform the migration, provides information about what data can be migrated, and provides sample migration programs for both the VM and MVS environments. This document is intended for the customer or IBM systems engineer who needs to perform the subject migration. Knowledge of the functions of PROFS or OV/VM and OV/MVS, including format and placement of data, and the capabilities of the application programming interfaces (APIs), is assumed. In addition, even OV/MVS customers who are not migrating may benefit from an easy-to-use facility for importing data, such as user definitions, distribution lists, notes, appointments, and so on, into the OV/MVS system. (194 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.8. GG24-4053-00 PM Office/2 End User Education Guide for OV/MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4053-00 PM Office/2 End User Education Guide for Office Vision/MVS The PM Office Development team in IBM Denmark has written this document to give the end user a quick run through on how to work with Presentation Manager Office. This document describes Presentation Manager Office when run against an OfficeVision/MVS host. It provides some hints and tips on how to work with Presentation Manager Office both in general and a more advanced use. It is based on scenarios, where each scenario can be read separately. The general section can be read sequentially, as it is built as a tutorial. The advanced section covers more diversified topics and should be used to look up specific topics. This document is intended for both beginners and advanced users of Presentation Manager Office. A working knowledge of OS/2 and some basic OfficeVision/MVS is assumed. (152 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65.9. GG24-4061-00 IBM Current-OfficeVision/MVS Workgroup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4061-00 IBM Current-OfficeVision/MVS Workgroup Everything You Need to Know, and More .... This document describes IBM Current-OV/MVS Workgroup. This product is based on DOS Windows and uses Personal Information Manager (PIM) functions that allow knowledge workers to manage a multitude of assignments, projects and people on a daily basis. IBM Current-OV/MVS Workgroup adds the power of OfficeVision/MVS to the stand-alone Current desktop by allowing users to take advantage of host office functions through an intuitive, graphical user interface. This document was written for customer representatives, systems engineers and office administrators who need to know how to install and customize IBM Current-OV/MVS Workgroup. It provides information about planning, installation, customization and the technical implementation. Knowledge of Microsoft Windows and Personal Communications/3270 is assumed. (120 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. GBOF-6347: Office Systems - Cross Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66.1. GG24-1635-00 An Office Systems Primer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1635-00 An Office Systems Primer This bulletin serves as an introduction to the concepts involved in using, understanding and planning for Office Systems. It is intended for anyone who wants to learn about systems and strategies designed to management information in an office environment and presumes absolutely no background knowledge in this area. Special topics, such as expert systems and implementation issues, are mentioned briefly. (124 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66.2. GG24-3018-02 DisplayWrite Word Processing Family: A Comparison ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3018-02 DisplayWrite Word Processing Family: A Comparison This document compares the user interfaces and major functions of IBM DisplayWrite/370 Relese 2.1, AS/400 Office Release 2, DisplayWrite 4 Version 2, DisplayWrite Assistant and DisplayWrite 5/2. Format integrity in a mixed DisplayWrite document distribution environment is also discussed. (270 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66.3. GG24-3503-01 Information Interchange Architecture: Concepts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3503-01 Information Interchange Architecture: Concepts This document consists of a series of chapters that describe IBM's Information Interchange Architecture (IIA). IIA consists of architectural components that are used for the interchange of compound documents, which can contain mixtures of text, images, and graphics. These architectural components consist of 1. The Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), Office Document Architecture (ODA), Revisable-Form-Text Document Content Architecture (RFT:DCA), and Mixed Object Document Content Architecture (MO:DCA), which can define document-carrying data streams for interchange, and 2. Content architectures that define data objects, such as text, image, and graphics, that make up documents. The first chapter provides an overview of the architectures and how they fit together in IBM's data stream strategy. The subsequent chapters describe each of the architectural components that belong to IIA. This manual is intended for IBM system engineers and application developers who are considering implementations to interchange compound documents, using IIA, with other IBM applications. (186 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66.4. GG24-3516-00 Keys to Sort and Search for Culturally Expected Results ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3516-00 Keys to Sort and Search for Culturally Expected Results This document is for anyone who needs or wants to understand how to perform sorts and searches on sorted data in a matter that matches the expectations of an ordinary end user. (132 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. GBOF-6349: AIX/ESA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67.1. GG24-3622-01 Elements of AIX Security: R3.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3622-01 Elements of AIX Security: R3.1 This document provides an overview of AIX security elements and recommendations for their use. It is directed to newer AIX users. Basic elements of TCP/IP networking security are considered. Approaches for auditing the AIX security environment are discussed. The reader is assumed to have a working knowledge of AIX. (164 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67.2. GG24-3750-00 AIX Version 3.1 Additional Authorization: An Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3750-00 AIX Version 3.1 Additional Authorization: An Example This document describes the implementation of an additional authorization routine for AIX Version 3.1. It provides additional system security especially useful for dial-in lines. A one-time password token is used in the implementation. This document is intended for AIX Version 3.1 systems administrators needing an additional level of login security. A reasonable knowledge of AIX Version 3.1 at the systems administration level is assumed. (32 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67.3. GG24-3849-00 AIX/ESA Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3849-00 AIX/ESA Overview This document describes the first release of the AIX/ESA operating system, which IBM announced in March 1992. It is based on recent information from the product developers, and on initial experiences with early code. This document is intended for IBM Systems Engineers, independent consultants, or customer personnel who need to know more about the proposed product than is described in the Announcement Letter. The information is for guidance only, and is subject to change. (116 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67.4. GG24-3853-00 AIX/ESA Functional Overview Presentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3853-00 AIX/ESA Functional Overview Presentation This document describes the first release of the AIX/ESA operating system, which IBM announced in March 1992. The material is based on recent information from the product developers, and on initial experiences with early code. This document is intended for AIX/ESA professionals who need presentation text of a more technical nature than the standard marketing guides. The information is for guidance only, and is subject to change. It includes presenter's notes, foil masters, and student note sheets. (174 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67.5. GG24-3882-00 Getting Started with AIX/ESA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3882-00 Getting Started with AIX/ESA This document is intended for system administrators and other professionals requiring working knowledge of the AIX/ESA system. The document describes the following topics: o AIX/ESA planning and installation o AIX/ESA customization and administration o AIX/ESA backup and recovery It also discusses issues of integrating the AIX/ESA system into an existing computer network environment and use of AIX/ESA host as a server. Some knowledge of AIX RISC System/6000, TCP/IP and other UNIX** systems is required. (340 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67.6. GG24-4040-00 NIC Performance in AIX/ESA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4040-00 NIC Performance in AIX/ESA This document describes performance studies of NIC (Numerically Intensive Computing) applications in the AIX/ESA environment. It provides results of performance measurements and the effect of various system parameters on performance. This document is intended for programmers of numerically intensive applications. A knowledge of AIX/ESA is assumed. (62 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. GBOF-6351: Automated Operations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.1. GG24-3221-00 Automation of 9370 Systems Using NetView V1 R2 for VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3221-00 Automation of 9370 Systems Using NetView V1 R2 for VM This document describes how to automate distributed 9370 systems using IBM's network management product NetView V1R2 for VM and the Programmable Operator Facility (PROP) of VM/SP. (328 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.2. GG24-3235-00 Applied Automation: Multiple LAN Mgmt Using NetView R3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3235-00 Applied Automation: Multiple LAN Management Using NetView R3 and LAN Manager V2 This document is intended to illustrate how NetView Release 3 can be used to manage Local Area Networks (LANs). It is intended for system programmers and operations personnel responsible for implementing automated operations for MVS/XA or MVS/ESA environments that use NetView R3 and LAN Manager V2.0 to monitor and manage a multi-LAN environment. (206 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.3. GG24-3236-00 Applied Automation: Network Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3236-00 Applied Automation: Network Messages This document describes the facilities within VTAM to suppress unwanted messages and contains examples of how NetView may be used to monitor the number of unsolicited messages generated and automatically invoke suppression if the message rate is excessive. It is intended for the use of network administrators and system programmers. (128 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.4. GG24-3351-00 Automated Operations for Switched-Like Networks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3351-00 Automated Operations for Switched-Like Networks This publication describes automation scenarios involving switched connections as used in o alert forwarding between a distributed host and a focal point o automatic logon to an offsite application o automatic update of VTAM definitions for BNN (Boundary Network Node) dial connections o bandwidth management This document assumes previous VTAM, NCP and Netview experience. It requires knowledge of NetView CLIST (command language) and REXX. (232 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.5. GG24-3374-00 Applied Automation: NetView File Transfer Program for MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3374-00 Applied Automation: NetView File Transfer Program for MVS The purpose of this document is to provide a sample of automation of a complex environment composed of a file transfer application working on a network of different systems. It is intended for system programmers who control and maintain remote sites from a central site. (226 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.6. GG24-3409-00 Automation of VSE Systems Using Netview V1R2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3409-00 Automation of VSE Systems Using Netview V1R2 This publication describes how VSE/SP systems can be automated with NetView Release 2 for VSE, using standard IBM products: Virtual Storage Extended Version 3, Advanced Communication Function/VTAM, NetView on both VSE/SP and MVS/370 or MVS/XA. It is addressed to persons responsible for implementation of automatic console operations in a VSE operating system where the required function is multiple unattended node support. (352 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.7. GG24-3432-00 Applied Automation: Multiple CICS Environment w/NetView ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3432-00 Applied Automation: Multiple CICS Environment Using NetView R3 The purpose of this document is to give a practical description of how to automate (multiple) CICS systems running in the same MVS system and/or in different MVS systems. This document is intended for those system programmers and operations personnel responsible for implementing automated operations in MVS/XA systems. (136 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.8. GG24-3522-00 Applied Automation: Automating Problem Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3522-00 Applied Automation: Automating Problem Management This document is intended to provide guidance on how to automate Problem Management using standard IBM products: NetView Release 3, Information/Management V4 or Information/Management V3. It is intended for persons responsible for the implementation of the Problem Management discipline in an IBM systems environment. (90 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.9. GG24-3646-00 Using AOC/MVS in a Multi-System Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3646-00 Using AOC/MVS in a Multi-System Environment This publication is intended for system programmers or operations personnel who are responsible for implementing automated console operations in a multi-system MVS environment, using AOC/MVS on top of NetView Version 1 Release 3 or Version 2. The reader is expected to be familiar with the NetView operations and with the mechanisms used by NetView for automation. A familiarity with the IBM ACO SolutionPac would also be of benefit. The following topics are covered: o An overview of AOC/MVS and a description of its components o The implementation of AOC/MVS in multiple systems o Procedures for extending automated operations o Adding AOC/MVS to an already automated environment o Performance considerations of AOC/MVS o Migration from the ACO SolutionPac to AOC/MVS and their co-existence in a multi-system environment (192 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.10. GG24-3729-00 Automated Network Operations/MVS (ANO/MVS) Install Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3729-00 Automated Network Operations/MVS (ANO/MVS) Installation Guide This document describes how to implement and test the ANO/MVS Program offering. It provides a step-by-step guide on how to install ANO/MVS Version 1 and performing the changes required to tailor NetView for Automated Network Operations. This document is intended for system programmers or system engineers who have a requirement to install the ANO/MVS program. A knowledge of NetView is assumed. (170 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.11. GG24-3841-00 AS/400 Automation Using NetView and the SNA MS Transport ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3841-00 AS/400 Automation Using NetView and the SNA MS Transport This document provides guidelines and examples of using the NetView management services (MS) transport API in conjunction with the AS/400 management services API for AS/400 Automation. It describes the common management services on NetView and AS/400 systems. It also provides guidelines and examples for the implementation of remote operations applications. This document is intended to guide AS/400 and NetView system programmers and system engineers in the implementation of systems management automation functions. A good knowledge of APPC and systems management is assumed. (306 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.12. GG24-3871-00 Automated Configuration Mgmt Info/Sys NetView Bridge Adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3871-00 Automated Configuration Management Using the Information/System - NetView Bridge Adapter This document describes automated configuration management using NetView's Vital Product Data capabilities and the Information/System-NetView Bridge Adapter. It describes the various configuration management tools and processes available and provides samples and implementation experiences on the automation of this process. This document is intended for system programmers and network personnel who need to collect and update configuration records in the Information/System database. Knowledge about Information/System, NetView customization and CLISTs, and Vital Product Data is required. (214 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.13. GG24-4018-00 Applied Use of IBM NetView RODM and Automation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4018-00 Applied Use of IBM NetView Resource Object Data Manager (RODM) and Automation This document describes the IBM NetView Resource Object Data Manager (RODM). It provides the reader with many examples about the use of RODM in the automation area. This document is intended for system programmers and system analysts who need to know detailed information about gathering and accessing resource data in RODM in order to implement monitoring procedures and automation processes in general. A knowledge of the NetView program is assumed. (274 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.14. GG24-4088-00 Automated Configuration Management Using Netview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4088-00 Automated Configuration Management Using Netview This document describes a process that automates the collection of data from devices on a local area network that are managed by LAN Network Manager, LAN Management Utilities/2 (LNMU/2) or AIX NetView/6000. This process can be adapted to any workstation application that provides an interface to NetView. The data that is collected from these managers is useful for both operational management and for starting or maintaining a central configuration database. The example shown in this document uses Network Configuration Application/MVS (NCA/MVS) as the configuration database but could be modified for any database. This document describes one approach to integrating the management of different LAN environments from a central point. It will focus on the configuration management component of these environments and the role it plays in the operations management discipline using the NetView Graphic Monitor Facility and the Resource Object Data Manager (RODM) of NetView Version 2 Release 3. Some knowledge about the above products is assumed. (190 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68.15. GG24-4131-00 Using Resource Measurement Facility Monitor III ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4131-00 Using Resource Measurement Facility Monitor III Efficiently Resource Measurement Facility (RMF) Monitor III is an interactive monitor that collects data and reports contention for resources and theirs users. The data allows identification of system bottlenecks and determination of the reasons for possible system performance degradations. This document, along with its corresponding on-line demonstration, that can be set up using the diskette included in this book, illustrates how RMF Monitor III Version 4 Release 3.0 can be used to monitor the system and to identify the reasons for job and resource delays. (166 pages with 3 1/2 diskette) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. GBOF-6352: Banking - ATM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69.1. GG24-1669-00 IBM 4700/X.25 Integrated Adapter Support Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1669-00 IBM 4700/X.25 Integrated Adapter Support Implementation Guide This document describes the implementation process of the IBM 4700 programming support for attaching to X.25 Packet Switched Data Network. (234 pages) 1985 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69.2. GG24-3492-01 Guide to IBM 473x Personal Banking Machines Color & Graphics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3492-01 Guide to IBM 473x Personal Banking Machines Color and Graphics This document describes the color graphics capability of the 473x personal banking machines. It constitutes an overview and introduction to the color graphics feature available to the IBM 473x Personal Banking Machines operating in either native or 3624 emulation mode. It also includes information on the ability to manage picture changes on the ATM operational diskette. (152 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69.3. GG24-3590-00 IBM TSS Concepts & Guidelines - Workstation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3590-00 IBM Transaction Security System Concepts and Guidelines - Workstation This document describes the architecture, installation, initialization and implementation considerations for using IBM Transaction Security System (TSS) products in a workstation running under DOS and OS/2. It provides guidelines for the design of TSS workstation applications. Sample programs are provided to illustrate the function and interaction of most of the supported SAPI verbs. Use of the TSS programs in a LAN with FBSS is discussed as well. Application scenarios are defined and explained. This document is intended for system programmers, system analysts, IBM systems engineers and those who need to plan for and install these products as well as develop TSS applications. A working knowledge of DOS or OS/2 is assumed. (226 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69.4. GG24-3591-00 TSS 4753/MVS Install & Session Level Encrypt Gdelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3591-00 IBM Transaction Security System 4753/MVS Installation and Session Level Encryption Guidelines This document describes the architecture, installation, initialization and implementation considerations for using IBM Transaction Security System (TSS) products in a host system running under MVS. It provides guidelines for session level encryption support and applications. Sample programs are provided to illustrate session level encryption support. This document is intended for system programmers, system analysts, IBM systems engineers and those who need to plan for and install these products as well as develop TSS applications in host environment. (262 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69.5. GG24-3661-00 IBM 478X PBM and Related Software Technical Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3661-00 IBM 478X PBM and Related Software Technical Overview This document describes the IBM 478X Personal Banking Machine (PBM) hardware and software offerings. An outline is given of the various terminal devices available, as well as a description of how to service and operate the PBMs. An overview is given of the messages used by the PBM to communicate with the host or controller and examples are provided of how data files used by the PBM firmware can be customized to change the transaction characteristics. The document describes the Network Access Software (NAS), 1/LINK and PACE packages. This document is intended for system engineers with no prior knowledge of the 478X PBMs, but with an understanding of the types of transactions done by ATMS and some basic communications and systems skills. It is also intended to provide assistance to system engineers involved in installing and customizing 478X PBMs. (212 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69.6. GG24-3902-00 InterBold 3624 Emulation for 478X ATMs Using ATP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3902-00 InterBold 3624 Emulation for 478X ATMs Using the Advanced Terminal Processor Installation Guide This document describes The InterBold 3624 Terminal Control Software (TCS) for 478X ATMs. It allows an InterBold 478X ATM configured with an Advanced Terminal Processor (ATP) to communicate with host systems designed for IBM 3624 terminals. The InterBold ATM can appear to the network as a directly attached SNA SDLC device or as a B Loop device via a 470X Controller. This document is intended for first-time users of InterBold equipment who need to have a basic understanding of the 3624 emulation product to do installation planning and initial machine setup. Basic 3624 ATM knowledge is assumed. (140 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69.7. GG24-3968-00 A Guide to PBMNM 2.5 & ATMMFAS for 473x and 478x ATMs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3968-00 A Guide to PBMNM 2.5 and ATMMFAS for 473x and 478x ATMs This document describes the installation and customization of PBM Network Monitor Release 2.5 (PBMNM) and ATMMFAS Release 1.0. It provides an overview of the installation from tape and the customization of the software to bring a 473x terminal and a 478x terminal into operation on a CICS MVS system. This document is intended for systems engineers with no prior knowledge of PBM Network Monitor or ATMMFAS, but with an understanding of the types of transactions performed by Automated Teller Machines (ATMs) and some basic communications and systems skills. It is intended to provide assistance to systems engineers involved in installing and customizing PBM Network Monitor 2.5 and ATMMFAS. (254 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. GBOF-6353: Banking LAN DP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70.1. GG24-3521-00 FBSS to AS/400 Connectivity Installation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3521-00 Financial Branch System Services to AS/400 Connectivity Installation Guidelines This document describes the connectivity between Financial Branch System Services and AS/400 using LU0, LU1, and LU2 protocols. This document is intended for systems programmers, system analysts, network analysts and IBM system engineers and those who need to plan and use the FBSS-to-AS/400 connectivity. A knowledge of basic SNA concepts, LANs and programming languages is assumed. (124 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70.2. GG24-3576-00 IBM FBSS in a Mixed OS/2 and DOS Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3576-00 IBM Financial Branch System Services in a Mixed OS/2 and DOS Environment This document describes the architecture, installation and implementation considerations for using IBM Financial Branch System Services (FBSS) products in a local area network (LAN) with OS/2 and DOS workstations. It is intended for systems programmers, system analysts, IBM systems engineers and those who need to plan for and install these products as well as develop portable FBSS applications. (278 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70.3. GG24-3592-00 FBSS/2 and OS/2 Database Manager Concepts and Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3592-00 FBSS/2 and OS/2 Database Manager Concepts and Guidelines This document describes the OS/2 Database Manager in brief and documents guidelines for using the Database Manager in the FBSS, FBSS/2 environment. It is intended for system programmers, system analysts, IBM Systems Engineers, and those who need to plan for and install the Database Manager as well as develop Database application in the FBSS, FBSS/2 environment. (338 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70.4. GG24-3693-00 FBSS and OS/2 LAN Server in a Banking Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3693-00 FBSS and OS/2 LAN Server in a Banking Environment This document describes the OS/2 Lan Server - FBSS environment. It provides the reader with installation and tailoring guidelines. OS/2 Lan Server is viewed from a banking perspective so emphasis is put on User Profile Management, DOS LAN Requester, Remote IPL and Resource Sharing. OS/2 Lan Server is introduced with simple examples. (202 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70.5. GG24-3745-00 FBSS LU 6.2 Installation and Programming ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3745-00 Financial Branch System Services LU 6.2 Installation and Programming This document provides information to prepare, install, and write programs using IBM Financial Branch System Services Version 1.1 (IBM FBSS/2), IBM Financial Branch System Services Version 3.1 (IBM FBSS DOS), and Program to Program Communications Server (PPC Server). FBSS and CICS sample programs are provided. This document is intended for system engineers, developers and customers who need to implement an SNA LU 6.2 environment using FBSS. A basic knowledge of FBSS and OS/2 APPC is assumed. For people interested in host implementation, a knowledge of VTAM and CICS is assumed. (502 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70.6. GG24-3842-00 FBSS Problem Determination Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3842-00 FBSS Problem Determination Guidelines This document discusses problem determination in the FBSS and FBSS/2 environments. It provides the reader with details on how to use the product- supplied debugging aids, and also details on additional aids available with other products. Typical environments are explored with sample traces showing normal error-free operation and common errors. This document is intended for anyone responsible for problem determination in an FBSS or FBSS/2 environment. A working knowledge of FBSS, FBSS/2, DOS and OS/2 is assumed. (422 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70.7. GG24-3917-00 LANDP Networking with APPN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3917-00 LANDP Networking with APPN This document is intended to provide practical guidance in installing, customizing, operating and writing programs using IBM LAN Distributed Platform/DOS (LANDP/DOS), IBM LAN Distributed Platform/2 (LANDP/2) PPC server and CICS in an Advanced Peer-to-Peer Network (APPN) environment. Two scenarios are developed which provide examples LANDP of integration in an APPN business environment. The sample programs used in these scenarios are one 32 bit client and its accompanying 32 bit server program. The intended audience includes customers, system engineers and developers who need to implement an APPN environment using LANDP. A basic knowledge of LANDP and OS/2's APPN support is assumed. For people interested in host implementation, a knowledge of VTAM and CICS is assumed. (570 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70.8. GG24-3924-00 LANDP/DOS and LANDP/2 Concepts and Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3924-00 LANDP/DOS and LANDP/2 Concepts and Guidelines This document describes IBM LAN Distributed Platform/DOS Version 2.0 and IBM LAN Distributed Platform/2 Version 2.0 for Personal Systems/2 and personal computers. LANDP/DOS and LANDP/2 evolve from IBM FBSS and IBM FBSS/2, and provide a solution for Local Area Networks, based on the client/server model for distributed applications. This document is intended for system analysts, system programmers, and application programmers. Working examples on the new parametric customization and on how to compile and link 32-bit programs with the IBM C Set/2 compiler and IBM Workframe/2, as well as running the Multiple Virtual DOS Machine Relay, will hopefully make this bulletin a helpful addition to the product's manuals. LANDP/2 V2.0 new servers, like CICS OS/2* Call Interface Server, DDE Access Server, Batch Machine Server, etc are covered in detail. (466 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. GBOF-6354: Banking - Consumer Transact ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71.1. GG24-3658-00 Consumer Transaction (CT) Concepts and Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3658-00 Consumer Transaction (CT) Concepts and Guidelines This document describes the Consumer Transaction Definition and Runtime programs in brief. It also looks at the Sample Transaction Set and the Sample Platform Transaction Set and documents guidelines in using them. Topics and hints that are not found in the CT product publications are included in this document. This document is intended for system programmers, system analysts, IBM systems engineers and those who need to plan for and install the Consumer Transaction products and should be used as supplementary material to the product documentations. A working knowledge of DOS, FBSS and LAN is assumed. (582 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71.2. GG24-3735-00 CT/6000 versus CT/DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3735-00 CT/6000 versus CT/DOS This document describes the differences between IBM's AIX Consumer Transaction/6000 and Consumer Transaction for DOS, Version 1.2. This document is intended for system engineers, application programmers, and system analysts who install the programs and customize transactions. This document should be used as a supplement to the product documentations. Knowledge of Consumer Transaction, DOS, and AIX is assumed. Some sections in this guide will also require knowledge of host communications, printer support, and graphics development. (114 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. GBOF-6355: Network Performance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72.1. GG24-3270-00 Network Accounting Using NPM V1R3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3270-00 Network Accounting Using NPM V1R3 This document describes the accounting functions and capabilities of the NetView Performance Monitor (NPM) Version 1 Release 3. It also compares these functions and provides guidelines on how to use these functions in the variety of network configurations. (100 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72.2. GG24-3337-00 Network Monitoring Using NPM V1R3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3337-00 Network Monitoring Using NPM V1R3 This document provides guidance on a method to establish a response time monitoring and alerting system, thus enabling the network management to react faster when the established service level is not met. It is addressed to system programmers, system engineers, and network specialists using NPM V1R3. (118 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72.3. GG24-3439-00 NPM Installation and Functions for VM/SP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3439-00 NetView Performance Monitor Installation and Functions for VM/SP This document describes NPM-NetView Performance Monitor for VM. It provides complimentary information for the installation of NPM, and a description of the experiences gained while installing NPM. It is intended for Systems Programmers who need to install NPM in their computer centers. (152 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72.4. GG24-3532-00 NPM V1R4 New Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3532-00 NPM V1R4 New Functions This document describes the new functions of NetView Performance Monitor Version 1 Release 4. It is intended for system analysts and network planners who need to evaluate the new functions. (108 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72.5. GG24-3681-00 NPM Version 1 Release 4.1 & Release 5 New Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3681-00 NetView Performance Monitor Version 1 Release 4.1 and Release 5 New Functions This document describes NetView Performance Monitor Version 1 Release 4.1 and Release 5. It provides a guide in the use of new capabilities incorporated in these releases. This document is intended for those people responsible for the installation and use of NPM. It describes how to implement and use the X.25 monitoring facilities available in Release 4.1, and the new functions available in Release 5. A knowledge of the current release of NPM and a knowledge of X.25 principles and terminology is assumed. (140 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72.6. GG24-3989-00 NPM Release 5.1 and Release 6 New Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3989-00 NetView Performance Monitor Release 5.1 and Release 6 New Functions This document provides a guide to the use of Netview Performance Monitor (NPM) Release 5.1 and Release 6, and is intended for system analysts and network planners who need to evaluate the new functions. System programmers who are going to implement the new functions will also find useful information. It describes: o A summary of the enhancements o How this enhanced NPM will help customers manage their network. o Some operation scenarios A knowledge of the previous releases of NPM and some knowledge of token-ring, Ethernet, frame relay, X.25 and NetView is assumed. (130 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. GBOF-6356: Network Distribution ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73.1. GG24-3308-00 NetView/DM and VM/DSNX Automation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3308-00 NetView/DM and VM/DSNX Automation This publication describes the installation and implementation of Virtual Machine/Distributed Systems Node Executive Release 3 on VM/SP Release 6 systems as well as the activation of the NetView/Distribution Manager's VM Node Support on the MVS/370 central site. (360 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73.2. GG24-3459-00 Centralized Files Dist Using NetView DM & PC Node Mgr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3459-00 Centralized Files Distribution Using NetView DM and PC Node Manager This document describes centralized file distribution utilizing PC Node Manager (PCNM) Version 1.1, VTAM Protocol Conversion Application (VPCA) Release 2, and NetView Distribution Manager (NDM) Version 1.1 or 1.2. It is intended for persons who must define and set up a distribution management environment using NetView DM, VPCA and PCNM. (140 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73.3. GG24-3634-01 NetView DM and Nodes Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3634-01 NetView DM and Nodes Implementation Guide This document describes NetView Distribution Manager. It provides a general overview of the product implementation and functionally itself as well as in conjunction with several partner systems. It has been updated for Release 3 of the product and the new change management entry point represented by NetView DM /2 for the OS/2 operating system. This document is intended for systems engineers and customers who need to know how to plan and realize a NetView DM implementation. (306 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73.4. GG24-3689-00 NetView DM R3 and Netview DM/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3689-00 Management of Object Change for OS/2 Workstations Using NetView DM R3 and NetView DM/2 This document provides information required to prepare, install and use NetView DM V.1.0 and NetView DM V.1.3. NetView DM/2 and NetView DM provide a comprehensive means of distributing data and process change management throughout a network. User application data as well as operating system code can be distributed using SNA architectures via LU 6.2 protocol. This document is intended for system engineers and customers who need to implement a distribution management environment either in a stand alone local area network or to interface with a focal point using NetView DM V.1.3. A knowledge of NetView DM Release 2 has been assumed. (330 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73.5. GG24-3690-00 Distributing OS/2 V1.3 - NetView DM/2 & NS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3690-00 Distributing OS/2 V1.3 Using NetView DM/2 and NS/2 with NetView DM R3 This document describes how to send and install OS/2 EE V1.3 to a new PS/2 using NetView DM with NetView DM/2 and LAN Download Utility (LDU). It also shows how to send and install OS/2 V1.3 EE CSD WR05016 to a PS/2 with OS/2 V1.3 EE CSD WR05015 installed using NetView DM/2. The network was defined as an APPN network using SAA Networking Services/2 in the PS/2 workstation and VTAM V3R4 in the host to make the host appear as a Low Entry Networking (LEN) node. This document is intended for persons who will distribute and update OS/2 V1.3 EE. A knowledge of the following products is assumed: o IBM NetView Distribution Manager R3 (NetView DM) o IBM NetView Distribution Manager/2 (NetView DM/2) o IBM SAA Networking Services/2 (NS/2) o IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2) (238 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73.6. GG24-4003-00 NetView V2R3 Experiences Using NGMF & Auto Enhancements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4003-00 NetView V2R3 Experiences Using NetView Graphic Monitor Facility and Automation Enhancements This document describes the new and enhanced functions of NetView Version 2 Release 3. The new and enhanced features discussed include: o NetView Graphic Monitor Facility operations and customization, o Extended MCS console support, o Automation enhancements, message coloring, o Security, and operation support. Information on how these can be used to advantage is also included. This document is intended primarily for system programmers and operators who will be installing NetView V2R3 and implementing the many new features. An overview of the new features available in NetView V2R3 is included for technical managers. Knowledge of the concepts and components of previous NetView releases is assumed. (306 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. GBOF-6357: Systems Application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74.1. GG24-3212-01 Response Time Data Gathering ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3212-01 Response Time Data Gathering This document is designed to provide network specialists and persons in charge of network operations or communications with an overview of the presently existing tools to measure and collect user response time data. (146 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74.2. GG24-3407-00 C High-Level Language Interface for NetView Release 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3407-00 C High-Level Language Interface for NetView Release 3 This document introduces the HLL C interface for developing command processors and user exits that will run under NetView Release 3. It provides basic concepts about the C language in the NetView environment. A scenario and some tools for getting started with this High Level Language interface are also provided. (102 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74.3. GG24-3408-00 PL/1 High-Level Language Techniques in NetView R 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3408-00 PL/1 High-Level Language Techniques in NetView Release 3 This document describes one of the major enhancements introduced by NetView Release 3: the high-level language interface with PL/1. It offers some techniques for using this interface in PL/1 and describes some application scenarios useful for customers interested in automated operations based on high-level language interface. (118 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74.4. GG24-3549-00 Using NetView Release 3 Program-to-Program Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3549-00 Using NetView Release 3 Program-to-Program Interface This publication describes how the new program-to-program interface (PPI) of NetView Release 3 can be used to exchange data among different address spaces of an MVS/XA or MVS/ESA system, including NetView itself. It provides general use programming interfaces and implementation samples that can be utilized to write programs that invoke the NetView PPI services. (168 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74.5. GG24-3905-00 Enhancing NetView Operator Productivity with CM Mouse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3905-00 Enhancing NetView Operator Productivity with CM Mouse This document describes the methodology and sample programs that use CM Mouse Support/2 (CM Mouse) to provide a SystemView End Use Dimension application which can improve the productivity of its operators. This document is intended for system programmers and system engineers who will customize CM Mouse applications. The reader is assumed to have a basic knowledge of NetView and CM Mouse. Additional knowledge of ANO/MVS, AOC/MVS,NPM and OPC/ESA is required to implement CM Mouse functions. (152 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. GBOF-6358: Network Security ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75.1. GG24-3451-01 Intro to System & Network Security: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3451-01 Introduction to System and Network Security: Considerations, Options and Techniques This document provides material intended for use in preliminary discussions related to System and Network Security matters. It is intended for IBM and IBM customer personnel who have a need for information related to System and Network Security. A general knowledge of overall IBM and customer computing systems is assumed. (198 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75.2. GG24-3524-00 Network Security Involving the NetView Family of Products ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3524-00 Network Security Involving the NetView Family of Products This document provides a summary of experiences gained in testing selected aspects of Network Security involving the IBM NetView family of products. This document is intended for IBM staff and IBM customer personnel who have a need for information related to system and network security. (364 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75.3. GG24-3544-00 Network Security Using the VTAM Session Management Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3544-00 Network Security Using the VTAM Session Management Exit This purpose of this document is to provide a means by which network security can be enhanced using VTAM's Session Management Exit. This document is primarily intended for network system programmers, network managers and network security administrators involved in the planning or implementation of network security. (160 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75.4. GG24-3815-00 Security Overview of Open Systems Networking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3815-00 Security Overview of Open Systems Networking This document provides material intended for use in preliminary discussions related to Open Network Security matters. This document is intended for IBM and IBM customer personnel who have a need for information related to system and network security. A general knowledge of overall IBM and customer computing systems is assumed. This book will provide an overview of systems security and will approach this from an Open Systems perspective. Its purpose is to introduce the concept of security from both a systems and a network perspective. (80 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75.5. GG24-3950-00 Client/Server Computing w/VM/ESA as Part of Open Enterpr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-3950-00 Client/Server Computing with VM/ESA as Part of the Open Enterprise This document focuses on VM/ESA's current position in the Client/Server world. Definitions, business expectations, requirements, and implementations of Client/Server technology are discussed. An overview of the Open Systems world along with current Open Systems models provides a background to the complexities of Open Systems. VM/ESA's product positioning, Client/Server features, and Open Systems model compliance will help you picture where VM/ESA is in the Client/Server marketplace. A knowledge of VM/ESA is assumed. VM/ESA conforms to the Open Systems world, and the intent of this document is to tell you exactly how. (254 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75.6. GG24-4059-00 Examples of Using AIX NetView/6000 API's ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4059-00 Examples of Using AIX NetView/6000 API's This document provides a summary of early-use examples of AIX NetView/6000 APIs (Application Programming Interface). AIX NetView/6000 Version 2 Release 1 (V2R1) allows for AIX V3 applications to use provided application programming techniques to access data and functions used within AIX NetView/6000 V2R1 without having a need to know underlying implementation details. The project involved in creating this document was aimed primarily at using the End-User Interface (EUI) API and database information related to the EUI. This document assumes the reader has a general knowledge of AIX NetView/6000. This document is intended for personnel who need information related to the marketing and acceptance of network management products in an AIX V3 environment. A general knowledge of overall IBM and customer computing systems for C language programming is assumed. (208 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. GBOF-6360: Architecture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76.1. GG24-3029-00 A Plain Man's View of the Integration of Voice and Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3029-00 A Plain Man's View of the Integration of Voice and Data This is a general introduction to the integration of voice and data within communications systems. The primary audience is intended to be people with a wide knowledge of Electronic Data Processing who have some planning or managerial interest in communication systems. (60 pages) 1986 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76.2. GG24-3376-03 TCP/IP Tutorial and Technical Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3376-03 TCP/IP Tutorial and Technical Overview This document is for customers, FSC communications specialists and field system engineers working on projects involving connectivity of IBM systems to equipment manufactured by other equipment manufacturers (OEM). It should be used to gain a basic understanding of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite and to gain an overview of the possible functionality of the IBM TCP/IP products in heterogeneous networks. (342 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76.3. GG24-3520-01 APPC and CPI-C Product Implementations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3520-01 APPC and CPI-C Product Implementations This publication is for use by customers and IBM networking specialists involved with program-to-program communication. The main objective of the publication is to show how different products have implemented the LU 6.2 program-to-program architecture and to compare the different product implementations against the LU 6.2 architecture. The publication will show which functions can be used in the different implementations. This should be particularly useful to people implementing APPC applications in a mixed product environment, although those involved with a single product environment may also find it useful. However, readers should already be familiar with their particular product environment(s) - this publication will describe the APPC aspects only. Other chapters of the publication compare APPC with CPI-C, NetBIOS, TCP/IP and OSI/TP. (302 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76.4. GG24-3669-01 APPN Architecture and Product Implementations Tutorial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3669-01 APPN Architecture and Product Implementations Tutorial This document describes Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking within the Systems Network Architecture. It provides a tutorial on the APPN architectural functions, the relationship between these functions, and a summary of implementations in various products. The document is intended for system engineers, system planners, system programmers, and network administrators who need to know the APPN functions, the APPN node types, and their interrelation. A basic knowledge of networking concepts and terminology is assumed. (210 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76.5. GG24-3816-01 High-Speed Networking Technology: An Introductory Survey ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3816-01 High-Speed Networking Technology: An Introductory Survey This publication presents a broad overview on the emerging technology of very-high-speed communications. It is written at the "technical conceptual" level with some areas of greater detail. It was written for computer professionals who have some understanding of communications (but who do not necessarily consider themselves experts). It is a systems engineering technical paper, NOT a product manual. The primary topics of the book are: o The Principles of High-Speed Networking o Fiber Optical Technology and Optical Networks o Local Area Networks (Token-Ring, FDDI, MetaRing, CRMA, Radio Lans) o Metropolitan Area Networks (DQDB/SMDS) o High-Speed Package Switches (Frame Relay, Paris, plaNET) (442 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76.6. GG24-3865-00 FDDI Concepts and Products ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3865-00 FDDI Concepts and Products This document provides an introduction to the IBM Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Local Area Network (LAN). It describes the concepts behind FDDI LANs and explains the functions and the various ways to design, install and manage FDDI LANs using IBM FDDI products. The document is intended mainly for customers, IBM System Engineers and Marketing Support Representatives who are responsible for supporting FDDI networks. (334 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. GBOF-6361: 937X ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77.1. GG24-1592-00 9370 Connectivity - 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1592-00 9370 Connectivity - 1987 This document addresses the 9370 System from an application functional connectivity point of view. The main purpose is to help Application Management identify new solutions for their user requirements, then to help Technical Management learn requirements for implementing the solutions. (106 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77.2. GG24-1710-00 IBM 9370 Systems in SNA Networks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1710-00 IBM 9370 Systems in SNA Networks This document offers guidelines and advice for system programmers who plan to integrate IBM 9370 Systems to an existing System Network Architecture (SNA) network controlled by an MVS/VTAM host system. (84 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. GBOF-6362: IDNX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78.1. GG24-3500-00 IBM 973X (IDNX) Overview, Installation, Operation, Mgmt Gdelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3500-00 IBM 973X (IDNX) Overview, Installation, Operation and Management Guidelines This document is addressed to systems engineers, systems programmers, network architects and network operations staff who require an in-depth technical insight into the IBM 9738, IBM 9737 and IBM 9736 products. (250 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78.2. GG24-3834-00 IBM 9715 Access Digital Network Exchange/60 (ADNX/60) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3834-00 IBM 9715 Access Digital Network Exchange/60 (ADNX/60) Reference and Installation Guide This document describes the IBM 9715 Model 009 Access Digital Network Exchange/60 (ADNX/60). It provides an intelligent device that interfaces into the Integrated Digital Network Exchange hierarchy of products. The terms 9715 and ADNX/60 refer to the same product and are used interchangeably in this document as are the terms 973X and IDNX. This document is an overview and installation guide. It is intended for customers and system engineers interested in learning the 9715 environment and its installation procedures in networks where the 973X (IDNX) and/or 9715 (ADNX/60) are involved. This document assumes that the reader currently has some knowledge of the IDNX product. (136 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78.3. GG24-3843-00 LAN/WAN eXchange (LWX) Planning and Installation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3843-00 LAN/WAN eXchange (LWX) Planning and Installation Guide This document explains the LAN/WAN eXchange (LWX) feature of the IBM 973X product line (also known as IDNX or Integrated Digital Network Exchange by the manufacturer NET - Network Equipment Technologies Inc.). Items covered in this document include: o LWX features o LWX module descriptions o Planning information - LAN interconnection - Planning worksheet o Installation information o Operator screens The document is intended for network managers, network architects, systems engineers and systems programmers who are considering using the LWX to bridge or route their local area networks (LANs) across a 973X backbone network. (320 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. GBOF-6363: VTAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.1. GG24-1630-00 SNA Network Interconnection (SNI) Planning and Design ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1630-00 SNA Network Interconnection (SNI) Planning and Design This document is intended to serve as a guide when planning, designing, and defining an SNI network. (117 pages) 1984 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.2. GG24-1679-00 SNI Examples and Data Flows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1679-00 SNI Examples and Data Flows SNA Network Interconnection (SNI) provides a technique to interconnect independent NSA Networks. This document contains VTAM V2 R2 and ACF/NCP V3 definitions for a single Gateway - NCP network connection and for a Back-to-Back network connection. Session flows are also provided, along with the corresponding traces for session setup and session outage notification. This document is intended to assist teleprocessing professionals in implementing the Gateway functions. It should be used in combination with the standard publications in SNI. (188 pages) 1985 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.3. GG24-1704-01 Installation of VTAM V3 for VM/SP R4 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-1704-01 Installation of VTAM V3 for VM/SP R4 This document offers guidelines and advice for systems programmers who will install, customize and maintain VTAM Version 3 Releases 1 and 1.1 for VM. Considerations for VM Release 4, the Group Control System (GCS), VM SNA Console Support (VSCS), NCP for VM and SSP for VM are included. (132 pages) 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.4. GG24-3121-00 VTAM V3 R2 and NCP V4 R3 Planning Guide for New Function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3121-00 VTAM V3 R2 and NCP V4 R3 Planning Guide for New Functions This document is intended to assist Systems Programmers and IBM Systems Engineers who plan to install VTAM V3 R2, NCP V4 R3 and SSP V3 R4. Some of the enhancements described are available early in VTAM V3 R1.1, VTAM V3 R1.2, NCP V4 R2 Feature, and NCP V4 Subset Feature. For the Communications Controllers 3270 and 3745, the functions described in this document are contained in NCP V4 R2. (126 pages) 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.5. GG24-3297-00 VTAM APPC API Scenarios and Programming Experiences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3297-00 VTAM APPC API Scenarios and Programming Experiences This document describes how to implement VTAM LU 6.2 programs running under MVS/VTAM V3 R2. It is intended for the experienced SNA communications applications programmer to assist in implementing VTAM LU 6.2 programs. (232 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.6. GG24-3569-01 VTAM V3R4 and V3R4.1 Planning Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3569-01 VTAM V3R4 and V3R4.1 Planning Guide This document investigates the new functions available in ACF/VTAM Version 3 Release 4 and Version 3 Release 4.1. The document includes descriptions of these functions, investigated during a residency project at the International Technical Support Organization in Raleigh. The main emphasis is on the dynamics included in VTAM V3R4 and V3R4.1, as well as some new functions included in the latter. Functions like Multitail Dynamic Definition of a Switched Connection, Dynamic Network Identification, Dynamic Definition of Dependent Logical Units (DDDLU), and Dynamic Modification of Installation-Wide Routines are discussed to some extent. Many other important important functions are described as well. This document is intended for SNA communication network system programmers and IBM systems engineers who have to plan for the implementation of these new VTAM functions. (174 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.7. GG24-3574-00 VTAM V3R3/NCP V5R3 Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3574-00 VTAM V3R3/NCP V5R3 Implementation Guide This document investigates some of the new functions available in ACF/VTAM Version 3 Release 3 and ACF/NCP Version 5 Release 3. It is intended for SNA communications network system programmers and IBM system engineers who have to implement these new VTAM and NCP functions. (210 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.8. GG24-3691-00 VTAM V3R4 for MVS/ESA Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3691-00 VTAM V3R4 for MVS/ESA Implementation Guide This document investigates some of the new functions available in ACF/VTAM Version 3 Release 4 for MVS/ESA. It is intended to be a technical reference on installation hints, customization, and testing experiences accomplished in a residency project at the International Technical Support Organization. This publication is intended for SNA communications network systems programmers and IBM systems engineers planning to implement these new VTAM functions. (252 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.9. GG24-3881-00 VTAM V3R4.1 for MVS/ESA Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3881-00 VTAM V3R4.1 for MVS/ESA Implementation Guide This document investigates the new functions available in VTAM V3 R4.1 for MVS/ESA. It is intended to be a technical reference on installation hints, customization, and testing experiences accomplished during a research project conducted at the International Technical Support Organization. The main emphasis is on the following functions: support for cryptographic key modification, data compression, dynamic dependent definition LU (DDDLU), VTAM enhancements for communication controllers, and non-disruptive deactivation of CDRMs. This publication is intended for SNA communication network system programmers and IBM systems engineers who have to plan for the implementation of these new VTAM functions. (106 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.10. GG24-3941-00 VTAM Version 4 Release 1 for MVS/ESA Planning Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3941-00 VTAM Version 4 Release 1 for MVS/ESA Planning Guide This document describes the new functions and enhancements in VTAM V4R1. The document mainly focuses on VTAM's support for APPN. Descriptions and examples of the new functions and enhancements were produced during a residency at the International Technical Support Organization in Raleigh. This document is not a substitute for the product installation and reference manuals. When implementing one of the described functions, the appropriate VTAM and NCP manuals should be read in conjunction with this document. This document is intended for system engineers, system programmers, and system planners who will plan the implementation of the new VTAM functions. A basic knowledge of VTAM, NCP and APPN concepts is required. (196 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79.11. GG24-4011-00 VTAM Version 4 Release 1 for MVS/ESA Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4011-00 VTAM Version 4 Release 1 for MVS/ESA Implementation Guide This document describes experiences gained in implementing VTAM for MVS/ESA Version 4 Release 1. Its purpose is to assist others in implementing the new function in this product, by providing tested examples and definitions which have actually worked in a VTAM V4R1 environment. The bulk of the document is concerned with APPN, which is the major new function in VTAM V4R1. However, it also covers the other enhancements to the product - Network-qualified names, Dynamic Reconfiguration Enhancements, and Multipath channel-to-channel. This document is intended for SNA network systems programmers and IBM technical support personnel, who plan to implement the functions in this release of VTAM. It assumes a working knowledge of SNA, APPN and previous releases of VTAM. (312 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. GBOF-6364: NCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80.1. GG24-3093-00 Tuning and Problem Analysis for NCP BSC/Start-Stop Devices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3093-00 Tuning and Problem Analysis for NCP BSC/Start-Stop Devices This publication is intended for personnel who provide performance tuning and/or problem analysis for binary synchronous (BSC) and/or Start-Stop definitions in Network Control Program (NCP) for the IBM 3705, 3720, and 3725. This document would be most useful in an installation or or post-installation phase of an NCP installation. (160 pages) 1986 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80.2. GG24-3491-00 NCP V5R3 Planning and Migration Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3491-00 NCP V5R3 Planning and Migration Guide This document describes new functions for the Network Control Program (NCP) Version 5 Release 3, and provides System Support Program (SSP) planning and migration considerations. It is intended for use by IBM Systems Engineers and customer personnel who are responsible for the planning and installation of NCP Version 5 Release 3. (134 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80.3. GG24-3572-01 X.25 NPSI V3 Installation Guide & Definitions Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3572-01 X.25 NPSI Version 3 Installation Guide and Definitions Examples This document gives a basic description of the functions of X.25 NPSI Version 3. It is intended as a guide for IBM system engineers and customer personnel planning and utilizing these functions. Information contained in this document is based on test experiences at the International Technical Support Organization in Raleigh, and on various IBM publications on VTAM, NCP and X.25 NPSI. (228 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80.4. GG24-3785-00 NCP V6 Planning and Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3785-00 NCP V6 Planning and Implementation Guide This document gives a basic description of the new functions in ACF/NCP Version 6 Release 1, 5688-231. It is intended as a guide for IBM systems engineers and customer personnel planning to utilize these new functions. A knowledge of SNA is required and some basic knowledge of TCP/IP might be helpful. Installation examples included in this book are based upon test experience at the ITSO-Raleigh. (224 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. GBOF-6365: 3174 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81.1. GG24-3061-04 IBM 3174 Establishment Controller Installation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3061-04 IBM 3174 Establishment Controller Installation Guide The 3174 Establishment Controller is a very important component in multi-protocol networks involving subarea SNA, Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking, Peer Communication, Token-Ring LAN, X.25, Integrated Services Digital Network, asynchronous communication, and Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. In addition, it offers significant functions such as Local Format Storage, Dynamic Definition of Dependent LUs, ESCON attachment, network management, end-user productivity enhancements, and multi-host connectivity through single link multi-host and multiple upstream physical attachments. Using the Multiple Logical Terminal capability, a user can access multiple host sessions from one terminal. This document describes the 3174 features and functions, with emphasis on their installation, customization and operation. It is intended for systems engineers and customer personnel who are installing the 3174. A knowledge of the 3270 Information Display System is assumed. (824 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81.2. GG24-3365-00 IBM 3174 Rel A4.0 Installation Asynchronous Emulation Adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ .GG24-3365-00 IBM 3174 Release A4.0 Installation Asynchronous Emulation Adapter & Multiple Logical Terminals This document describers the use of the 3174 Subsystem Control Unit Asynchronous Emulation Adapter and the Multiple Logical Terminal Feature. The objective of the document is to help the user install AEA and MLT more easily. (84 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81.3. GG24-3380-00 IBM 3174 CECP Migration Issues ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3380-00 IBM 3174 CECP Migration Issues This document is intended for systems engineers and technical members of customer organizations who plan to migrate an existing installation of hardware and software to the extended national language support of the Country Extended Code Page. It provides basic knowledge in the area of national language support and gives advice on how and when to migrate to CECP using the 3174 establishment controllers. (74 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81.4. GG24-3424-00 NetView DM R2 & 3174 Central Site Change Mgmt Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3424-00 NetView Distribution Manager Release 2 and 3174 Central Site Change Management Implementation Guide The purpose of this publication is to provide guidance and samples for persons implementing 3174 Central Site Change Management (CSCM) for microcode distribution NetView Distribution Manager Release 2. It is intended for IBM systems engineers, customer network systems programmers, network planners, network implementers and network operations staff working on the CSCM project. (418 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81.5. GG24-3702-00 3174 APPN Implementation Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3702-00 3174 APPN Implementation Guide This document describes the 3174 Establishment Controller Configuration Support-C Release 1 Licensed Internal Code Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) and Peer Communication customization. It provides guidance on implementing 3174 APPN and Peer Communication functions in various scenarios involving the IBM OS/2 Communications Manager, Networking Services/2 (NS/2), PC Support/400, Distributed Console Access Facility (DCAF), LAN-to-LAN Wide Area Network Program (LTLW), AS/400, 3174 Type 2.1 Passthru Gateway RPQ 8Q0800 and VTAM/NCP subarea networking. This document is intended for IBM and customer system engineers, system planners, system programmers and network administrators who need to know how to customize the 3174 for APPN and Peer Communication functions and relate the customization responses to the various IBM products mentioned previously. A working knowledge of SNA VTAM/NCP communication, APPN, OS/2, DOS, NS/2, PC Support/400, DCAF, LTLW and AS/400 is assumed. (384 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. GBOF-6366: OSI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82.1. GG24-3415-00 Installation Guidelines for IBM X.400 MTF (VM) & PROFS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3415-00 Installation Guidelines for IBM X.400 MTF (VM) and PROFS Connection This document has been written in order to give guidance to systems engineers and customers who have to install and customize the program offerings, X.400 Message Transfer Facility and X.400 PROFS Connection in VM Environment. This document is a collection of information, examples, and advice that could be helpful to the installer. (168 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82.2. GG24-3645-00 OSI Products Installation Guidelines for OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3645-00 OSI Products Installation Guidelines for OS/2 This document presents an overview of OSI/Communications Subsystems for OS/2 and OSI File Services/2. It provides guidance on the installation, customization and operation of OSI/Communications Subsystem and OSI File Services/2 on an OS/2 platform. It is intended for system administrators installing OSI/CS for OS/2 and OSIFS/2 and product administrators who customize the products once they are installed. Also this document will be helpful to the end users of the OSI/CS for OS/2 and OSIFS/2 products. This document will support IBM system engineers in advising customers about the OSI standards and installing OSI/CS for OS/2 and OSIFS/2. A basic knowledge of OSI, FTAM standards, OS/2, Communications Manager token-ring, Ethernet and X.25 is assumed. (440 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82.3. GG24-3664-01 OSI/Communications Subsystem Programming Guidelines (MVS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3664-01 OSI/Communications Subsystem Programming Guidelines (MVS) This document describes the OSI/Communications Subsystem application program interface and its use. It provides: o The terms and concepts that are used to communicate across an OSI network. o What should be considered in designing the OSI/Communications Subsystem application programs. o The program flow to communicate with a remote application entity. o The Administrative Facility information that must be specified to run an application program in the OSI/Communications Subsystem environment. o How to use the Abstract Syntax Checker outputs. o A description of the OSI/C.S. CICS API. This document is intended for programmers who write application programs using the OSI/Communications Subsystem application program interface. A knowledge of OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) and the OSI/Communications Subsystem is assumed. (312 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82.4. GG24-3756-00 ONDS X.400 API Programming Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3756-00 ONDS X.400 API Programming Guidelines This document describes the Open Network Distribution Services X.400 application program interface and its use. It provides information helpful to design, write or modify user application programs that act as a user agent for the ONDS X.400 product. It also provides information for customizing the ONDS X.400 MHS environment and the OSI/C.S. product in order to run the user agent program. This document is intended for system engineers and programmers who design or write application programs using the Open Network Distribution Services application program interface (API) . A basic knowledge of OSI, X.400 MHS recommendations, OSI/Communications Subsystem and Open Network Distribution Services X.400 is assumed. (196 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82.5. GG24-3845-00 OSI Products Installation Guidelines for MVS and VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3845-00 OSI Products Installation Guidelines for MVS and VM This document describes all the IBM OSI products in the MVS and VM environments. These products are: OSI/CS, ONDS, OSI/FS for MVS and VM and XPC Release 3 for VM only and XDC Release 2 for MVS only. Most of these products have been described separately in previous ITSO publications. This document supersedes those publications. This document provides summarized steps for planning, installing, customizing and operating these products. It is intended for persons who need to install, customize and operate one or more of the IBM OSI products, described in this publication, either in a local or remote configuration. The information and guidance provided is intended to summarize and supplement the more detailed documentation supplied with each of the products. A basic knowledge of the OSI standards and the environment in which the products run is assumed. (694 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82.6. GG24-3846-00 ONDS X.400 R1 and X.400 DISOSS Connection R2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3846-00 ONDS X.400 R1 and X.400 DISOSS Connection R2 Installation, Customization and Operation Experiences This document gives an overview of the IBM Open Network Distribution Services X.400 (ONDS X.400) for MVS and the IBM X.400 DISOSS Connection (XDC) licensed programs, and provides guidance on the installation, customization and operations of these programs. The IBM ONDS X.400 licensed program is designed to allow the IBM System/370 and System/390 to function as a Message Transfer Agent (MTA) in the X.400 Message Handling Environment. Working together with the IBM XDC licensed program, they allow IBM OfficeVision/MVS and DISOSS users to communicate with external X.400 users. This document also contains hints and tips based on interoperation experience with Telecom Canada's public X.400 service. This publication is intended for both customers and IBM system engineers who are planning, installing and using the IBM X.400 products, especially in the MVS environment. A basic knowledge of OSI, X.400, X.25, OSI/Communications Subsystem, VTAM, NCP and NPSI is assumed. (310 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82.7. GG24-4036-00 OSI Multivendor Interoperability Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-4036-00 OSI Multivendor Interoperability Guide This document describes OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) Interoperability testing between IBM and non-IBM products. It provides guidelines for the implementation of an OSI interoperability test environment and details on some of the customization necessary to achieve a satisfactory outcome of selected OSINET test cases. Specific examples of testing with DEC and UNISYS products are included as well as testing with SUN demonstration OSI software. Interoperability test observations are discussed per layer and potential pitfalls are pointed out. This document is intended for systems engineers and those who need to plan for the implementation of an OSI network comprising multivendor platforms. A working knowledge of the Open Systems Interconnection architecture is assumed. (720 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. GBOF-6367: Local Area Networks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83.1. GG24-3178-02 Local Area Networks: Concepts and Products ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3178-02 Local Area Networks: Concepts and Products This document is designed to provide an introduction to the different types of IBM Local Area Networks (LAN's), and a positioning of their product capabilities. The document is intended for customers, IBM Systems Engineers, and Marketing Representatives working in the LAN environment. (400 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83.2. GG24-3291-02 Install Guidelines for the IBM Token-Ring Network Products ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3291-02 Installation Guidelines for the IBM Token-Ring Network Products The purpose of this document is to: 1. Guide the reader in installing hardware devices in the IBM Token-Ring Network. 2. Guide and assist the reader in customizing and installing software and applications for use across the IBM Token-Ring Network. The emphasis is on pointing out the installation/customization parameter relationship between the different products that can communicate with each other. This guide is addressed to system programmers, system analysts and network planners who need to use the IBM Token-Ring Network LAN functions, and for those who need to define these capabilities for communication networks. (777 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83.3. GG24-3388-00 LAN Manager V2.0 & LAN Manager Entry V1.0 Install Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3388-00 LAN Manager V2.0 and LAN Manager Entry V1.0 Installation Guidelines This document is intended for systems engineers and customers who will be implementing IBM LAN Manager Version 2.0 and/or IBM LAN Manager Entry Version 1.0 to provide network management support for attached devices in their local area network. (236 pages) 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83.4. GG24-3754-00 LAN Network Manager V1.0, IBM 8230 Controlled Access ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3754-00 LAN Network Manager V1.0, IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit and LAN Management Utilities/2 This document describes the IBM LAN Network Manager V1.0, the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit and the IBM LAN Management Utilities/2 (an I-Listed PRPQ). It provides information on installation, customization and interaction of the above three products. This document is intended for both IBM System Engineers and customers who need to know how to install and configure these products and how to implement them as a management system. A basic knowledge of IBM Token-Ring Network architecture is assumed. (282 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83.5. GG24-3870-00 The IBM 6611 Network Processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3870-00 The IBM 6611 Network Processor This document describes the IBM 6611 Network Processor functions and the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program (5648-016). It provides an introduction to the concepts, functions, and use of the 6611 Network Processor and Multiprotocol Network Program in various environments. This document is intended for network managers, network architects, systems programmers and systems engineers who need to implement networks which incorporate the 6611 Network Processor with the Multiprotocol Network Program. Some knowledge of networking architectures and protocols is assumed. (316 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83.6. GG24-3942-00 LAN Network Manager V1.1, LAN Network Manager Entry V1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3942-00 LAN Network Manager V1.1, LAN Network Manager Entry V1.0 and LAN Station Manager V1.0 This document describes the LAN Network Manager Version 1.1, LAN Network Manager Entry Version 1.0 and the LAN Station Manager Version 1.0 products. It provides information on how to install, customize and operate all three products. It is intended for systems engineers and customers who will be implementing these products to provide network management support for attached devices in their LAN. (264 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. GBOF-6368: TCP/IP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84.1. GG24-3531-01 TCP/IP V1.2.1 for OS/2 Installation and Interoperability ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3531-01 TCP/IP V1.2.1 for OS/2 Installation and Interoperability This document describes TCP/IP Version 1.2.1 for OS/2, which is a free upgrade from 1.2. The document focuses on how TCP/IP V1.2.1 for OS/2 can be used in a multi-vendor environment with various communications media. It provides information on installation and use of TCP/IP V 1.2.1 for OS/2. This document is intended for the SE audience who will evaluate the product possibilities and who will install the product. The reader is assumed to have a basic knowledge of the TCP/IP protocol suite and be familiar with OS/2 and the OS/2 Communications Manager. For the reader interested in TCP/IP in an OS/2 LAN Server environment, an understanding of LAN Server concepts is assumed. All product versions referenced in this publication are current as of date of publication. (258 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84.2. GG24-3624-02 IBM TCP/IP V2 R2 for VM Installation & Interoperability ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3624-02 IBM TCP/IP Version 2 Release 2 for VM Installation and Interoperability This document provides information to ease the installation and use of IBM TCP/IP V2R2 for VM. It focuses on how IBM TCP/IP V2R2 for VM can be used to interoperate in different environments. The book is organized to help you understand the architecture of IBM TCP/IP V2 for VM, the new functions and enhancements brought by V2R1 and V2R2, and the requirements and guidelines for its installation and tailoring. Each TCP/IP server is discussed and sample configuration files are provided to help you in your system customization. This document is intended for the customers and the systems engineers who will evaluate the product possibilities and install the product. The reader is assumed to have a basic knowledge of the TCP/IP protocol suite and be familiar with the VM and SNA architectures and products. (258 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84.3. GG24-3687-01 IBM TCP/IP Version 2 Release 2 for MVS Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3687-01 IBM TCP/IP Version 2 Release 2 for MVS Installation and Interoperability This publication provides information to facilitate the installation and use of IBM TCP/IP Version 2 Release 2 for MVS. It contains a description of the TCP/IP functions that are implemented in IBM TCP/IP Version 2 Release 2 for MVS and provides information on how the product can be installed, customized and used in different environments. This document is intended for system engineers who will evaluate the product's possibilities and for systems programmers who will plan for and install the product. The reader is assumed to have a basic knowledge of the TCP/IP protocol suite and be familiar with the MVS environment. (346 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84.4. GG24-3840-00 TCP/IP and National Language Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3840-00 TCP/IP and National Language Support This document describes the use and availability of national language support for TCP/IP in the DOS, OS/2, VM and MVS platforms. Focus is on what is standard-related and what is implementation-related. This document is intended for system engineers, customers and third- party professionals concerned with TCP/IP networking to and from DOS, OS/2, VM and MVS. A basic knowledge of TCP/IP is assumed. (174 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84.5. GG24-3852-00 TCP/IP for MVS, VM, OS/2 and DOS Troubleshooting Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3852-00 TCP/IP for MVS, VM, OS/2 and DOS Troubleshooting Guide This document provides information to ease the installation and troubleshooting of a TCP/IP network. It was written using TCP/IP V2R1 for MVS, TCP/IP V2R2 for VM, TCP/IP V1R2 for OS/2, TCP/IP V2R0 for DOS and AIX/6000 V3R2. This document is intended for the customers and systems engineers who will install and maintain TCP/IP networks. It is divided in two parts: Part 1 contains hints and tips about the installation and customization of TCP/IP for MVS, a detailed description of the setup and operation of TCP/IP for MVS/VM over X.25 and SNA links, and gives guidance for installing and operating a name server in the VM environment. Part 2 is dedicated to the use of the basic diagnostic tools included in the IBM TCP/IP products for MVS, VM, OS/2, DOS and the RISC System/6000, to troubleshoot routing problems in a TCP/IP network. (308 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84.6. GG24-3911-00 TCP/IP for MVS, VM, OS/2 and DOS X Window System Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3911-00 TCP/IP for MVS, VM, OS/2 and DOS X Window System Guide The purpose of this document is to provide information pertinent to the implementation of the X Window Systems for TCP/IP under MVS, VM, AIX/6000, OS/2 and DOS. The document focuses on how to customize and use the X Window Systems provided by the following products: o IBM TCP/IP Version 2.1 for MVS running under MVS/ESA o IBM TCP/IP Version 2.2 for VM running under VM/ESA and VM/SP o IBM AIXwindows Environment/6000 Version 1.2 running under AIX/6000 Version 3.2 o IBM TCP/IP Version 1.2.1 for OS/2 running under OS/2 Version 2.0 o HCL-eXceed Plus Version 3.0.1 with TCP/IP Version 2.0 for DOS running under DOS Version 5.0 o HCL-eXceed/W Version 3.0.1 with TCP/IP Version 2.0 for DOS running under DOS Version 5.0 and Microsoft Windows Version 3.0 The X Windows client application environments for MVS, VM and AIX/6000 are discussed as well as the interoperability with a non-IBM platform. It is assumed that the reader has a working knowledge of TCP/IP and each of the operating systems listed above. (176 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84.7. GG24-4087-00 Using NFS in a Multivendor Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4087-00 Using NFS in a Multivendor Environment This document provides information to facilitate the installation and usage of the Network File System (NFS) on various operating system platforms. Particular consideration is given to NFS implementation in a multivendor environment. This document is intended for customer personnel and IBM system engineers who will evaluate and implement NFS on one or more of the mentioned operating systems. (386 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. GBOF-6369: X.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85.1. GG24-3369-01 IBM 9370 VTAM X.25 Support V3 R3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3369-01 IBM 9370 VTAM X.25 Support V3 R3 This document is intended to be a technical reference on installation, customization and testing various switched network combinations. It is intended for IBM Systems Engineers and customer personnel using new facilities of integrated X.25 support available for the IBM 9370. (200 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85.2. GG24-3458-01 X.25 Guide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3458-01 X.25 Guide This document describes the entire range of IBM X.25 product implementations as marketed by IBM in May 1991. There is a chapter on X.25 fundamentals, a chapter on each of the major communication forms (PAD, SNA, TCP/IP, and OSI), a chapter on NetView, NPM, and NSF, and a chapter about XI, X25NET, and NPSI. In these chapters the implementation of X.25 support in MVS, VM, VSE, AS/400, AIX/6000, AIX PS/2, and OS/2 is presented. Finally, the impact of ISDN, frame relay, and cell relay is discussed. This document is intended for data processing professionals with an interest in IBM X.25 implementations. The reader's knowledge of basic telecommunications and the IBM product range is assumed. Many illustrations and a very detailed keyword index is included, thus providing an entry point for the professional who is perhaps newer to the subject. (180 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85.3. GG24-3668-00 XI V2R2 and NSF V1R3 Implementation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3668-00 XI V2R2 and NSF V1R3 Implementation This document describes the installation of X.25 SNA Interconnection V2R2 and X.25 SNA Network Supervisory Function V1R3 in an MVS/ESA environment. This document is intended for system programmers who are installing these products. It provides step-by-step guidance through the installation process and examples of various connections. A knowledge of VTAM, NCP, NetView and X.25 NPSI is assumed. (276 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85.4. GG24-3817-00 X25Net R1 Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3817-00 X25Net R1 Installation This document describes the installation of a private X.25 network based on Release 1 of the IBM X25Net products. It gives detailed explanations of the steps necessary to install hardware and software of X25Net Manager and X25Net Switch nodes and to connect those nodes to form a private packet switched data network. The document contains a wide variety of configuration scenarios describing the connectivity options of X25Net. These scenarios include 'normal' X.25 DTE to X.25 DTE connections but also connections to and between the different SNA PAD functions provided by X25Net. (222 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. GBOF-6370: OS/2 Communications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86.1. GG24-3553-00 OS/2 EE 1.2 Cookbook:Communications Mgr SNA Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3553-00 IBM OS/2 Extended Edition 1.2 Cookbook: Communications Manager SNA Environment This document provides an introduction of the IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2. It is intended for IBM marketing representatives and systems engineers who are responsible for proposing, designing, implementing or maintaining IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2 based applications, and for system developers and users of these systems. (498 pages) 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86.2. GG24-3662-00 Networking Services/2 Install, Custom, Op APPN for OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3662-00 Networking Services/2 Installation, Customization, and Operation APPN for OS/2 Networking Services/2 allows any workstation running OS/2 EE to participate in an APPN network. This document provides information on how to install, customize and operate Networking Services/2 in various APPN topologies. Information about the APPC enhancements included in Networking Services/2 is not the focus of this book. A knowledge of the APPN architecture and OS/2 Communications Manager is assumed. The intended audience includes those planning to install Networking Services/2 and engineers specializing in OS/2 or networks. (326 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86.3. GG24-3876-00 IBM Extended Services for OS/2 Communications Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3876-00 IBM Extended Services for OS/2 Communications Manager New Features and Enhancements IBM Extended Services for OS/2 provides a set of communications and database services that can be installed on an OS/2 Standard Edition Version 1.30.1 and later, or on an OS/2 Version 2.0 base. This product is a follow on product to OS/2 Extended Edition. This book describes the Communications Manager features in Extended Services that are new or changed from its predecessor product OS/2 Extended Edition. In addition, this book provides an overview of Extended Services and Communications Manager, and provides details of the problem determination procedures available within Communications Manager. (402 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86.4. GG24-3949-00 IBM Personal Communications/3270 V3 Implementation Gde ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3949-00 IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.0 Implementation Guide This document describes Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.0 in Entry Level DOS, Full Function DOS and Windows environments. It provides guidance on customizing it as a network station and as a gateway for a variety of host connection scenarios involving CUT, DFT, local area networks (token-ring and Ethernet), 3174 Peer Communication, PVM/PC LAN, SDLC, X.25 and asynchronous communication. Definitions for related products, such as IBM ACF/NCP, ACF/VTAM, 3174, LAN Support Program, OS/2 V2.0, ES 1.0 and PC 3270 EP V3.0, are also provided. Other topics include host-directed printing, file transfer, expanded memory and high memory area considerations. A sample trace interpretation is included to assist users with problem determination. This document is intended for IBM and customer personnel required to install and configure Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.0. It should be used as supplementary material to the product documentation. A working knowledge of DOS is assumed. (502 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86.5. GG24-3958-00 Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 New Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3958-00 Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 New Features This document describes the new and enhanced features of IBM Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 It is meant as a guide and tutorial to the new features and facilities available with the single user version of this release, and to highlight the differences with previous releases. It is not meant to replace any of the product publications; these product publications are referenced throughout this document in order to guide the reader to the appropriate sources of additional and more detailed information. This document is intended for persons who already have some familiarity with previous releases of OS/2 Communications Manager and who wish to quickly get familiar with the new and enhanced features of this new version. (276 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86.6. GG24-4005-00 Integration of Common OS/2 Communication Products ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4005-00 Integration of Common OS/2 Communication Products Communications software is easy to install, isn't it? Well, perhaps that is true if you only want one, two or three products on one workstation. But what if you need six or more different communications products on one workstation? Their documentation tends to concentrate on installation on a simple, empty machine. This book focuses on the COMBINED installation of twelve products: NTS/2, RouteXpander/2, CM/2, LAN Server, DB2/2, DDCS/2, PC Support/400, LSM, DCAF, TCP/IP, LMU and NetView DM/2. For example, are there problems caused by the order of the statements in CONFIG.SYS, or by the required number of Link Stations or SAPs? We describe how these are installed on a typical scenario comprising a User Workstation, a Gateway/Server and an Administrator Workstation. This book is intended for communications specialists. A good knowledge of OS/2, LANs, WANs, AS/400, and mainframes is assumed. (280 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86.7. GG24-4142-00 Communications Manager/2 Version 1.1 Enhancements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ New GG24-4142-00 Communications Manager/2 Version 1.1 Enhancements This document describes the new and enhanced features of IBM Communications Manager/2 Version 1.1. It is meant as a guide and tutorial to the new features and facilities available with this new release of CM/2. It is not meant to replace any of the product publications; these product publications are referenced throughout this document in order to guide the reader to sources of additional and more detailed information. This document is intended for persons who already have some familiarity with previous releases of Communications Manager and who wish to quickly get familiar with the new and enhanced features of this new release. (276 pages) 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. GBOF-6371: System/Network Design ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87.1. GG24-3398-01 IBM Multisegment LAN Design Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3398-01 IBM Multisegment LAN Design Guidelines This document is intended to provide assistance for customers and Systems Engineers in the task of planning for a large multisegment LAN. This edition is different from the first edition in that it provides guidelines for designing complex high-availability LANs, using the latest IBM products. This edition applies to Version 2.2 of the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program (Product Number 53F7724), Version 1.0 of the IBM PC Network Bridge Program (Product Number 96X5860), the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the enhanced Ethernet attachment module (Product Number 74F9465) and the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the token-ring attachment module (Product Number 74F9355). (282 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87.2. GG24-3718-00 Network Traffice Analysis Using NPR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3718-00 Network Traffice Analysis Using NPR The purpose of this document is to help customers and/or system engineers when carrying out customer SNA or SNI tuning, capacity planning and traffic analysis studies. A knowledge of SNA is required and a basic understanding of the program offering Network Performance Reporter - NPR (5785-EEK) is assumed. Some of the methodologies and techniques required to analyze the output data from the NPRI are described, and guidance is provided for analysis of NPRI output reports. In order to give the reader a better understanding of the whole process, a fully documented case study based on real data was analyzed. It includes aspects such as general overview, capacity planning, system health and performance tuning. In cases where it has been necessary, all reports and charts were modified to remove all possibility of customer identification. (136 pages) 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87.3. GG24-3811-00 Network Design and Analysis Using NETDA Version 2 Release 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3811-00 Network Design and Analysis Using NETDA Version 2 Release 2 This document is intended to introduce the network designer to NETDA, an IBM tool used to design and analyze new and existing SNA backbone networks. The intended audience is IBM systems engineers and customers who are responsible for the design and analysis of SNA backbone networks. The information contained in the document provides an introduction to the use of NETDA as a tool to assist in the design of the initial configuration of the SNA backbone network. It also provides guidance on how one may add nodes to a network, move applications within a network, generate routes and create path tables for the network. Examples of using NETDA for component failure impact analysis and capacity planning are included, and a method of designing the SNA backbone network to accommodate APPN traffic routed across the SNA backbone network is discussed. A basic knowledge of data communications and SNA subarea networking is assumed. (138 pages) 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87.4. GG24-3915-00 Central and Expanded Storage Capacity Planning ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ GG24-3915-00 Central and Expanded Storage Capacity Planning Resources in a balanced system are not independent variables in determining system performance. Central and expanded storage are two important components and they must be well evaluated. This document describes how to use the MVS Storage and Paging Analyzer tool - MVSSTOR. This tool can assist the SE in host storage design activities. The total amount of storage needed for a specific workload can be determined. The balance between Central and Expanded storage can also be evaluated. (132 pages) 1992